continuum plain english reference

Plain English Language Reference

Andover Controls Corporation ii

© 2004, Andover Controls Corporation All Rights Reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced, read or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without prior written permission of Andover Controls Corporation. Produced in the United States of America. Infinity is a trademark of Andover Controls Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Continuum Plain English Language Reference April, 2004 Andover Controls part number: 30-3001-872 The information in this book is furnished for informational purposes only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by Andover Controls Corporation. Andover Controls Corporation, assumes no liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document. Andover Controls Corporation 300 Brickstone Square Andover, MA 01810 (978) 470-0555 fax: (978) 470-0946

Plain English Language Reference iii

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Fundamentals At a Glance..............................................................................................................................1-1

Overview..................................................................................................................1-1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................1-2

The Plain English Language......................................................................................1-2 Continuum Products .................................................................................................1-2

Continuum System Architecture...............................................................................................1-3 Simple Continuum System........................................................................................1-3 Moderate Continuum System ....................................................................................1-3 Network Controllers .................................................................................................1-4 Infinet Controllers.....................................................................................................1-5 MS/TP Controllers....................................................................................................1-5 I/O Modules .............................................................................................................1-5 Workstations.............................................................................................................1-5 CyberStation Software ..............................................................................................1-6 Database...................................................................................................................1-6 Infinet.......................................................................................................................1-6 LBUS .......................................................................................................................1-6 MS/TP......................................................................................................................1-6

Objects and Classes..................................................................................................................1-7 Introduction ..............................................................................................................1-7 Objects .....................................................................................................................1-7 Classes .....................................................................................................................1-7 BACnet Objects vs. Continuum Objects ....................................................................1-7

Attributes.................................................................................................................................1-8 Definition .................................................................................................................1-8 How to View Attributes ............................................................................................1-8 Basic Attribute Listing..............................................................................................1-9 Accessibility.............................................................................................................1-9

Object Ownership ..................................................................................................................1-10 Hierarchical View of System Objects ......................................................................1-10 Network Paths ........................................................................................................1-11

Naming Conventions..............................................................................................................1-12 Object Names .........................................................................................................1-12 Object Naming Convention.....................................................................................1-12 Aliase Names..........................................................................................................1-13 Alias Naming Convention .......................................................................................1-13

iv Andover Controls Corporation

Chapter 2 The Plain English Integrated Development Environment At a Glance.............................................................................................................................. 2-1

Introduction.............................................................................................................. 2-1 Opening the Plain English IDE................................................................................................. 2-2

To Create a New Program File.................................................................................. 2-2 From the Continuum Main Menu.............................................................................. 2-2 From the Continuum Explorer .................................................................................. 2-3 From the Start Menu................................................................................................. 2-3 Creating the Program File......................................................................................... 2-4

Plain English IDE Features ...................................................................................................... 2-5 IDE Tools Overview................................................................................................. 2-5 Rearranging IDE Toolbars and Windows .................................................................. 2-6 Title Bar................................................................................................................... 2-6

The Menu Bar.......................................................................................................................... 2-7 Offers Seven Menu Selections .................................................................................. 2-7 File Menu................................................................................................................. 2-7 Edit Menu ................................................................................................................ 2-7 View Menu .............................................................................................................. 2-8 Build Menu .............................................................................................................. 2-8 Tools Menu.............................................................................................................. 2-8 Window Menu.......................................................................................................... 2-8 Help Menu ............................................................................................................... 2-8

The Main and Find Toolbars .................................................................................................... 2-9 The Main Toolbar..................................................................................................... 2-9 The Find Toolbar...................................................................................................... 2-9

The Check Toolbar and Command Line ................................................................................. 2-10 The Check Toolbar................................................................................................. 2-10 The Command Line................................................................................................ 2-10

The IDE Explorer .................................................................................................................. 2-11 Features.................................................................................................................. 2-11 Popup Shortcut Menu ............................................................................................. 2-12

The IDE Editor ...................................................................................................................... 2-13 Features.................................................................................................................. 2-13 Displaying Multiple Programs ................................................................................ 2-13

The IDE Assistant.................................................................................................................. 2-14 Features.................................................................................................................. 2-14 Selecting and Placing Objects ................................................................................. 2-14

The IDE Watch Bar ............................................................................................................... 2-15 Purpose .................................................................................................................. 2-15

Docking and Floating............................................................................................................. 2-16 Docking and Floating Options ................................................................................ 2-16 Using the Docking and Floating Options................................................................. 2-16

Plain English Language Reference v

Creating and Configuring a Plain English Program File ..........................................................2-17

Configuring the Program File..................................................................................2-17 Using the Editor .....................................................................................................................2-18

Program Guidelines ................................................................................................2-18 Text Entry ..............................................................................................................2-18 The Editor Shortcut Menu.......................................................................................2-19 Finding Text ...........................................................................................................2-20 Replacing Text .......................................................................................................2-21 Going to a Labeled Program Line............................................................................2-22 Importing Programs................................................................................................2-22 Exporting Programs................................................................................................2-23 Saving the Program.................................................................................................2-24 Opening the Program ..............................................................................................2-25 Running the Program from the Command Line........................................................2-25 Monitoring the Program File Status.........................................................................2-26 Stopping the Program .............................................................................................2-27

Using the Plain English Wizard..............................................................................................2-28 What it Does...........................................................................................................2-28 How to Access It....................................................................................................2-28 The Wizard File Selection Menu .............................................................................2-29 Selecting and Configuring a Wizard Program ..........................................................2-29 The Object References Screen.................................................................................2-31 The Final Wizard Screen.........................................................................................2-32

Chapter 3 Programs, Files and the Scanning Process

At a Glance..............................................................................................................................3-1 Introduction ..............................................................................................................3-1

Plain English Language Programs ............................................................................................3-2 Instructions and Statements.......................................................................................3-2 Names and Case Sensitivity ......................................................................................3-2 Lines and Line Labels ...............................................................................................3-3 Editor Line Limitations.............................................................................................3-3 Expressions ..............................................................................................................3-4 Numeric Expressions ................................................................................................3-4 String Expressions ....................................................................................................3-4 Comments ................................................................................................................3-4

Keywords ................................................................................................................................3-5 Description and Types ..............................................................................................3-5 Other Words .............................................................................................................3-5 Command Lines........................................................................................................3-5

Program Flow ..........................................................................................................................3-6 Types of Program Flow.............................................................................................3-6 Looping vs FallThru .................................................................................................3-6 Triggers....................................................................................................................3-7

Constructing Program Statements.............................................................................................3-8 General Rules ...........................................................................................................3-8 Conditional and Unconditional Instructions...............................................................3-8

vi Andover Controls Corporation

IF…THEN ............................................................................................................... 3-9 Use of "The" ............................................................................................................ 3-9

Program Files ........................................................................................................................ 3-10 What is a Program File?.......................................................................................... 3-10 Keep Control in a Single Program File.................................................................... 3-10

The Scanning Process ............................................................................................................ 3-11 How it Works......................................................................................................... 3-11 Scan Action List..................................................................................................... 3-11 Other Actions......................................................................................................... 3-11 The Basic Stages .................................................................................................... 3-12 1. Updating System Variables................................................................................. 3-13 2. Updating Schedules ............................................................................................ 3-13 3. Updating Input Points ......................................................................................... 3-13 4. Running Programs and Executing Commands ..................................................... 3-14 5. Updating Output Points....................................................................................... 3-14 6. Evaluating Alarms .............................................................................................. 3-15 Updating the Status Bar .......................................................................................... 3-15

Other Scanning Issues............................................................................................................ 3-16 Numeric, String, and DateTime Points .................................................................... 3-16 Updating Point Logs............................................................................................... 3-16 Triggering Programs from Points............................................................................ 3-16 Exported Points ...................................................................................................... 3-16 Power Failure Conditions and the Firing Order ....................................................... 3-16

Chapter 4 Points, Constants and Variables At a Glance.............................................................................................................................. 4-1

Introduction.............................................................................................................. 4-1 Points ...................................................................................................................................... 4-2

Types of Points......................................................................................................... 4-2 Hardware Points....................................................................................................... 4-2 Input Points.............................................................................................................. 4-2 Output Points ........................................................................................................... 4-3 Software Points ........................................................................................................ 4-3 Numeric Points......................................................................................................... 4-3 Multi-State Value Points........................................................................................... 4-3 String Points............................................................................................................. 4-3 DateTime Points....................................................................................................... 4-4 Controller vs. Workstation Points ............................................................................. 4-4

Constants................................................................................................................................. 4-5 Description and Types .............................................................................................. 4-5 Numeric Constant..................................................................................................... 4-5 Integer Numbers....................................................................................................... 4-5 Floating Point Numbers............................................................................................ 4-5 Examples of Numeric Constants ............................................................................... 4-5 How the Controller Interprets Numbers..................................................................... 4-5 String Constants ....................................................................................................... 4-6

Plain English Language Reference vii

Rules for String Constants.........................................................................................4-6 System Defined Constants.........................................................................................4-6

Variables .................................................................................................................................4-7 Description and Types ..............................................................................................4-7 Numeric Variables ....................................................................................................4-7 String Variables ........................................................................................................4-7 DateTime Variables ..................................................................................................4-7

Local Variables........................................................................................................................4-8 Description ...............................................................................................................4-8 Numeric Keyword ....................................................................................................4-8 String Keyword ........................................................................................................4-8 DateTime Keyword...................................................................................................4-8

System Variables .....................................................................................................................4-9 Description ...............................................................................................................4-9 Programmable System Variables...............................................................................4-9 System Variables Listing ........................................................................................4-10 STATUS# System Variables ...................................................................................4-13 PowerFail and other Power Related System Variables .............................................4-14

Chapter 5 Operators and Expressions

At a Glance..............................................................................................................................5-1 Introduction ..............................................................................................................5-1

Order of Action........................................................................................................................5-2 Definition of an Operator ..........................................................................................5-2 Listing Order ............................................................................................................5-2

Plus Sign, Minus Sign, Negation, BITNOT, and Percentage......................................................5-3 + number ..................................................................................................................5-3 - number ...................................................................................................................5-3 NOT number ............................................................................................................5-3 BITNOT integer .......................................................................................................5-3 number %.................................................................................................................5-3

Fundamental Operators ............................................................................................................5-4 Addition ...................................................................................................................5-4 Subtraction ...............................................................................................................5-4 Multiplication ...........................................................................................................5-4 Division....................................................................................................................5-4 Modulus ...................................................................................................................5-4 Exponentiation..........................................................................................................5-4

Comparative Operators.............................................................................................................5-5 General.....................................................................................................................5-5 Less Than .................................................................................................................5-5 Less Than or Equal ...................................................................................................5-5 Greater Than.............................................................................................................5-5 Greater Than or Equal...............................................................................................5-5 Equal........................................................................................................................5-6 Not Equal .................................................................................................................5-6 Comparing String Values ..........................................................................................5-6 Type Conversion.......................................................................................................5-6

viii Andover Controls Corporation

List and Range Operators.......................................................................................... 5-7 IS IN........................................................................................................................ 5-7 IS NOT IN ............................................................................................................... 5-7 IS THRU.................................................................................................................. 5-7 IS BETWEEN.......................................................................................................... 5-7

Bit Operators ........................................................................................................................... 5-8 BITAND .................................................................................................................. 5-8 BITOR..................................................................................................................... 5-8 BITXOR .................................................................................................................. 5-8 Truth Table .............................................................................................................. 5-9

AND/OR and String Joining Operators................................................................................... 5-10 AND ...................................................................................................................... 5-10 OR ......................................................................................................................... 5-10 String Joining......................................................................................................... 5-10

Chapter 6 Functions, Arrays, and Logs

At a Glance.............................................................................................................................. 6-1 Introduction.............................................................................................................. 6-1

Functions................................................................................................................................. 6-2 Definition................................................................................................................. 6-2 Calling a Function .................................................................................................... 6-3 Calling a Function without Arguments...................................................................... 6-3 Calling a Function with Arguments........................................................................... 6-3 Functions that Return a Value................................................................................... 6-4

Arrays ..................................................................................................................................... 6-5 Definition................................................................................................................. 6-5 Setting Up an Array of Variables .............................................................................. 6-5

Logs ........................................................................................................................................ 6-6 Definition................................................................................................................. 6-6 How a Log Updates .................................................................................................. 6-6 How to Retrieve Log Values..................................................................................... 6-7 Log Update Intervals ................................................................................................ 6-7 Log Types ................................................................................................................ 6-7 Setting Up a Log ...................................................................................................... 6-8 Using Arrays or Logs in Functions............................................................................ 6-8

Plain English Language Reference ix

Chapter 7 Keywords

At a Glance..............................................................................................................................7-1 Introduction ..............................................................................................................7-1 What's in this Chapter ...............................................................................................7-1

Section 1 Format Conventions....................................................................................7-2 Keyword Formatting Standard..................................................................................................7-2

Identical Format for All Keywords............................................................................7-2 Format......................................................................................................................7-2 Purpose.....................................................................................................................7-2 Remarks ...................................................................................................................7-2 Example ...................................................................................................................7-2 Related Keywords.....................................................................................................7-2 Alias.........................................................................................................................7-3 Products Supported...................................................................................................7-3 Modes Available.......................................................................................................7-3

Text and Symbols Used in the Format Heading.........................................................................7-4 Format Heading Information .....................................................................................7-4 Capital Letters ..........................................................................................................7-4 Bold Italics ...............................................................................................................7-4 Parentheses ( ) ..........................................................................................................7-4 Italics .......................................................................................................................7-5 Comma (,) and Colon (:) ...........................................................................................7-5 Period (.) ..................................................................................................................7-5

Format Terms in Bold Italics ....................................................................................................7-6 Replacement of Terms ..............................................................................................7-6 Number ....................................................................................................................7-6 Integer ......................................................................................................................7-6 String .......................................................................................................................7-6 Name........................................................................................................................7-6 List...........................................................................................................................7-6

Section 2 Keyword Groups...........................................................................................7-7 Logical Keyword Groups .........................................................................................................7-7

Logical Keyword Groups Listing ..............................................................................7-7 Restricted Keywords...............................................................................................7-11 250 Display Unit Keywords ....................................................................................7-11

Section 3 Keywords A through C .................................................................7-12 ABS Function ........................................................................................................................7-12 AccessLog System variable....................................................................................................7-13 AccessServer System variable ...............................................................................................7-15 ACOS Function .....................................................................................................................7-17 Alarms System variable.........................................................................................................7-18 AND Operator .......................................................................................................................7-19 ARG System variable ............................................................................................................7-22 ASC Function........................................................................................................................7-24 ASIN Function ......................................................................................................................7-25 ASK Function........................................................................................................................7-26

x Andover Controls Corporation

ATAN Function .................................................................................................................... 7-29 ATAN2 Function .................................................................................................................. 7-30 AUDIOBELL Function ........................................................................................................ 7-31 AvailRecords System variable............................................................................................... 7-32 AVERAGE Function ............................................................................................................ 7-33 BACKLIGHT System variable ............................................................................................. 7-35 BASEDON..GOTO Statement .............................................................................................. 7-36 BEGINPOLYLINE Function ............................................................................................... 7-39 BITAND Operator ................................................................................................................ 7-42 BITNOT Operator ................................................................................................................ 7-43 BITOR Operator................................................................................................................... 7-44 BITXOR Operator ................................................................................................................ 7-45 BLUE Constant..................................................................................................................... 7-46 BREAK Statement................................................................................................................ 7-47 CabinetTamper System variable .......................................................................................... 7-48 CD Statement........................................................................................................................ 7-49 CEILING Function............................................................................................................... 7-52 CHR Function....................................................................................................................... 7-54 CLEARSCREEN Function .................................................................................................. 7-56 CLOSE Function .................................................................................................................. 7-57 CloseFile Function ................................................................................................................ 7-59 CloseList Function ................................................................................................................ 7-62 CloseWindow Function......................................................................................................... 7-65 CONTINUE Statement......................................................................................................... 7-67 CONTROL Function ............................................................................................................. 7-68 COS Function ....................................................................................................................... 7-70 CPUPower System variable (programmable)......................................................................... 7-71 CurUser Function ................................................................................................................. 7-73 CurWorkstation Function .................................................................................................... 7-74

Section 4 Keywords D through G................................................................. 7-75 DATE System variable.......................................................................................................... 7-75 DATETIME Statement......................................................................................................... 7-77 DAYOFMONTH System variable ........................................................................................ 7-80 DAYOFYEAR System variable ............................................................................................ 7-82 DeleteExtLog Function ......................................................................................................... 7-83 Dial Function ........................................................................................................................ 7-86 DIFFTIME Function ............................................................................................................ 7-93 DISABLE Statement............................................................................................................. 7-96 DIVIDED BY Operator ........................................................................................................ 7-98 DRAWELLIPSE Function ................................................................................................... 7-99 DRAWLINE Function ........................................................................................................ 7-102 DRAWRECTANGLE Function ......................................................................................... 7-104 ENABLE Statement............................................................................................................ 7-107 ENDPOLYLINE Function ................................................................................................. 7-109 EOF Constant ..................................................................................................................... 7-112 EQUALS Operator ............................................................................................................. 7-113 ERRORS System variable................................................................................................... 7-114

Plain English Language Reference xi

EventLogSize System variable ............................................................................................7-116 EXPONENTIAL Function..................................................................................................7-118 FACTORIAL Function.......................................................................................................7-119 FAILURE Constant.............................................................................................................7-120 File Statement......................................................................................................................7-121 FILL Constant....................................................................................................................7-124 FLOOR Function ................................................................................................................7-125 FOR..NEXT Statement .......................................................................................................7-127 FREEMEM System variable..............................................................................................7-131 GetExtLog Function............................................................................................................7-132 GETNAME Function ..........................................................................................................7-135 GetObject Function.............................................................................................................7-139 GOTO Function ..................................................................................................................7-144

Section 5 Keywords H through N ...............................................................7-147 HangUp Function................................................................................................................7-147 HOD System variable..........................................................................................................7-153 HOUR System variable ......................................................................................................7-154 IF.. THEN .. ELSE Statement ............................................................................................7-155 INFINET#COUNT System variable ...................................................................................7-161 InitModem Function ...........................................................................................................7-163 IOUCommFlt# System variable..........................................................................................7-168 IS… Operator ......................................................................................................................7-169 LCDPassword System variable ...........................................................................................7-174 LEFT Function....................................................................................................................7-175 LENGTH Function .............................................................................................................7-176 LINE Statement ..................................................................................................................7-177 LINEPOINT Function ........................................................................................................7-182 LN Function ........................................................................................................................7-188 LOAD Statement on controller.............................................................................................7-189 LOAD Statement on workstation ........................................................................................7-193 LOCATE Function..............................................................................................................7-197 LOG Function .....................................................................................................................7-201 MAXIMUM Function .........................................................................................................7-202 MAXITEM Function ..........................................................................................................7-204 MessageWindow Constant ..................................................................................................7-206 MicroPower System variable ..............................................................................................7-207 MID Function......................................................................................................................7-209 MINIMUM Function ..........................................................................................................7-210 MINITEM Function............................................................................................................7-212 MINUS Operator .................................................................................................................7-214 MINUTE System variable ...................................................................................................7-215 MOD Operator ....................................................................................................................7-217 ModemPower ( System variable (programmable) ................................................................7-218 MONTH System variable....................................................................................................7-220 MOVE Statement ................................................................................................................7-222 NewAlarmCount System variable.......................................................................................7-224 NOFILL Constant...............................................................................................................7-226 NOT Operator .....................................................................................................................7-227

xii Andover Controls Corporation

NUMERIC Statement......................................................................................................... 7-228 NUMTOSTR Function ....................................................................................................... 7-230

Section 6 Keywords O through R............................................................... 7-231 OBJECT Statement ............................................................................................................ 7-231 OFF Constant..................................................................................................................... 7-233 ON Constant........................................................................................................................ 7-234 -ON Constant ...................................................................................................................... 7-235 OPEN Function (comm port).............................................................................................. 7-236 OpenFile Function .............................................................................................................. 7-238 OpenList Function .............................................................................................................. 7-241 OR Operator........................................................................................................................ 7-253 P Statement ......................................................................................................................... 7-256 PASSED Function............................................................................................................... 7-258 PlayAudio Statement .......................................................................................................... 7-259 PLUS Operator.................................................................................................................... 7-261 PositionFile Function.......................................................................................................... 7-262 PowerFail System variable.................................................................................................. 7-266 PowerUpTime System variable........................................................................................... 7-267 PRINT Statement................................................................................................................ 7-268 RANDOM Function............................................................................................................ 7-277 READ Function (comm port) .............................................................................................. 7-278 ReadFile Function............................................................................................................... 7-281 ReadProperty Function ...................................................................................................... 7-287 ReaderPower System variable ............................................................................................ 7-288 Relinquish Function............................................................................................................ 7-290 REPEAT..UNTIL Statement .............................................................................................. 7-292 Return Statement ............................................................................................................... 7-293 RIGHT Function................................................................................................................ 7-295 ROTATE Statement............................................................................................................ 7-296 ROUND Function ............................................................................................................... 7-298 RUN Statement ................................................................................................................... 7-300

Section 7 Keywords S through Z................................................................ 7-305 SAVE Statement (on controller) .......................................................................................... 7-305 SAVE Statement on workstation.......................................................................................... 7-311 SCAN System variable........................................................................................................ 7-315 SEARCH Function ............................................................................................................. 7-317 SECOND System variable .................................................................................................. 7-318 SELECT (CASE) Statement ............................................................................................... 7-319 SET Statement .................................................................................................................... 7-322 SETDISPLAY Function ..................................................................................................... 7-325 Shell Statement.................................................................................................................... 7-327 Show Statement................................................................................................................... 7-330 SHOWREPORT Statement................................................................................................ 7-332 SIN Function....................................................................................................................... 7-334 SQRT Function................................................................................................................... 7-335 StandardDeviation Function .............................................................................................. 7-336

Plain English Language Reference xiii

STATUS# System variable (programmable) ........................................................................7-339 STOP Statement..................................................................................................................7-340 STRING Statement .............................................................................................................7-342 STRINGFILL Function ......................................................................................................7-344 STRTODATE Function ......................................................................................................7-347 STRTONUM Function........................................................................................................7-350 SUCCESS Constant ............................................................................................................7-351 SUM Function .....................................................................................................................7-352 SystemStatus System variable .............................................................................................7-354 TAB Function......................................................................................................................7-356 TAN Function......................................................................................................................7-357 TD Local variable................................................................................................................7-358 TH Local variable................................................................................................................7-359 THE Statement....................................................................................................................7-360 TIMEPIECE Function........................................................................................................7-361 TIMES Operator .................................................................................................................7-363 TM Local variable ...............................................................................................................7-364 TOD System variable ..........................................................................................................7-365 TOUCHEDCELL System variable .....................................................................................7-367 TRUNCATE Function ........................................................................................................7-370 TS Local variable ................................................................................................................7-371 TURN Statement .................................................................................................................7-372 UniquePIN System variable ................................................................................................7-374 UpDate Function .................................................................................................................7-375 UpdateExtLog Function......................................................................................................7-380 VERSION System variable .................................................................................................7-387 WEEKDAY System variable...............................................................................................7-388 WHILE Statement ..............................................................................................................7-390 WHITE Constant ................................................................................................................7-392 WriteFile Function ..............................................................................................................7-393 WriteProperty Function......................................................................................................7-397 YEAR System variable........................................................................................................7-399 Appendix A ASCII Codes ......................................................................A-1

Appendix B Reserved Words ...............................................................B-1

Appendix C Attributes...........................................................................C-1

Appendix D Programming the 250 Display Unit ................................D-1 About The DCX 250 Display Unit...........................................................................................D-1

250 Display Unit Description ............................................................................. D-1 Understanding Predrawn Graphic Controls ..............................................................................D-2

Predrawn Control Graphics ...................................................................................... D-2 Placing a Predrawn Graphic Control on the 250 Screen............................................................D-4

Preliminary Steps..................................................................................................... D-4 Basic Considerations................................................................................................ D-4 Additional Considerations........................................................................................ D-4 The CONTROL Keyword........................................................................................ D-4

xiv Andover Controls Corporation

The Arguments........................................................................................................ D-5 CONTROL Keyword Example ................................................................................ D-7 Setting Up the Software........................................................................................... D-7 Format .................................................................................................................... D-8 Argument Descriptions............................................................................................ D-8 Steps and Tick Marks .............................................................................................. D-9 Positioning the Control ............................................................................................ D-9

Setting the Control Size ........................................................................................................ D-10 Switches and Knobs Cannot be Resized ................................................................. D-10 Gauge Controls Retain Their Shape ....................................................................... D-10 Minimum Control Size .......................................................................................... D-11 If the Control doesn't Appear ................................................................................. D-11

Graphic Control Style 1 Specifications.................................................................................. D-12 Graphic Control Style 2 Specifications.................................................................................. D-13 Graphic Control Style 3 Specifications.................................................................................. D-14 Graphic Control Style 4 Specifications.................................................................................. D-15 Graphic Control Style 5 Specifications.................................................................................. D-16 Graphic Control Style 6 Specifications.................................................................................. D-17 Graphic Control Style 7 Specifications.................................................................................. D-19 Graphic Control Style 8 Specifications.................................................................................. D-21 Graphic Control Style 9 Specifications.................................................................................. D-23 Graphic Control Style 10 Specifications ................................................................................ D-25 Graphic Control Style 11 Specifications ................................................................................ D-27 Graphic Control Style 12 Specifications ................................................................................ D-31

Appendix E BACnet Properties and Plain English ............................ E-1

Plain English Language Reference 1-1

Chapter 1

Fundamentals

At a Glance

Overview This chapter provides some basic introductory concepts covering the

architecture of the Continuum building automation system that are essential to developing good programs in the Plain English Language. Since Continuum is an object-oriented system, the concept of objects, classes and their hierarchical arrangement within a physical network is explained. Object attributes and their association to objects are described and the chapter ends with a discussion of the naming convention used for identifying objects in the system.

Andover Controls Corporation 1-2

Introduction

The Plain English Language

The Plain English language (PE) was developed by Andover Controls to provide our customers with the ability to customize their building automation systems in accordance with specific site requirements. Similar to BASIC, PE is based on keywords that provide a simple straightforward approach to developing programming statements and requires limited to minimal programming experience. Plain English is included as part of Continuum's Plain English Integrated Development Environment (IDE), a complete suite of highly integrated tools for writing, editing and debugging PE programs. The Plain English IDE is fully described in Chapter 2 of this document. The programs developed with PE support Andover’s line of Continuum, BACnet and Infinity controllers and workstations.

Continuum Products

The Continuum product line encompasses a wide variety of components including Infinity CX 9xxx series controllers, CX 99xx NetControllers, Infinet controllers, i2 Series controllers, BACnet Series controllers, input/output IOU modules, display modules and smart sensors. These components are interconnected through various networking arrangements to create a total building automation system. Depending upon the complexity of the site architecture, a system can range from a single controller with or without a workstation to a large configuration consisting of a network of multiple workstations, a database server, and numerous controllers. From a programming perspective it is important that you have an understanding of how Continuum products are interconnected. A brief introduction of these arrangements and the products involved is provided on the following pages.


Continuum System Architecture

Simple Continuum System

In a simple single-workstation configuration (see figure below), a Continuum site might consist of a single NetController, with some input/output (I/O) modules and the workstation PC running CyberStation software. In BACnet solutions, the b4920 Router might be present along with several MS/TP sub-controllers. The NetController and the b4920 use Ethernet IP protocol to communicate with the workstation. The stand-alone version of CyberStation is resident on the workstation PC along with the database containing the configuration data for the entire system.

Example of a Continuum/BACnet Single Workstation Network

Moderate Continuum System

The Continuum system design is based on scalability, so expansion to a multi-workstation, larger network configuration can be accomplished easily. The illustration on the following page shows such a setup. In this configuration, the Ethernet LAN has been expanded to include another workstation, a database server, an Infinity CX 9xxx series network controller and a BACnet b4920 controller. In addition, two Infinet controllers have been added to the original NetController (from the figure above) via its Infinet port.

Like the simple system shown above, this is a Continuum/BACnet-compliant system. It provides interoperability between existing Infinity/Infinet and BACnet devices over a common Ethernet backbone. The CX controller feeds two Infinet application controllers from its Infinet port. The b4920 controller serves as a gateway between the BACnet MS/TP RS-485 subnet and the Continuum Infinet subnets hosted by the Infinity CX and NetController. This entire network can be viewed and controlled on a CyberStation/B-OWS workstation. A single server running MS SQL server software contains the Continuum database.

NetController

ACC I/O Bus

Ethernet IP Network

Local field wiring

PC Windows Workstation running CyberStation with Database

IOU Modules

b3xxx

b4920

BACnet MS/TP RS-485


Continuum System Architecture, continued

Example of a Multi-Workstation Continuum/BACnet Network

Network Controllers

There are three types of Continuum network controllers: • Infinity CX 9000 series • CX 99xx NetController • b4920 BACnet Router

All are IP compatible and each contains at least one port to allow communication with application controllers.

Infinet Controller

IOU Modules

Local field wiring

Local field wiring

Local field wiring

b4920 BACnet Router

Ethernet IP Network

PC Windows Workstations running CyberStation

SQL Database Server

Infinet

Third Party BACnet Device

BACnet MS/TP RS-485

NetController

Local field wiring

Local field wiring

Infinet Controllers

Infinet

LBUS

IOU Modules

b3xxx

b3xxx

Infinity CX 9xxx Controller

BACnet Controllers

Local field wiring

Local field wiring



Infinet Controllers

These controllers include combinations of inputs and outputs for the monitoring and control of local sensors and devices. There is a wide variety of Infinet controllers. Each device is designed for a specific purpose: • ACX series⎯Access Control • DCX 250⎯Display Control • LCX800 series⎯Local Control • LCX89X series⎯Lighting Control • SCX series⎯System Control • TCX series⎯Terminal Control (HVAC, VAV, smoke detection) • i2 series (also referred to as Infinet II)⎯Updates and replaces many of

the older Infinet controllers. The i2 series controllers have flash memory for firmware and object storage.

Infinet controllers are connected to network controllers via the Infinet network.

MS/TP Controllers

Andover Controls offers a complete line of MS/TP BACnet-compatible sub controllers (b3 series) that are functionally equivalent to the entire i2 product line.

I/O Modules Continuum I/O modules are specialized units that receive sensor inputs and

activate equipment (valves, fans, and so on) and perform access control functions. They connect directly to the CX99xx NetController. Available I/O modules include input, output, mixed I/O, and display configurations.

Workstations A personal computer (PC) connected to the Continuum Ethernet network

serves as an operator workstation. The system can contain a single workstation or multiple workstations, depending on the site configuration.



CyberStation Software

CyberStation is a Windows-based application program that runs on a PC workstation and interacts with the control system. It provides a graphic user interface (GUI) that can display and manipulate data that allows the entire site management of adjusting schedules and setpoints, acknowledging alarms, controlling doors, tracking personnel, etc.

Database The Database stores all the vital information pertaining to the building

automation control system. The database engine is either Microsoft SQL server or MSDE.

Infinet The Infinet is a high performance, token-passing LAN that allows Infinet

application controllers to communicate with each other and to a single CX or Netcontroller. Using InfiLink repeaters, it is possible to have 127 Infinet controllers on one Infinet. Data transmits over the Infinet at a rate of 19.2 Kb/sec.

LBUS The LBUS is an RS-485-based protocol that is used by the Andover Controls

AC256 to communicate with older IOU modules. The NetController can communicate to these IOU modules using the LA-1 converter. Only one LBUS can be connected to a CX controller. Each LBUS can handle up to 16 IOUs.

MS/TP MS/TP is an RS-485 based network that connects Andover and third-party

BACnet devices to the b4920 Router.


Objects and Classes

Introduction Continuum is based on object-oriented programming principles. Objects and

classes are the basic building blocks of the system. Each item appearing on a Continuum workstation screen represents an object. There are hardware-based objects (controllers, workstations, I/O points) and software-based objects (system variables, attributes). Furthermore, the objects are divided into classes.

Objects Objects are the basic building blocks of Andover's Continuum control

systems. All the items that makeup the system, both the hardware and the software are identified as objects. Each item appearing on a Continuum workstation screen represents an object. For example, objects contained within the controller class include: • CommPort • Input • Output • User • Groups

Graphical icons, displayed in the Continuum Explorer, represent both hardware objects and software objects.

Classes A class consists of a group of related objects. Examples of classes are:

• Area • Device • Schedule If you open a class folder in the Continuum Explorer, you see a list of objects for that class. For example, the SystemVariable folder displays a list of system variables.

BACnet Objects vs. Continuum Objects

Like Continuum, all information in a BACnet system is represented in terms of “objects”. Objects may represent a single physical “point” or logical groupings of points that perform a specific function. The information contained within a BACnet object is presented as a set of properties. In the Continuum world, BACnet object properties are similar to a Continuum object’s attributes.


Attributes

Definition An attribute is a characteristic of an object. An example attribute of an input

would be its value. All objects have attributes associated with them. In most cases, there are several attributes that describe an object. In BACnet, attributes are called “properties”.

How to View Attributes

The attributes for any object in Continuum can be viewed by double clicking on the object icon in Continuum Explorer's viewing pane. The General page of the object editor displays some attributes for the selected object. An example of such a page is shown below:

Example of an object's General tab page

The attributes that appear on the object's General page will vary depending

on the selected object.


Attributes, continued

Basic Attribute Listing

The following table provides a summary of the attributes appearing in the previous example General page.

Attribute Description Description A description of the object

Value Describes the value of the object. Examples include: On or Off, True or False, Success or Failure, Set or NotSet.

Units Units of measurement, such as Degrees Fahrenheit or Centigrade can be assigned to temperature measurements.

State The state of an object that can exist in either an Enabled or Disabled state.

Alarms Indicates the alarms that are active for an object.

Exported Indicates if the point is referenced by another controller. This attribute is read-only and is set by the Continuum System.

Accessibility The attributes for all objects used in PE programs are accessible from any

Continuum workstation. Most object attributes can be altered from the Command Line window of the workstation. (Refer to Chapter 3 for a detailed description of how to view object attributes using the Command Line.) Appendix C contains a complete list of attributes for each object contained in Continuum.


Object Ownership

Object Ownership

Object ownership is a term that describes the relationships between objects in the Continuum system. Objects in Continuum are arranged in a hierarchy. The Root object is always the prime object at the top of the hierarchy. Objects at the top of the hierarchy contain, or own the objects below them. This ownership refers to the physical network connection between devices and to where the objects are stored within the network.

Hierarchical View of System Objects

Network and Controller views that are selectable on the Continuum workstation screen represent the hierarchy of the physical components in the Continuum System. For example, an input point called Rm Temp1, attached to a NetController named CX1, that is connected to a network called Building 1, would be described using the following object hierarchy: The network object (Bldg1) owns the attached device object (controller CX1) which owns the input point object (Rm Temp1). These relationships are shown graphically below. This hierarchical relationship is an important concept that is applied to network path names in PE programming statements.

Example of Object Hierarchical Relationships

Network

Bldg 1

Root

Input Point

Rm Temp1

Controller

CX1


Object Ownership, continued

Network Paths A path is the route you follow along the network to get from one object to

another. The object could be any of the following: • Controller • Workstation • Printer • Point • Some other object on the network The network path and object relationships are important concepts when creating statements in PE. For example, if you need to take action when the room temperature in Building 1 (BLDG1) exceeds 74 degrees, the following statement might be entered into the program:

IF BLDG1 CX1 RM_TEMP1 > 74 THEN...

In this statement, the correct path from the network and controller (BLDG1, CX1) to the input point (RM_TEMP1) must be specified in order to run the program.

Network Path


Naming Conventions

Object Names When you create a name for an object in Continuum, the system

automatically creates a second object identifier called an Alias. The object name can be lengthy and descriptive whereas the object alias must conform to a stricter naming convention (see "Alias Names" below). The object name is stored in the Continuum database, not in the controller.

Object Naming Convention

The set of characters allowed in object names, called the "Naming Character Set”, is described below.

The Naming Character Set

Character Description A-Z and

a-z Alphabetic characters. Upper- and lowercase are interchangeable.

0-9 Numeric characters.

_ Underscore character.

. Period character

/ Slash character

− Dash character

Space character

Object names can be up to 64 characters long and may consist of any combination of the naming character set. Ideally, the object name should be as descriptive as possible to help identify the object it represents. For example, an output point for an operating fan could be named Fan Start/Stop.


Naming Conventions, continued

Alias Names The alias is the object reference used in programs and functions. Continuum

creates the alias version of the object name whenever a new object is created. The alias name is saved to both the controller and the Continuum database.

Alias Naming Convention

The rules for the alias naming character set are as follows:

• The length of the alias name cannot exceed 16 characters • Must start with a letter, not a number • Alphanumeric characters • Period and underscores are the only punctuation characters allowed • No spaces • No reserved words, keywords or symbols (+,-,/,*, etc.)


Chapter 2

The Plain English Integrated Development Environment

At a Glance

Introduction This chapter provides a overview of the Plain English Integrated

Development Environment from the perspective of how it enhances the production of writing and editing Plain English programs. The discussions in this chapter are not intended to be a complete tutorial on the use of the IDE, but rather to present an overall picture of what it consists of and to touch briefly on each of its features.

2-2 Andover Controls Corporation

Opening the Plain English IDE

To Create a New Program File

There are three ways to open the IDE when you wish to create a new program file:

• From the System & Status button on Continuum's main menu (shown below)

• From the Continuum Explorer • Selecting Programs – Continuum – PlainEnglish from the

Windows Start menu. These methods are described below.

From the Continuum Main Menu

If you click the hot spot on the left-hand side of the Continuum Main Menu, the System & Status menu page appears.

System & Status menu page

Click the hot spot to start the Plain English IDE.


Opening the Plain English IDE, continued

From the Continuum Explorer

From any view of the Continuum Explorer, right click on the controller or workstation where you want the program to reside. Then select New and InfinityProgram for controller-based programs or simply Program for workstation-resident programs from the popup menus that appear. BACnet programs are created as Infinity programs.

Selecting a New Infinity Program

From the Start Menu

From the Windows explorer, click Start. Select Programs – Continuum - PlainEnglish. Note: Continuum must be running.


The New create dialog box appears if you selected New InfinityProgram.

Otherwise, selecting New from the File menu or clicking the new file quick pick button displays the dialog box shown below:

The New Dialog Box

Creating the Program File

Type the program name in the Object name text box and click the Create button. Next, the Editor screen appears in the IDE main window.


Plain English IDE Features

IDE Tools Overview

Continuum's Plain English Integrated Development Environment (IDE) provides a complete set of integrated tools designed to simplify the writing, editing and debugging of Plain English language programs. The IDE consists of a variety of color-enhanced windows, menus and toolbars. Shown below, the Plain English IDE main screen includes standard Windows features (title bar, menu bar, various toolbars, main window and status bar) along with specialized editor function windows.

Plain English IDE Main Screen

Editor

Assistant Watch Bar

Main Window

IDE Explorer

Title Bar Menu Bar

Main Toolbar

Status Bar

Command Line Find

Toolbar

Check Toolbar

Class of Objects Displayed In IDE Explorer


Plain English IDE Features, continued

IDE Tools Overview continued

Several special features are included:

• Command Line • Find Toolbar (text searching) • Check Toolbar (program error checking) • IDE Explorer (graphical display of your system) • Editor • Assistant (program error checking, objects, keywords, favorites, etc.) • Watch Bar (program monitoring)

Each of these tools is described within this section.

Rearranging IDE Toolbars and Windows

Many features within the IDE can be rearranged to suit your personal preference:

• The Title Bar, Menu Bar, Main Window and Status Bar remain on your screen at all times.

• You can display or hide the icon toolbars and other tool window components of the IDE.

• The icon toolbars can also be dragged and dropped into different locations within the upper portion of the IDE.

The IDE Explorer, Command Line, Assistant and Watch Bar can be arranged in accordance with docking and floating options described later.

Title Bar The Title bar indicates the directory path to the current PE program file. If

you change programs in the PE Editor, the Title bar will change to reflect the new path.


The Menu Bar

Offers Seven Menu Selections

The menu bar provides seven dropdown menus within the IDE.

File Menu

Option Description New Opens a new program file.

Open Opens an existing program file.

Close Closes the current active program file. Delete Deletes the current active program file.

Save Checks and saves the active program file.

Save As Checks and saves the active program file under a new name.

Save All Checks and saves all open program files.

Close All Closes all open program files.

Import Inserts the contents of another file into the active program file.

Export Saves the active program file to a different type of file.

Configuration Displays the Infinity Program, or the Function Configuration Dialog.

Firing Order Displays and allows editing of the current firing order.

Print Prints the active program file.

Exit Exits the Plain English editor.

Edit Menu

Option Description Undo Reverts to the previous action.

Redo Performs the last action that was undone by Undo.

Cut Removes selected text from the program and places it in the Clipboard.

Copy Copies selected text from the program and places it in the clipboard.

Paste Inserts contents of the clipboard at the cursor position.

Select All Selects the entire program.

Find From the cursor position, finds the next or previous instance of specified text.

Find Next From the cursor position, finds the next instance of the text you last searched for.

Find Previous From the cursor position, finds the previous instance of the text you last searched for.

Replace Finds specified text, and replaces it with a different specified text. Goto Places your cursor at the specified line number or line definition.


The Menu Bar, continued

View Menu

Option Description

Toolbars → When checked (√) adds the selected toolbar to the IDE screen. When not checked removes the selected toolbar from the IDE screen. The toolbars are Main, Find, Check, Assistant, Explorer, Command Line and Watch.

Set Font Displays the Font dialog box, allowing you to change the font for the active program file.

Refresh Checks and saves the active program file, and refreshes the screen.

Folder View Changes the IDE Explorer to folder view. In this view, the Root and all folders appear in the navigation pane.

Network View Changes the IDE Explorer to network view. In this view, the network you set up appears in the navigation pane.

Build Menu

Option Description Check Complies the currently active program file. Reports errors in the

Check page of the Assistant

Check All Complies all open program files. Reports errors in the Check page of the Assistant.

Stop Stops compiling.

Tools Menu

Option Description Wizard Opens the Plain English Wizard. Calculator Displays the calculator.

Options Displays the Options dialog.

Window Menu

Option Description Cascade Displays program windows overlapping diagonally.

Tile Horizontally Displays program windows in equal horizontal portions of the editor.

Tile Vertically Displays program windows in equal vertical portions of the editor.

Arrange Icons This feature is not supported in this release

Note: A list of currently open windows appears at the bottom of the Window menu. Clicking on any window in the list will make it the active window.

Help Menu

Option Description Help Topics Displays Plain English online help topics.

About IDE Displays the copyright and version number for the PE editor.


The Main and Find Toolbars

The Main Toolbar

The Main toolbar is described below. It contains shortcuts to many of the items found in the Edit menu.

Main Toolbar Selections

To Do This … Click Icon Reference

Open a new program 1

Open an existing program 2

Save the currently active program 3 Save all open programs 4

Cut text 5

Copy text 6

Paste text 7

Undo the last action you performed 8

Redo the last action you performed 9

Find a particular word in the current program 10

Print the current program 11

The Find Toolbar The Find toolbar is a

shortcut find tool. It contains an input field and buttons to help you look for specific words, symbols, and phrases in the program or function that you are writing or editing. If the Find toolbar is hidden, go to Toolbars in the View menu to add it.

Using the Find Toolbar

Step Action 1 Type the text that you want to find, or use the pull-down list to select

previously searched text.

2 To search from the cursor position to the end of the program,

click on

3 To search from the cursor position to the beginning of the program,

click on

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11


The Check Toolbar and Command Line

The Check Toolbar The Check toolbar is used in conjunction

with the Assistant to compile programs and report errors. Each of the icon buttons appearing on the Check toolbar is listed below. If the Check toolbar is hidden, go to Toolbars in the View menu to add it.

IDE Check Toolbar Buttons Button Action When Clicked

Compiles the active program in the Editor

Complies all programs in the Editor

Stops compilation

Save the program and refreshes the windows

Displays the program Configuration dialog box

Starts the Plain English Wizard. (See "Using the Plain English Wizard" in this chapter.)

Displays a pop-up calculator

The Command Line

The Command Line is where you enter and execute Plain English commands. If the Command Line is hidden, go to Toolbars in the View menu to add it. Its features include: • Browse Button⎯opens a drop down explorer tree. • Command Line⎯where you enter Plain English commands. • Response Line⎯where messages and print requests appear.

IDE Command Line Components

IDE Explorer Browse Button

Command Line Text Field Response Line Text Field


The IDE Explorer

Features The IDE Explorer is a small, more limited version of the Continuum

Explorer. It helps you navigate through the folders and devices on your system to find and select objects to add to your programs. If the IDE Explorer is hidden, go to Toolbars in the View menu to add it.

The basic parts of the IDE Explorer include:

• Explorer Drop-Down List Box⎯Displays the object tree of the current folder or device directory.

• Class Drop-Down List Box⎯Displays the classes of the folder or device object selected from the Explorer Drop-Down List Box.

• Back Up One Level Button⎯Changes the Explorer Drop-Down List Box to the next higher directory.

• Copy Objects Button⎯Copies selected object on the Class Drop-Down List to the IDE Assistant.

IDE Explorer

Copy Objects Button

Current Class

Back Up One Level Button

List of Objects Matching Selected Current Class

Class Drop-Down List Box

Current Device

IDE Explorer Drop-Down List Box


The IDE Explorer, continued

Popup Shortcut Menu

In addition to the above features, the IDE Explorer provides several options by means of a popup shortcut menu, which is activated whenever, you right-click on an object in the drop-down list box.

IDE Explorer Popup Shortcut Menu Features

Menu Item Action Open Opens programs in the IDE. For other classes, opens the appropriate

dialog box.

Edit Starts another IDE session for the selected program. For other classes, opens the appropriate application.

Put in Service Opens a dialog box to confirm the state of the object’s attribute is “Enabled” [NOT SHOWN FOR INFINITYPROGRAM]

Take out of Service

Opens a dialog box to confirm the state of the object’s attribute is “Disabled” [NOT SHOWN FOR INFINITYPROGRAM]

Enable Opens a dialog box to confirm the state of the program’s attribute is “Enabled” [ONLY SHOWN FOR INFINITYPROGRAM]

Disable Opens a dialog box to confirm the state of the program’s attribute is “Disabled” [ONLY SHOWN FOR INFINITYPROGRAM]

Send To Offers a selection of "Controller, Database, Text File or Printer".

Delete Deletes the selected object.

Rename Opens a dialog box for renaming the object.

Page Setup Opens a dialog box to select the page setup of the object to be printed.

Print Selected Opens a dialog box to select the printer.

Go To Offers a selection of “Owner or Device.

Properties Opens the Properties dialog box.


The IDE Editor

Features The IDE program Editor is a window that appears in the Main Window area

of the IDE screen when you open a new or existing Plain English program. The Editor is the tool you use to write and edit programs. Its main features are:

• Each program displays in its own Editor window. • More than one program can be open at the same time, each with its own

resizable Editor window. • When multiple programs are open, a tab appears at the bottom of the

Editor window for each program and the active program tab overlays the other tabs.

• In multiple Editor window displays, clicking on a program tab activates that program.

• Only one program at a time can be the active or current Editor window. • When a program becomes too large for its window, scroll bars appear. • Color is used for distinguishing program elements. Blue is for

keywords, red for line definitions and green for comments.

Displaying Multiple Programs

The Editor's ability to display multiple programs allows you to copy code from one program to another thus saving typing time. In the figure below, four programs occupy the Editor window. Prog4 is the active window since its tab (see bottom of screen) overlays the other program tabs.

IDE Editor Window


The IDE Assistant

Features The IDE Assistant provides additional support in the writing and editing of

Plain English programs. Six tabs located at the bottom of the Assistant window provide features that help to simplify the coding process. When selected, each tab becomes a separate page in the Assistant window.

IDE Assistant Page Features

Menu Item Action Objects Provides a temporary storage place for object names that you need in

a program

Check Displays errors that occur when a program is saved or checked.

Keywords Lists all the Plain English language keywords that are not functions.

Functions Contains all the pre-written Plain English functions

Values Provides attribute values used by the system.

Favorites Provides a storage area for commonly used items such as keywords, statements, functions, objects and so on.

Selecting and Placing Objects

Double clicking items displayed within these pages automatically inserts them into the active program Editor window. From the Check page, double clicking on a listed error places the cursor on the program instruction in the Editor that caused the error. To place object names on the Objects page, locate them in the IDE Explorer and then drag them onto the page.

IDE Assistant Window

Note: If the Assistant is hidden, go to Toolbar in the Edit menu to add it.


The IDE Watch Bar

Purpose The Watch Bar allows you to monitor your program's effect on other objects.

Watched objects can be objects that the program refers to, or any object that is part of your Continuum system. If the Watch Bar is hidden, go to Toolbars in the View menu to add it For every object you add to the Watch Bar, you see the object name and its current value. The Watch Bar is very helpful in tracking down errors in your program.

IDE Watch Bar


Docking and Floating

Docking and Floating Options

Depending on the selection or de-selection of the Allow Docking and Float in Main Window options:

• The Assistant and Watch Bars can be placed and arranged within the Main Window.

• The Assistant and Watch Bars can be dragged and dropped outside of the Main Window or outside of the IDE window.

• The Explorer Bar can be dragged and dropped within the IDE or outside of the IDE window.

Using the Docking and Floating Options

The docking and floating menu is accessed by right clicking the mouse cursor in a gray, non-button area of the:

• Assistant or Watch windows • IDE Explorer or Command Line

Docking and Floating Options Menu

Docking and Floating Menu Selections

Option Enabled Disabled Allow Docking

Lets you drag the window to a fixed position on the screen. Window size changes according to available empty screen space. Shows an outline of the new window shape before docking. A docked window’s title bar disappears.

Displays the window’s title bar, indicating that the window is a floating object that can be dragged anywhere on the screen.

Hide Removes the window from view. Make windows visible from the View menu.

Float in Main Window

Puts the tool window in the Main Window and can be moved within it.

Window can be dragged out of the Main Window.


Configuring a Plain English Program File

Configuring the Program File To setup the new program file, click the Configuration icon in the

Check toolbar, or select Configuration from the File menu. This displays the Configuration dialog box.

Configuration Dialog Box

Configuring a New Program File Step Action

1 Enter a brief description (optional) up to 32 characters in length.

2 Select Enabled in the State selection box.

3 Select the Autostart checkbox if you want the program to start running the moment it is saved.

4 Select the Command Line checkbox if you want the program to be controlled from the Command line.

5 Select either Looping or Fall Thru in the Flow Type selection box depending on what type of program is intended.

6 If a "Run on Any Workstation" checkbox is present, select it if you want to be able to run the program from any workstation. If you don't select it, then the program can only be run from the workstation it is installed on. Note: When Run on Any Workstation appears in the File Configuration dialog box, you can select it or AutoStart, but not both.

7 Click the OK button at the bottom of the dialog box and the File Editor window appears.


Using the Editor

Program Guidelines

When the Editor window first appears, it is blank until you begin writing your program. As you enter your program, keep the following guidelines in mind: • A single program can have up to 400 physical lines. • A physical line can have up to 132 characters. • If a line must exceed 132 characters, enter a tilde (~) at the end to

continue the line. • Do not use a tilde inside the quotation marks of a Print statement.

Text Entry On a Continuum CyberStation you can create your program by entering text

with the keyboard and using either the mouse or keystroke combinations to: • Move the cursor • Select text • Change and move text The keystroke combinations to accomplish these tasks are described below.

Editor Keystroke Combinations

Moving the Cursor Key or Keys Action

Arrow Moves the cursor one space in the direction of the arrow (left, right, up, or down).

CTRL right arrow Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next word.

CTRL left arrow Moves the cursor to the beginning of the previous word.

Home Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line it is on.

End Moves the cursor to the end of the line it is on.

CTRL Home Moves the cursor to the beginning of the first line in the file. CTRL End Moves the cursor to the end of the last line in the file.

Page Up Scrolls the text up the number of lines in a window.

Page Down Scrolls the text down the number of lines in a window.

Selecting Text Shift Arrow Selects text one character at a time in the direction of the

arrow.

Shift Home Selects text from the cursor position to the beginning of the line.

Shift End Selects text from the cursor position to the end of the line.

Shift CTRL right arrow Selects text from the cursor position to the beginning of the next word.


Using the Editor, continued

Text Entry continued

Using the Text Editor continued Selecting Text

Key or Keys Action Shift CTRL left arrow Selects text from the cursor position to the beginning of the

previous word.

Shift CTRL Home Selects text from the cursor position to the beginning of the file.

Shift CTRL End Selects text from the cursor position to the end of the file.

Changing and Moving Text Backspace Deletes text you have selected. Otherwise, deletes one

character to left of the cursor. If the cursor is at the beginning of a line joins the line with the previous one.

CTRL F Opens the Find window.

CTRL H Opens the Replace window.

CTRL Insert Copies selected text and store it in a temporary storage area. You can then put it somewhere else with Shift Insert.

Delete Deletes text you have selected. Otherwise, deletes one character to the right of the cursor. If the cursor is at the end of a line connects the line to the next one.

Enter Ends a line and starts a new one.

Insert Toggles between two modes: • Inserting text into the current text • Typing over current text.

Shift Delete Cuts selected text and store it in a temporary storage area. You can then paste it with Shift Insert.

Shift Insert Puts or pastes text you last copied or cut at the cursor position in the file. Replaces any selected text with text you last cut or copied from the file.

The Editor Shortcut Menu

You can also edit text with selections from the Edit drop-down box on the Menu bar or you can use the editor shortcut menu. To use the shortcut menu, highlight the desired text and press the right mouse button.

Editor Shortcut Menu



Finding Text The IDE Editor provides a Find tool for locating specific words, symbols

and phrases whenever the Editor window is activated. To use the Find tool, place the cursor at the place in the program where you want to begin searching for text and press the Ctrl-F key or click Edit in the Editor toolbar and then select Find.

Find Dialog Box

Find Dialog Box Features Menu Item Action

Find What Enter the text to search for⎯can be up to 132 characters including spaces.

Match whole word only

Only finds the selected word and rejects other words that would contain it (if "one" is the selected word, it would reject "done", "bone", "alone", and so on).

Match case Will match the case of the selected word( if "One" is selected it will ignore "one")

Direction Up searches from the cursor position to the beginning of the program. Down searches from the cursor position to the end of the program.

Find Next Finds the next instance of the word/s listed in the "Find What" column.



Replacing Text To find and replace text in a program, you use the IDE Editor's Replace tool.

To activate it, place the cursor where you want to begin searching in the program and click Edit in the Editor toolbar and then select Replace to bring up the Replace dialog box.

Replace Dialog Box

Replace Dialog Box Features Menu Item Action

Find What Enter the text to search for⎯can be up to 132 characters including spaces.

Replace with Enter the text you want to replace the found text with.

Match whole word only

Only finds the selected word and rejects other words that would contain it (if "one" is the selected word, it would reject "done", "bone", "alone", and so on).

Match case Will match the case of the selected word( if "One" is selected it will ignore "one")

Replace Replaces the first instance of the found text. Find Next Replaces the found text when it is clicked on and then the Replace

button is clicked.

Replace All Replaces all instances of the found text.



Going to a Labeled Program Line

To locate a labeled line in any program, you can use the Goto command. Select Edit…Goto from the IDE menu bar to bring up the Go To dialog box. Then type in the desired line label in the Line text box and click on the Go To button.

Go To Dialog Box

Importing Programs

You can import an external program (located on a floppy disk or in a different directory) into an existing program in the Editor. To do this, perform the steps below.

Importing a Program File Step Action

1 Click at the point in the existing program where you want to insert the external program.

2 A flashing cursor will appear at that point.

3 Open the File menu from the main menu bar.

4 Select Import from the File menu.

5 The IDE File Import dialog box appears.

File Import Dialog Box



Importing Programs continued

Importing a Program File (continued) Step Action

6 Use the Look in pull down list box to locate the file to import.

7 Double click on the file name so that it appears in the File name text box.

8 Click on the Import button.

9 The entire file is inserted into the existing program at the point selected in step 1.

Exporting Programs

You can export an existing program in the Editor to another drive or directory. To do this, perform the steps below.

Exporting a Program File

Step Action 1 Make sure the program file you wish to export is the active program in

the Editor window.

2 Open the File menu from the main menu bar.

3 Select Export from the File menu.

4 The IDE File Export dialog box appears.

File Export Dialog Box



Exporting Programs continued

Table 3-19. Exporting a Program File continued Step Action

5 Use the Look in pull down list box to locate the drive or directory to export to.

6 Type in the name of the file in the File name text box.

7 Click the Save button to copy the program to the selected location.

Note: If the existing program in the Editor has errors and you

don't have time to correct them, exporting the file is a good way to save the program.

Saving the Program

Once you have finished writing your program you need to save it, but before you do, make sure the Assistant is displayed on your screen.

To save a program file, click on Save in the File menu, or click the button in the Main Toolbar. The IDE automatically checks the file for errors before saving. If errors are found, the Check tab on the Assistant becomes active and lists the errors. Double click on any error listed in the Assistant. This will place the cursor on the program instruction in the Editor that caused it.

Note: The IDE will not let you close the program file, until you fix all the errors. If you want to postpone fixing the errors in your program until a later time, you can use the Export feature of the Editor to place it in a temporary file.



Saving the Program File continued

When all the errors have been corrected, the Check page of the Assistant will display the message shown below.

The Save File Message

Opening the Program

To reopen the program from the IDE, open the IDE Explorer and locate the subject program file. Double click on the file symbol or hold down the right mouse button and select Open. This will cause an Editor window containing the selected program to appear in the IDE Main Window.

Running the Program from the Command Line

You can start your program by entering the Run keyword followed by the program name into the Command Line and then pressing the RETURN or Enter key (depending on the keyboard). Make sure that the directory path to the program file, appearing in the Command Line title bar, is correct.

Starting the Program from the Command Line



Running the Program from the Command Line continued

In order for the program to run, its State attribute must already be Enabled. (See "Configuring the Program File") The system then does the following:

• Sets the program’s Status attribute to Active. • Sets the program’s CurrentLine attribute to its first line. • Updates the program's LineStartTime to the time the Scan starts. (See

Chapter 3 for details on the Scanning process.)

Monitoring the Program File Status

You can monitor the program file status by viewing the Run Time status page.

To access that page, click on the Configuration icon in the Check toolbar or select Configuration from the File menu. When the Configuration dialog box appears, click the Run Time tab to activate the file status window.

The Run Time File Status Window

You cannot change any of the information in this window. The controller automatically updates it. The Table on the following page explains the Run Time Page features



Monitoring the Program File Status continued

Run Time Window Features Item Description

Last Changed Shows the date and time the program was last altered.

Current Line Start Displays the date and time the current line began executing.

File Size Displays the number of characters (bytes) in the file (1024 bytes equal 1KB). The size of the file also includes basics about the file, such as its name, flowtype, and other attribute settings that the controller stores.

Program Status Shows whether the program is Active or Inactive.

Current Line Displays the name or number of the currently active line of the program. No current line shows if you have not labeled any program lines.

Error Gives the explanation of the last runtime error that occurred when running this program.

TD: Time in days that a program has been at the specified line. TH: Time in hours that a program has been at the specified line.

TM: Time in minutes that a program has been at the specified line.

TS: Time in seconds that a program has been at the specified line.

Stopping the Program

You can stop the program from the Command Line by entering the “Stop” keyword followed by the program name. This causes the program to stop by setting the Status attribute to Inactive. The program will stop itself if it contains the Stop keyword with no name after it in any of its statements.


Using the Plain English Wizard

What it Does The IDE provides another tool called the Plain English Wizard that provides

you with a collection of pre-written programs and functions that can be copied and pasted into a program file.

How to Access It To access the Wizard, click on the in the Check toolbar or select Wizard

from the Tools drop-down list box on the main Menu bar. Using either of these methods will open the Wizard's main window.

The Plain English Wizard Window

Click on the Next> button to bring up the File Selection menu page.


Using the Plain English Wizard, continued

The Wizard File Selection Menu

The File Selection menu page show below offers a variety of different types of pre-written programs and functions from which to choose. The tabs along the top of the menu's window identify different types of programs. Clicking on a tab displays the programs available of that type. To find information about a particular program, click on its icon. The program’s full name appears below the bottom left-hand corner of the window and a brief description of what the program does appears in the Description text box.

PE Wizard File Selection Menu

Selecting and Configuring a Wizard Program

To select a program, click on its icon and then click on the Next > button. This displays the File Configuration dialog box as shown on the next page. The selections on this dialog box are the same as the standard Configuration dialog box except for one additional checkbox:

• Yes, include comments⎯checking this box means you want to leave the pre-written program comments in the program. Not checking this box means you want the comments stripped out.



PE Wizard File Configuration Dialog Box Selecting and Configuring a Wizard Program, continued

Note: If you select a Function from the File Selection menu, the State, Flow Type and Autostart selection will not be available in the File Configuration dialog box. Click on the Next> button displays the Object References Wizard screen. Note: Some of the pre-written programs require additional input before they can be transferred to the Editor. These programs are discussed on the next page.



The Object References Screen

The more complicated pre-written programs offered by the Wizard require references to external objects. So when you click on the Next> button on the Configuration dialog box, the Object References screen shown below appears. You may keep the default object references or replace them with new object names. To keep them, click on the Next> button to go to the Final Wizard screen.

Figure 3-26. The Object References Screen

To replace the object references, click on the empty Object Name field. This will display a browse button. Click on it and the “Select an Object” dialog box (not shown) appears. Choose the object you want and click on the Select button to place it in the Object Name field. When you are finished, click on the Next> button to go to the final Wizard screen.

Browse Button



The Final Wizard Screen

Click on the Finish button to transfer the program that you selected with the PE Wizard to the Editor.

Final PE Wizard screen


Chapter 3

Programs, Files and the Scanning Process

At a Glance

Introduction This chapter provides a discussion on the makeup of Plain English programs

and how to construct program statements. It also describes the type of files used with the language and a description of the program scanning process.


Plain English Language Programs

Instructions and Statements

A Plain English (PE) program consists of a set of instructions that tell the controller what to do. Each of these instructions is called a statement. A statement is a complete instruction that tells the controller to take some type of action. An example of a PE statement might be:

TURN ON THE PUMP Program statements are listed in the order in which the controller must perform them to accomplish the program's purpose.

Names and Case Sensitivity

Throughout Plain English, there is no differentiation between words that are capitalized and those that are not. For instance, the following names are treated as the same: RoomTemp1 ROOMTEMP1 RoomtemP1


Lines and Line Labels

In PE, a line is a statement or series of statements that belong together under one label. You label a line with the LINE keyword or a colon after the line name (see Chapter 7). An example of a line might look like the following:

LINE BEGIN

TURN THE HEAT OFF

TURN THE FAN ON

. . . . .

Or

BEGIN:

TURN THE HEAT OFF

TURN THE FAN ON

. . . . .

All of the statements following the “BEGIN” label are part of that line, until another LINE label is encountered. The statements in the line are indented here to emphasize their relationship to the line label. Ideally, you should always form lines this way.

Line labels do not necessarily need to include the word "LINE". The line label could have been typed with just the name followed by a colon ( : )

Line labels are limited to 16 characters, including underscores, periods, and numbers.

Editor Line Limitations

Each single physical line can contain up to 132 characters (not including the Return at the end of the line).


Plain English Language Programs, continued

Expressions Statements that involve mathematical operations are called expressions.

Expressions can also be item names, or constants that return a numeric or string result.

Numeric Expressions

Numeric expressions always result in a number. Numeric constants and variables are expressions as well. Expressions can also be mathematical calculations that result in a number or comparisons that result in a TRUE or FALSE response. The following are valid numeric expressions:

• 2

• SQRT (9)

• 900 DIVIDED BY 8

• WKD IS GREATER THAN MONDAY

String Expressions

String expressions always result in a string of characters enclosed in quotation marks. String constants and String variables are expressions as well. String expressions can also be combinations that result in a string of characters. (See the PRINT keyword statement in Chapter 7.) The following are valid string expressions:

• "WARNING⎯HIGH TEMPERATURE"

• LEFT ("TEST",1)

• "THE NUMBER OF ERRORS IS ";TOTAL1

Chapter 4 explains how to form a 'string expression' using the Joining Operator.

Comments Comments are optional sentences used to help document the operation of a

program for the human reader. Comments are not operated upon. Comments are entered as single lines preceded by a single quotation mark ( ' ). The following example contains a comment:

' The following line begins the cool down process

Begin:

TURN THE HEAT OFF

TURN THE FAN ON

You can add as many comments as necessary, but each is restricted to one physical (132 characters) line.


Keywords

Description and Types

In Plain English, program statements are constructed using words that the controllers recognize. These words, called “keywords” are further classified into types. The keyword types are described below.

PE Keyword Types

Keyword Type Definition Statement (an action word)

Defines an action the controller can perform.

Function Carries out a particular series of calculations or actions and may return one or more specific values.

Operator A symbol or keyword that carries out a mathematical or logical process, such as addition, subtraction, or TRUE/FALSE.

Local Variable A variable (a value that changes) that does not carry over a value from another program, but has a value only within the active program.

System Variable A variable (a value that changes) that the controller automatically updates.

System Constant A keyword that stands for a particular number or value that the controller knows the meaning of and that does not change.

Chapter 7 lists all the keywords available in the PE and explains the correct format to use for each keyword.

Other Words Besides keywords, other types of words the controller knows are:

• Names you give to objects such as network controllers, Infinet controllers, BACnet controllers, programs, files, and points.

• Words that Andover Controls has reserved (called “reserved words” see Appendix B).

• Attributes and their settings (see Appendix C).

Command Lines

The Command Line is an area within the Plain English Development Environment of CyberStation where you manually type in and execute Plain English commands.


Program Flow

Types of Program Flow

You use Plain English to instruct a controller to do certain things, such as locking and unlocking doors, turning on fans, printing reports, adjusting times and dates, and so on. The controller accomplishes such actions in accordance with the sequential order in which the program's statements are arranged. This is termed "Program Flow". Every program in Plain English has a flow type that you identify with the FlowType attributes:

• FallThru

• Looping A FallThru program executes the program lines in the sequential order in which you list them⎯from the first to the last line. So the program flows, or "falls thru" the entire sequence of statements.

A Looping program remains on the line its is on until it is instructed to "go to" (GoTo) another line.

Looping vs. FallThru

In the following example, if you set the program to Looping, it scans the TESTING line continuously until one of the two conditions exists. If the temperature (assume that the variable “temp” holds the value of the current temperature of the room) is not in the range of 70 to 75 where does the program flow then? It continues to loop back to the beginning of the line (labeled TESTING) and check the temperature again and again.

Line Testing

IF the Temp is less than 70 GOTO heating

IF the Temp is greater than 75 GOTO cooling

Line Pumping . . . Line Heating . . . Line Cooling

. . .

If you set the same program to FallThru, when the controller determines that the temperature is not less than 70 or not greater than 75, the program flows to the next consecutive line (labeled “Pumping”).


Program Flow, continued

Triggers Any point or system variable can be used to automatically start a program

when its value changes. The program is “triggered” by the action of the point or system variable. Once a point is created or the system variable is chosen, the program you want to be run is attached via the trigger list that is found in the editor associated with the entity. For example, suppose you write a program to control a circulating fan. You want the fan to turn on whenever the room is occupied and turn off whenever the room is vacated. In your program, you could choose to use a point called OCCUPIED that triggers the following program: If OCCUPIED is On then Turn On the RoomFan Else Turn Off the RoomFan Endif Next, you associate the point called OCCUPIED with the program on the appropriate controller. To do this, you would:

• Select the associated system variable or point editor from the appropriate controller in CyberStation’s Explorer.

• Open the Triggers tab page on the editor and browse through the Plain English programs to locate and select the Fan program.

This adds the program to the system variable or point’s trigger list. Refer to Chapter 13 of the Continuum CyberStation Configurator’s Guide for detailed information on setting up triggers. You can also use triggers to reduce controller scan time. (See “Triggering Programs from Points” later in this chapter)


Constructing Program Statements

General Rules To construct a program statement, you follow the structure indicated in the

keyword format and the following general rules:

• You must use one and only one verb (statement word) in each statement.

• You can include one object or a list of objects after the verb. The following are valid statements:

OPEN THE DAMPER

CLOSE THE VALVE

OR

Open the damper, vent1, vent2, vent3 and vent4

Close the firstvalve, secondvalve, thirdvalve

You cannot, for instance, open the damper and close the valve in the same statement. The following is an invalid statement:

OPEN THE DAMPER AND CLOSE THE VALVE

Conditional and Unconditional Instructions

Plain English includes two fundamental types of instructions:

• Conditional

• Unconditional

Each of these instructions produces a different result, depending on how they are used in a program. A conditional instruction establishes criteria that have to be met before the instruction can be executed and the task performed by the controller. For example:

IF Temp is 78 THEN Turn on Fan An unconditional instruction directs a specific action without establishing any criteria before the action can occur. For example:

Turn on Fan


IF…THEN IF..THEN statements differ from other statements in two major ways:

• You use an operator to form the statement.

• You can include a statement (or multiple statements) that could otherwise stand on its own after the word THEN.

If you use a statement with IF and THEN, the IF through the THEN is considered one statement and contains one operator (operators are similar to verbs−see Chapter 5). For example, the following statement contains the IS operator:

IF LIGHTSWITCH IS ON THEN...

The three dots after THEN in the statement indicate that more text is required to complete the statement. Below is an example of a statement that contains another operator⎯IS GREATER THAN:

IF TEMP IS GREATER THAN 86 THEN..

The following complete IF..THEN statement appears to have two verbs; however, the operator (IS) belongs with IF..THEN and TURN ON remains as the only verb:

IF FAN IS ON THEN TURN ON PUMP

The statement after THEN could be an independent statement:

TURN ON PUMP

For information on how to include multiple statements after the word THEN, see the IF..THEN..ELSE keyword in Chapter 7.

Use of "The" To improve a statement’s readability, use the keyword "The". For instance,

in the above examples:

IF THE FAN IS ON THEN TURN ON THE PUMP

Using "the" makes the statement appear more grammatical, its use is optional in the Plain English Language.


Program Files

What is a Program File?

A program file contains statements that instruct the controller to perform some type of action. You create program files to store program statements. You can create a program file on a controller or a CyberStation.

Keep Control in a Single Program File

Good programming practice dictates that you have one program file control a single piece of equipment. Following this practice has the following advantages:

• Makes programs easier to maintain.

• Makes programs easier to debug

• Prevents firing order list (see “How it Works” on next page) issues. Because the controller scans programs in the order they appear in the firing order list, and the entire scan of all programs occurs in a fraction of a second, following this practice prevents the possibility of a conflict occurring between the instructions in two different programs. For example, if a program unlocks a door and later in the same scan, a second program locks the same door, the door never actually unlocks. Placing the unlocking and locking of the door in the same program file eliminates this problem.


The Scanning Process

How it Works The Continuum control system is constantly engaged in a sequential

scanning process that is performed in accordance with a firing order list. The firing order list is the order in which the system runs programs starting from the top of the list and working its way down.

In general, the interpreter inside each controller does the following:

• Gathers all data it needs for the next scan through the programs.

• Reads and executes one line from each enabled program starting with the first program in the firing order list.

• Converts and sets outputs.

This type of single run through the list of programs is called a "scan."

The controller then returns to the beginning of the firing order list and scans the next appropriate line of each program. The scans continue.

What is the "next appropriate line"? The line determined by the scan process sequence.

Scan Action List

A complete list of the scan actions in the order the controller carries them out is as follows:

• Updates all enabled system variables.

• Updates controller-resident schedules, setting occupied and unoccupied events.

• Updates controller input points.

• Runs program statements and Command Lines (executes Command Lines between program lines only).

• Updates controller output points.

• Processes all alarms and if necessary, updates the Status bar.

Other Actions The controller also performs the following actions at any time during

the scan:

• Has triggers set program Status to Active.

• Changes value of numeric, string, or datetime points.

• Updates attribute settings.

• Updates point logs.


The Scanning Process, continued

The Basic Stages

The basic stages in the scanning process are illustrated below. Each of the stages is discussed in detail in the following paragraphs.

The Scanning Process



1. Updating System Variables

The controller updates the values of all ENABLED system variables (DATE, SECOND, MINUTE, HOUR, WEEKDAY, and so on) at the start of each scan. Setting the DATE first ensures that all programs work from the same time base. System variables retain the value they begin with throughout the scan. So, if the scan starts on the 12th second of the minute, SECOND equals 12 throughout the scan. (If the scan itself is 0.25 seconds long, then the actions are taking place at between 12 and 12.25 seconds. This is a factor to keep in mind when timing is critical.) If a program is in the trigger list for a system variable that has changed, and the program’s State is ENABLED, its Status is set to ACTIVE so it runs during the upcoming scan.

2. Updating Schedules

When schedules are processed, it updates each occupied and unoccupied point so that later, when programs run, the actions are based on the latest schedules.

3. Updating Input Points

The scan gathers electrical values (represented by the ELECVALUE attribute) of all ENABLED inputs from remote and local inputs, in numeric order starting with input number 1. The inputs for the electrical values are in the electrical units specified for that point. The controller converts each input that has changed since the last scan into engineering units. Conversion methods may be different, but all occur at this moment in the scan, whether an auto-conversion, customized conversion, system conversion (such as ACC Degrees F or C), or null conversion (where VALUE equals ELECVALUE). The converted value of each input point is stored in the input's object value attribute. Once the new values are assigned to input points, those points retain their values throughout the scan. All action taken during the scan is based on the initial input values. If a program is in the trigger list for an input point that has changed, and the program's State is ENABLED, its Status is set to ACTIVE so it runs during the upcoming scan.



4. Running Programs and Executing Commands

During each scan, the controller executes the current line from each program that conforms to the following:

• State is ENABLED

• Status is ACTIVE

• Current line is not zero

The controller executes one line from each program in the sequence the firing order list specifies. The controller treats command lines like one-line programs. The scanner checks for command lines between every two-program lines during the scan and responds immediately. If any command line or program line prints to the Status bar, the Status bar display changes after the scan processes alarms. If more than one statement prints to the Status bar, the last statement "wins." The controller includes a safety mechanism such that no single program can monopolize the scan. The mechanism is a statement counter that disables a program and sets its ERROR attribute to "Executed too many statements on one line" if the scanner tries to execute more than 5000 statements in a single line during a single scan.

5. Updating Output Points

The scan sets output point values as instructed in programs or command lines during this phase of the scanning process. At the end of the scan, the controller converts the value of each output that changed in the previous scan from engineering units to electrical units. Conversion methods may be different, but all occur at this moment in the scan, whether an auto-conversion, customized conversion, or null conversion (where ELECVALUE equals VALUE). After converting all output point values, the ELECVALUEs are sent to the local or remote outputs. As an example, if the first program sets the output of HEATER to ON and the last program sets it to OFF, how does the controller resolve this kind of conflict? The HEATER is set to OFF, because output points change at the end of the scan⎯the setting of the last program is the one that takes affect.



5. Updating Output Points continued

You can use the fact that the output hardware is not updated until the end of the scan to carry out certain advanced control strategies, but we do not encourage you to program this way. You should handle both turning on and turning off a piece of equipment in one program, so that no conflicts arise based on the firing order list. We do, however, recognize that you may want a master emergency program to override output settings of all other programs in certain circumstances. That is why you are allowed to alter the firing order.

6. Evaluating Alarms

Finally, the last action of the scan is evaluating alarms. The following describes the actions of an Infinity or i2 controller, not a BACnet controller. BACnet alarms are slightly different. Points with Infinity alarms can be triggered by up to eight separate conditions. Whenever the point's value is set during the scan, the controller evaluates each condition associated with an alarm and updates the point's alarm attributes: ALARM1 through ALARM8. Or, it calculates the alarm's delay time. The alarm is activated immediately unless it has a delay. If the controller has set the ALARMDELAY, and the condition to set the alarm is TRUE, the controller adds the ALARMDELAY time to the current system time to calculate the alarm delay time. The scan places the alarm in a list of alarms to be evaluated again based on the alarm delay time. At the end of each scan, the scanner checks the list of delayed alarms. The scanner reevaluates the alarm conditions of the alarms that have reached their delay times, and if they are still TRUE, sets the alarms.

Updating the Status Bar

After the scan processes the alarms, it updates the Status bar display if its setting has changed or if a value it is displaying has changed.


Other Scanning Issues

Numeric, String, and DateTime Points

Numeric, string, and datetime points change values immediately within a program. So if the first program sets the setpoint to 72, and later in the same scan another program tests the setpoint, the later program sees the new value of 72.

Updating Point Logs

As it alters point values, the scan process evaluates all points that are automatic logs and updates them if necessary (based on the log interval).

Triggering Programs from Points

Scan length varies depending on the amount of work done. You can reduce scan time by assuring your programs conform to the following guidelines:

• Set the points that your program references to triggers for that program.

• The program should make the decision and set some points.

• The program should end (by being set up as a fall-thru program or including a STOP statement).

Such programs run only when necessary, reducing scan time.

Exported Points

Point values can be exported at any time during the scan. As an example, if PROGRAM1 turns a FAN ON early in the scan and PROGRAM99 turns it OFF later, although the fan would never physically turn on, the VALUE of ON could be exported to another controller between PROGRAM1 and PROGRAM99. This is another reason you should handle both turning on and turning off a piece of equipment in the same program.

Power Failure Conditions and the Firing Order

The Firing Order can be used to determine the order in which programs run. This is especially useful when handling power failure conditions. In such a situation, once power is restored, the program at the top of the firing order list runs followed by the next program on the list, and so on, down the list. If you have a specific power-up sequence where certain programs and items must be set in a certain order, you can use the Firing Order to do this.


Other Scanning Issues, continued

Power Failure Conditions and the Firing Order continued

To accomplish this, write a Fall-Thru program that is triggered by the PowerFail system variable. This program should contain a statement that starts all the other programs in the correct sequence. START Program1, Program2,… This sets each program's status to active, and places the program pointer to the first line of the program.


Chapter 4

Points, Constants and Variables

At a Glance

Introduction This chapter describes the types of points, constants and variables that exist

in the Continuum system. The difference between hardware and software points, what constitutes a constant and how a constant differs from a variable, what a system defined constant is, what makes a local variable different from a system variable and unique i2 controller system variables are all covered in this chapter.


Points

Types of Points Points are objects that supply information to the control system. There are

five types of points:

• Input • Output • Numeric • String • DateTime Input and output points are hardware points, whereas numeric, string, and datetime points are software points.

Hardware Points

Controllers use input and output points to interact with the environment. They connect to sensors or devices directly from certain controllers or via input/output IOU modules that are attached to a controller.

Input Points You use an input point to sense temperature, pressure, and the closure of a

switch contact or any outside environmental entity that can be electrically represented. Input circuits in Andover controllers act like voltmeters; they can measure the presence or absence of a voltage. In situations where switch contacts are being sensed, the input circuit supplies the voltage to one side of the contact. When the contact is closed, the voltage is “sensed” on the other contact. Temperature and pressure sensors modify the value of the voltage sensed. Each input point includes an associated “value” attribute that represents the voltage reading at one particular point in time. When you reference an input point in a Plain English program you are actually referencing the value attribute of the point. Example: IF INPUT1 = 74 THEN … INPUT1’s “value” attribute contains the input reading (74)


Points, continued

Output Points Outputs control external equipment such as motors, valves and heaters.

Andover controllers include two types of outputs: those that switch and those that supply a variable voltage or current. Outputs that switch (we call these Digital outputs), effectively close or open switch contacts (relays or electronic equivalents to relays-Triacs). These can be set to ON or OFF. They can also be PULSED (rapid on-off). Outputs that supply a variable voltage or current can be set to a specific value. The value becomes the voltage or current the output supplies.

Software Points Software points are storage locations found within the controller or

workstation where information can be saved for use in a program. Some software points are read-only. These points can represent system information regarding the status of various hardware or software entities. The following are examples of software points:

Numeric (called Multi-State Value, Analog Value or Binary Value on Workstations) String DateTime A good example of a software point would be a numeric that serves as a place to store the high or low limit (set point) for a temperature reading.

Numeric Points Numeric points are storage locations in a controller's memory that contain

numeric-only information. A numeric point could also be used to indicate whether a building is occupied or not, in which case its value could be ON or OFF.

Multi-State Value Points

Multi-State Value points are storage locations in a workstation's memory that contain numeric-only information.

String Points String points are storage locations in a controller or workstation’s memory

that contain plain text information such as messages that are displayed on a workstation screen, printer or for a display device such as the LD-1 or xP Display.


Points, continued

DateTime Points

Datetime points are storage locations in a controller or workstation's memory that store date time information. They store a timestamp (the default is January 1, 1989) not month or day of week. They are used in schedules and to create time stamps.

Controller vs. Workstation Points

Workstations and controllers share many of the same Continuum capabilities. For instance, you can create a program that runs only on a workstation (this is called a “program”). Similarly, you can create a program that runs only on a controller (this is called an “InfinityProgram”). Software points can be created on both workstations and controllers. Once again, an entity created on the controller would include the “Infinity” name as part of the entity (e.g., InfinityNumeric, InfinityDateTime). BACnet controllers are treated as Infinity controllers and therefore include Infinity-based names for their points and programs as well.


Constants


Constants are numbers, words, or dates that do not change. They remain constant. There are two types of constants:

• Numeric • String

Numeric Constant

A numeric constant is a number. The number can be an integer (with no decimal places) or a number with a decimal (floating point).

Integer Numbers

Integer numbers have no decimal places. When an integer number is required in a keyword format, you can use only a whole number, positive or negative, including zero.

Floating Point Numbers

You can enter a floating point number as one of the following:

• The actual number with up to seven decimal places • A number in scientific notation • Positive numbers between 1.40129E-45 and 3.402823E+38 • Negative numbers between -3.402823E+38 and

-1.40129E-45

The numbers accepted are IEEE single precision floating point.

Examples of Numeric Constants

Examples of some acceptable numbers are:

• 12 • 74.5 • -.543 • 4E+32

You cannot have a comma in the number (e.g., 2,000) because the number must be made up of the numeric characters 0 through 9 only. Entering a comma in a number makes it an invalid number.

How the Controller Interprets Numbers

The controller accepts all numbers, but the controller interprets:

• Numbers greater than 3.402823E+38 as infinity. • Numbers less than -.402823E+38 as negative infinity. • Numbers between 1.40129E-45 and -.40129E-45 as zero.


Constants, continued

String Constants

A string constant is a series of ASCII characters, including blanks, surrounded by quotation marks ("string").

Rules for String Constants

Even though a string may contain a number, the number cannot be used in mathematical calculations. A string can have up to 132 characters when used in a CX series controller and up to 32 characters when used in an Infinet i2 controller. In addition, a string can contain a vertical bar ( | ) followed by an ASCII code (a number that stands for a character or simple action). You would, for instance, use |7 to produce a beep:

PRINT "The next sound you hear is a beep |7"

Anything you put after the vertical bar is interpreted as a code or a format for a variable value. For example, to print a quote enclosed by quotation marks you would use (“) following the vertical bar. In the statement:

PRINT “The string |” abc|” is included”

Prints: The string “abc” is included.

More information about the vertical bar in strings is included under the PRINT keyword, in Chapter 7. The complete ASCII code table is listed in Appendix A.

System Defined Constants

System constants are predefined in Plain English and their values do not change. ON and OFF are two examples of system constants. Days of the week, months of the year are also system constants. Certain keywords are also constants. Other system constants include not only keywords, but also values you can set attributes to. For instance, you can set the point type attribute to VOLTAGE, so VOLTAGE is a system constant. Do not use these words as names when you name programs, points, or other items. For a complete listing of Continuum system constants refer to Appendix B.


Variables


Variables are names that stand for numbers, words, or dates and times. A variable, unlike a constant, has a value that changes or varies. Types of variables include:

• Numeric • String • DateTime The Plain English Language supports both System and program variables.

Numeric Variables

A numeric variable is a name that represents a number. Numeric variables are subject to the same range limitations as numeric constants. Numeric constants, variables, points, expressions (formulas), or functions can be compared to other numeric type items or used in mathematical calculations. For more about numeric variables, see the NUMERIC statement keyword in Chapter 7.

String Variables

A string variable is a name that represents a series of alphanumeric characters. String constants, variables, points, expressions, or functions can be compared to other string type items. Strings cannot be used in mathematical calculations unless they are converted to a numeric type. For more about string variables refer to the STRING and STRINGFILL statement keywords in Chapter 7.

DateTime Variables

A datetime variable is a name that represents a date and time. Datetime constants, variables, points, expressions, or functions can be compared to other datetime items. You can retrieve the date and time from the STRTODATE function or from the DATE system variable. Chapter 7 provides a full discussion of both these keywords. You can print out a datetime variable to see what date and time is in it, but the date and time that prints is in a predefined format you cannot change. The date and time prints in this format (in the 24-hour clock):

MONTH DD YYYY hh:mm:ss


Local Variables

Description Whereas system variables are understood by all controllers and workstations

in the system, local variables are only understood by the program where they are defined. You must define each local variable at the beginning of the program where they will be used. If you define them anywhere else in the program it will not run. Note: If you name a local variable with the same name you have defined for a point, your program always assumes you are referring to the local variable and not to the point. You can have a total of 255 local variables (of all types) in a single program. You define local variables using the Numeric, String, and DateTime keyword statements (each is listed in Chapter 7). An example of each of these keywords is given below.

Numeric Keyword

The Numeric keyword assigns the name that follows it as a local numeric variable:

Numeric RateOfRise

String Keyword The String keyword assigns the name that follows it as a local string variable

with a maximum number of characters allowed defined before the name:

String 40 DirtyFilterMsg

DateTime Keyword

The DateTime keyword assigns the name that follows it as a local variable that accepts a date and time:

DateTime LocalDateTime


System Variables

Description A system variable is a storage location that the system sets and updates

automatically. Most of the system variables are controlled by the system and cannot be changed by the user. Those that can be changed are referred to as “Programmable System Variables” (see below).

System variables exist on all controllers and workstations. You can view them by selecting the Network views in the Continuum Explorer menu and opening the InfinitySystemVariable folder under the applicable controller or workstation. The screenshot below illustrates a portion of the system variables that appears in the Explorer’s viewing pane for the selected controller.

Controller System Variables Appearing in Continuum Explorer

Programmable System Variables

Programmable system variables are names for values the controller sets initially, that you can change later. The term “programmable” always means you can change a value.

The programmable system variables available in the Plain English Language are listed below and each is described on the following page.

• AudioBell • DCXPower • ModemPower • BackLight • IOUPower • Status1 to Status8 • CPUPower • MicroPower

Note: The i2 and BACnet controller programmable system variables and techniques are covered extensively in the i2 and BACnet Controller Technical Reference Guides.


System Variables

System Variable Listing

The following table provides a complete list of the system variables for workstations and CX controllers. In addition to these, i2 and BACnet controllers have a unique set of extra system variables that are fully described in their respective Technical Reference Guides.

Workstation & CX System Variables

Name Available on Description AccessLog CX series

controllers The number of personal records stored on the access server.

AccessSsrver ACX & CX series controllers

A programmable system variable that indicates the ACCNet ID where the areas and personnel are stored for access control. Setting this system variable to 0 (zero) instructs the access controller to perform local access validation using its distributed personnel objects.

Alarms All controllers & CyberStation

The number of pending alarms. Increments by one each time a new alarm occurs and decrements by one each time an alarm returns to normal.

AudioBell DCX250 controller A programmable system variable that sets the number of seconds that the DCX250 display will beep for.

AvailRecords ACX & CX series controllers

Expresses a close approximation of the remaining slots left to store personnel records in a controller’s memory.

BackLight DCX250 controller A programmable system variable that sets the number of seconds to turn on the background light on the DCX250 display.

CabinetTamper ACX controller Indicates whether or not the controller has been tampered with (True or False).

CPUPower CX series controllers

A programmable system variable that is used to turn off the battery power to the controller’s CPU.

DatabaseStatus CyberStation Shows the current state of the database as Online or Offline.

Date *All controllers & CyberStation

Retrieves current system date and time so that you can then store it in a variable.

DayofMonth *All controllers & CyberStation

Gives the current day of the month from 1 to 31.

DayofYear *All controllers & CyberStation

Gives the current day of the year between 1 and 366.


System Variables

System Variable Listing continued

Workstation & CX System Variables continued

Name Available on Description DCXPower DCX250 controller A programmable system variable that

controls power to the controller when its PowerFail system variable is ON.

Errors *All controllers & CyberStation

Indicates the number of errors existing on the system.

EventLogSize CX series controllers

A programmable system variable that indicates the number of access control events the controller can store in its event log.

FreeMem *All controllers Indicates the number of bytes of free memory available on a controller. Does not indicate available memory on a CyberStation.

Hour *All controllers & CyberStation

Indicates the current hour, from0 to 23.

HourofDay *All controllers & CyberStation

Indicates the time in decimal form from 0 to 23.99.

HundredthofSecond CyberStation Indicates hundredths of a second as a number between 0 and 99.

Infinet1Count CX series controllers and CMX 9924 controller

Gives the number of Infinet controllers communicating with the CX or CMX 9924 using Commport 1.

Infinet2Count CX series controllers and CMX 9924 controller

Gives the number of Infinet controllers communicating with the CX or CMX 9924 using Commport 2.

IOUCommFlt1 to IOUCommFlt16

*All controllers Gives ON if there is a communication fault (failure) to or from the controller’s IOU module or OFF if there is no communication fault.

IOUPower CX series controllers

A programmable system variable that controls power to the IOU modules when the associated controller’s PowerFail system variable is ON.

MessageWindow CyberStation A separate window that shows all of the system text messages since the last time the message window was emptied.


System Variables



Name Available on Description MicroPower CX series

controllers and ACX781Infinet controllers

A programmable system variable that controls power to the ACX781 Infinet controller when the associated controller’s PowerFail system variable is ON.

Minute *All controllers & CyberStation

Gives the exact minute of the current hour, from 0 to 59.

ModemPower CX series and CMX series controllers

A programmable system variable that controls the battery power to the controller’s modem. Set to ON when AC power is up and OFF when it is goes down.

Month *All controllers & CyberStation

Gives the current month of the year, from January to December.

NewAlarmCount CX and CMX series controllers

Indicates the number of new alarms on the controller and all its Infinet controllers since the last time the alarms were sent to the workstation.

PowerFail *All controllers & CyberStation

Indicates whether or not the AC power to the controller has failed. See full description on page 4-14.

PowerUpTime *All controllers & CyberStation

Gives the date and time of the last AC power application to the controller.

ReaderPower ACX series controllers

Indicates whether or not any access card reader on the controller has lost power. Gives TRUE if the card reader lost power, FALSE if not.

Scan *All controllers & CyberStation

Indicates the controller’s last scan time in seconds.

Second *All controllers & CyberStation

Gives the exact number of seconds of the current minute, from 0 to 59.

Status1 to Status8 CX 9201 controller Programmable system variables that control the eight status LEDs on the front of the controller cabinet. ON turns on the LED and OFF turns off the LED.

SystemStatus ACX and CX series controllers

Indicates whether communications is occurring between the access server and the controller.


System Variables



Name Available on Description TimeofDay *All controllers &

CyberStation Gives the time of day with the hour and minute in the format HHMM where HH is a number between 0 and 23 and MM is a number between 0 and 59.

TouchedCell DCX250 controller Indicates the number (from 1 to 64) of the first block (cell) that an operator touched on the ACX 250 display during the last scan.

UniquePin ACX, CMX and CX (except 9500) series controllers

Indicates whether or not each person who has access must have a unique personal identification number (PIN).

Version *All controllers & CyberStation

Gives the current version number of the software running on the controller.

Weekday *All controllers & CyberStation

Gives the current day of the week, from SUNDAY through SATURDAY.

Year *All controllers & CyberStation

Gives the current year from 1989 through 2088.

*Includes the following controllers: ACX series, CX series, LCX series, SCX series, TCX series and the DCX 250.

Specific information pertaining to various characteristics of particular system

variables listed in the tables is provided in the following paragraphs.

STATUS# System Variables

The STATUS# system variables exist for up to eight status lights on the front of the CX 9201 controller’s cabinet (STATUS1, STATUS2, STATUS3, and so on.) You can label each status light on the CX 9201 to any value you choose; for instance, STATUS 2 could be an alarm that says SPACE TOO WARM. When the space is too warm, the light turns on. (You turn the light on by setting it from inside a program when the space temperature is higher than setpoint.) See the STATUS# keyword in Chapter 7 for more information.


System Variables, continued

PowerFail and other Power related System Variables

On all controllers that have battery backup, each time you lose AC power to the controller its PowerFail system variable is automatically set to ON and the battery backup provides power. This PowerFail system variable remains ON throughout AC power loss until AC power is restored (see Note, below, for PowerFail behavior on Infinet, i2 and BACnet controllers).

The PowerFail system variable:

• Indicates the loss of AC power.

• Is set to ON if power has failed and set to OFF if AC power is present.

• Can be used as a trigger to tell the controller when to start a power management program.

For CX9900 and ACX781 controllers:

• All CX9900 series controllers can continue to run on battery backup while power is down. The ACX781 is the only Infinet controller that continues full functional operation on battery backup.

• On the CX9900 series controller and the ACX781 controller, the PowerFail system variable turns OFF as soon as AC power is restored.

Note: On all other controllers, when AC power is restored the PowerFail system variable is ON only during the first scan after power restoration. When AC power is applied to the controller, the current date and time is recorded to the PowerupTime system variable. This system variable can be used to determine how many hours have elapsed since AC power was restored to the controller.

When the system sets the PowerFail system variable to ON, some additional system variables provide the user with power control for certain portions of the system. These are settable by the user only if the system is operating in battery backup mode (meaning the PowerFail system variable is ON). These power-related system variables can be ON or OFF.

Associated PowerFail System Variables CPUPower Controls the power for the controller itself.

DCXPower Controls the power for the DCX controller.

ModemPower Controls the power for the modem.

IOUPower Controls the power for the IOU modules.

ReaderPower Controls the power for the ACX700 series controllers.

MicroPower Controls the power for the ACX781 controllers.


Chapter 5

Operators and Expressions

At a Glance

Introduction This chapter describes the operators that Plain English uses for mathematical

expressions.


Order of Action

Definition of an Operator

An operator is that part of an expression that causes a mathematical operation to occur, such as addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, and so on, or tests a condition such as equality.

Listing Order In Plain English, operators are acted upon in a certain sequence when more

than one operator occurs in an expression. The following table lists the order (top to bottom) that is used when working out an expression

Operators and Their Order When Used in an Expression Operator Description Association ( ) [ ]

Parentheses Array Element

Left to Right

Blank or \ Path Name Connector Right to Left

+ - NOT BITNOT %

Plus Sign on Number Minus Sign on Number Logical Negation Bitwise Negation Percentage

Right to Left

^ Exponentiation Left to Right

* / MOD

Multiplication Division Modulus

Left to Right

+ -

Addition Subtraction

Left to Right

< <= > >=

Less Than Less Than or Equal Greater Than Greater Than or Equal

Left to Right

= <> IS IN IS NOT IN IS BETWEEN IS THRU

Equal Not Equal Set Inclusion Set Exclusion Range Range

Left to Right

BITAND BITOR BITXOR

Bitwise Logical And Bitwise Logical Or Bitwise Logical Exclusive Or

Left to Right

& !

Logical And Logical Or

Left to Right

; Joining Operator Left to Right


Plus Sign, Minus Sign, Negation, BITNOT, and Percentage

+ number Can be used in front of a number to show it is positive, but has no affect on

the value.

- number Makes a positive number negative and a negative number positive. This

works only on numeric expressions.

NOT number Logically negates the number or expression. If the value of the expression is

nonzero, NOT changes it to 0 and vice-versa. If the expression is TRUE, NOT makes it FALSE and vice-versa.

BITNOT integer Changes the 1s to 0s and 0s to 1s in the binary equivalent of the integer,

then gives you the decimal integer equivalent of that binary number.

number % Divides the number by 100 to give you the percentage.


Fundamental Operators

Addition number + number

Adds the numbers. Works only on numbers or datetimes and the resulting expression is numeric or datetime.

Alias: PLUS.

Subtraction number − number

Subtracts one number from another. Works only on numbers or datetimes and the resulting expression is numeric or datetime.

Alias: MINUS.

Multiplication number * number

Multiplies the numbers. Works only on numbers or datetimes and the resulting expression is numeric or datetime.

Aliases: TIMES, MULT, and MULTIPLIED BY.

Division number / number

Divides one number by another. Works only on numbers or datetimes and the resulting expression is numeric or datetime.

Alias: DIVIDED BY.

Modulus number MOD number

Finds the amount left over when dividing the first number by the second. For example 9 MOD 7 gives 2. Similarly, −9 MOD 7 also equals −2.

Alias: REMAINDER.

Exponentiation number ^ number

Finds the result of the first number raised to the second number power.

Alias: EXP


Comparative Operators

General Each of the following operators compares the number to the left of the

keyword with the number to its right. All of the expressions using comparative operators yield TRUE (numeric 1) or FALSE (numeric 0) and are considered numeric.

Less Than number < number

Compares two numbers and determines whether the value of the left number is less than the value of the right. Aliases: IS LESS THAN, (THAN is optional), and IS BELOW.

Less Than or Equal

number <= number Compares two numbers and determines whether the value of the left number is less than or equal to the value of the right. Alias: IS LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO where THAN and TO are optional.

Greater Than number > number

Compares two numbers and determines whether the value of the left number is greater than the value of the right. Alias: IS GREATER THAN (THAN is optional), and IS ABOVE.

Greater Than or Equal

number >= number Compares two numbers and determines whether the value of the left number is greater than or equal to the value of the right. Alias: IS GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO where THAN and TO are optional.


Comparative Operators, continued

Equal number = number

Compares two numbers and determines whether the value of the left number is equal to the value of the right. Aliases: EQUALS and IS EQUAL TO where TO is optional.

Not Equal number <> number

Compares two numbers and determines whether the value of the left number is not equal to the value of the right. Aliases: DOES NOT EQUAL and IS NOT EQUAL TO where TO is optional.

Comparing String Values

You may also use greater than, less than, or equal to operators to compare two string values. The strings are evaluated by ASCII code. This means that “Z” is greater than “A” and “9” is greater than “0” and “A” is greater than “9”. Also “ABC” is greater than “A”. Refer to the standard ASCII chart in Appendix A for a complete list of characters.

Type Conversion

If the compared expressions are not the same type, you must convert them to the same type using the keywords below:

• StrToNum converts a string to a number. • NumToStr converts a number to a string. • StrToDate converts a string with the correct information into a datetime.


List and Range Operators

IS IN number IS IN list or number IS list

Determines if the first number or expression is in the listed set. If the number on the lefthand side of the expression is in the list expression on the righthand side, the expression yields TRUE (numeric 1), or FALSE (0) otherwise. Alias: IS EITHER.

IS NOT IN number IS NOT IN list

Determines if the first number or expression is NOT in the listed set. If the number on the left hand side of the expression is not in the list expression on the right hand side, the expression yields TRUE (numeric 1), or FALSE (0) otherwise. Alias: IS NEITHER.

IS THRU IS number THRU number

Gives a range starting with the number or expression to the left of THRU and ending with the one to the right. The result of a range is the same type as the expressions. (This statement is operationally equivalent to IS BETWEEN)

IS BETWEEN IS BETWEEN number AND number

Gives a range starting with the number or expression before AND and ending with the one after it. (This statement is operationally equivalent to IS THRU)


Bit Operators

BITAND integer BITAND integer

Compares the binary equivalents of the two integers, digit by digit, as if the 1s were TRUE and the 0s FALSE. If both binary numbers contain a 1 in the same place, that is TRUE AND TRUE, which gives TRUE. If both numbers contain a 0 in the same place, that is FALSE AND FALSE, which is FALSE. If one number contains a 1 and the other a 0 in the same place, that is TRUE AND FALSE, which is also FALSE. Refer to the truth table on the next page for further explanation.

BITOR integer BITOR integer

Compares the binary equivalents of the two integers, digit by digit, as if the 1s were TRUE and the 0s FALSE. If both binary numbers contain a 1 in the same place, that is TRUE OR TRUE, which gives TRUE. If both numbers contain a 0 in the same place, that is FALSE OR FALSE, which is FALSE. If one number contains a 1 and the other a 0 in the same place, that is TRUE OR FALSE, which is TRUE. Refer to the truth table on the next page for further explanation.

BITXOR integer BITXOR integer

Compares the binary equivalents of the two integers, digit by digit, as if the 1s were TRUE and the 0s FALSE. While BITOR finds cases where either digit is TRUE, BITXOR finds cases where one or the other is TRUE, but not both. If both binary numbers contain a 1 in the same place, that is TRUE OR TRUE, which gives FALSE because only one or the other can be TRUE, not both. If both numbers contain a 0 in the same place, that is FALSE OR FALSE, which is FALSE. If one number contains a 1 and the other a 0 in the same position, that is TRUE OR FALSE, which is TRUE. Refer to the truth table on the next page for further explanation.


BIT Operators, continued

Truth Table The truth table for the bit operators is as follows:

BIT Operator Truth Table Operator Integer1 Integer2 Result BITAND BITAND BITAND

TRUE TRUE FALSE

TRUE FALSE FALSE

TRUE FALSE FALSE

BITOR BITOR BITOR

TRUE TRUE FALSE

TRUE FALSE FALSE

TRUE TRUE FALSE

BITXOR BITXOR BITXOR

TRUE TRUE FALSE

TRUE FALSE FALSE

FALSE TRUE FALSE


AND/OR and String Joining Operators

AND number & number

Includes two expressions (which must be numeric or converted to numeric) in a comparison. The statement returns TRUE (numeric 1) if both expressions are nonzero, and FALSE (numeric 0) otherwise. The Alias: AND.

OR number ! number

Determines whether a comparison is true by making the comparison to each expression (which must be numeric or converted to numeric) separately, excluding the others. The statement returns FALSE (numeric 0) if both expressions are false, TRUE (numeric 1) if at least one is true. The Alias: OR.

String Joining string ; string

Joins two strings by adding the second one onto the end of the first to form a new string. Both expressions must be of type string or convert to type string.


Chapter 6

Functions, Arrays, and Logs

At a Glance

Introduction This chapter explains Plain English Language functions, their arguments,

how to call them and how to return a value to a function. It also explains arrays and logs, how to set them up and how they can be used in functions.


Functions

Definition A function is a routine designed to carry out a particular task or series of

tasks and is executed in one Plain English scan. There are built-in and user-defined functions. An example of a built-in function is the Plain English function SQRT that returns the square root of a given number: RESULT = SQRT(25) The number the function operates on (25) is included within parentheses. This function returns the value 5. When a function is used to calculate or provide a value, it “returns” the value to the program that calls the function. A program may also provide (“pass”) the function some values (called “arguments”) to use in calculations or actions it must take. Arguments (separated by commas if these are several) are included in parentheses following the function name. Not all functions require arguments, however, you should include the parenthesis even if it is empty (e.g., function ()). You can run a function from:

• The Command Line, if the function exists in a controller or on a workstation.

• A Program, if the program and the function exist on the same controller.

User-defined functions are created using standard Plain English keywords within something called a “function file”. The name you give the file becomes the word you use to activate the function. The small Plain English program you write as a function becomes a subroutine that may be called whenever that particular action needs to be done. Functions must end with the RETURN statement. It tells the controller to "return to the calling program, function or command line."


Functions, continued

Calling a Function

You can activate ("call") a function by using its name as a statement in a program, on the command line, or inside another function. You place the arguments in parentheses after the statement.

In the following example, the START.STOP function starts fans 1 and 2 and stops fans 3 and 4 during daylight hours.

IF TimeofDay > 6:00am AND TimeofDay < 6:00pm THEN START.STOP(FAN1, FAN2, FAN3, FAN4) RUN HEATER

ELSE START.STOP(FAN3, FAN4, FAN1, FAN2) ENDIF

Calling a Function without Arguments

The function need not have arguments if it works with the same points all the time. You can define one that stops all fans and call it FANSTOP.

STOP FAN1, FAN2, FAN3 AND FAN4 RETURN

Parentheses may be omitted.

IF TOD > 1800 AND TOD < 800 THEN FANSTOP( )

FANSTOP knows about the fans because they are points on the controller.

Calling a Function with Arguments

Functions can have not only points for arguments, but local variables from the calling program, program names, other function names; basically anything that is named within a controller.

The following example shows a function that starts and stops two programs.

ARG 1 PROGRAM1 ARG 2 PROGRAM2 START PROGRAM1 STOP PROGRAM2 RETURN

The calling program can send any two items to this function that can be acted on by START or STOP. You can start and stop any point (piece of equipment) or program.


Functions that Return a Value

In addition to returning to the calling program, RETURN can also bring back the results of a calculation. The following example shows a function that returns a value. In this case, the RETURN statement contains an expression. The function returns the value resulting from that expression to the program.

ARG 1 TMP1 ARG 2 TMP2 ARG 3 TMP3 ARG 4 TMP4 NUMERIC TOTAL.CHANGE TOTAL.CHANGE = (TMP1 - TMP2) + (TMP2 - TMP3) + (TMP3 -TMP4) RETURN (TOTAL.CHANGE/3)

As shown below, you could also give the expression a local variable name.

ARG 1 TMP1 ARG 2 TMP2 ARG 3 TMP3 ARG 4 TMP4 NUMERIC TOTAL.CHANGE, MID.CHANGE TOTAL.CHANGE = (TMP1 - TMP2) + (TMP2 - TMP3) + (TMP3 - TMP4) MID.CHANGE = TOTAL.CHANGE/3

RETURN MID.CHANGE

Why use a name instead of an expression in the RETURN statement? The name is more readable as its meaning is automatically clear.

RETURN can return a string in quotation marks or a date and time as well as a number. All of these are values.


Arrays

Definition An array is a group of variables of the same size, and sharing a single name,

but broken up into numbered cells, called elements. You refer to each element in the array using a number called an "index". For example, if we had an array with 8 elements called CLOCK, you can refer to its eight possible values as CLOCK[1], CLOCK[2], CLOCK[3], CLOCK[4], and so on.

Example of an Eight Element Array

Index Value 1 8.000

2 8.510

3 9.000

4 9.620

5 10.000

6 10.750 7 11.000

8 11.250

CLOCK[1] is 8.000, CLOCK[2] is 8.510, CLOCK[3] is 9.000, and so on. Each entry in an array is referred to as an element. A Continuum array can contain up to 32,767 elements. You can also put a numeric variable in place of the index number, such as CLOCK[COUNT]. The variable is called an "index variable."

Setting Up an Array of Variables

When you define an array variable, you must specify a type (numeric, string, or datetime) and the number of elements. The following statement defines (declares) a local array called “Temperature” as numeric with 50 elements:

NUMERIC TEMPERATURE[50]

For more on defining arrays and other types of variables, see the NUMERIC, STRING, and DATETIME keywords in Chapter 7.


Logs

Definition Logs are points that automatically update and save readings from the

environment. Logs can be input, output, numeric, string, or datetime points. A log of points stores the last several values of an input, output, or an other point. Logs are similar to arrays (see the previous page) except that arrays must be programmatically updated while the log point automatically updates.

How a Log Updates

Continuum updates automatic logs by inserting new values into the first log entry, as shown below. At every interval a new value is stored in the first log entry, pushing existing values down to the remaining entries. When the specified number of entries is full of values, the bottom value is “dropped off” when a new value is inserted.

Example of Log

Updates

Index Value 1 72

2 73

3 75

4 74

5 73

6 72

7 71

8 73

The log position with the index [1] contains the newest logged value. The

highest index number holds the oldest value. However, if you access the log without an index number, you receive the current value of the point. For example, the OUTSIDEAIR log updates as follows:

OUTSIDEAIR is the current value. OUTSIDEAIR[1] is the most recently logged value. OUTSIDEAIR[2] is the second most recently logged value. OUTSIDEAIR[3] is the third most recently logged value, and so on.

Most recent value recorded

8th most recent value recorded


Logs, continued

How to Retrieve Log Values

When working with logs, you won’t actually see structures like the one shown on the previous page. Instead, you’ll use point names and index numbers to retrieve values stored in logs. To do this, simply enclose the index number in square brackets ([ ]) directly after the point name. For example, to print the sixth entry (72) of the log for OUTSIDEAIR (shown above), use the following command:

PRINT OutsideAir[6]

Log Update Intervals

Logs are updated at an intervals that you specify. You can specify that a log update every ‘x’ number of seconds, minutes, hours, or days.

The log always updates at an even interval on the clock, no matter when the log started. For example, a log with an interval of 15 minutes would log entries at 10:15, 10:30, 10:45, 11:00, and so on.

Log Types When you define a log, as with any other point, you must specify a type

(numeric, string, datetime, input, or output) and the number of entries, called elements. Logs automatically update in one of four ways:

• Instantaneous • Average • Minimum • Maximum Each update takes all the values of the last scan and acts on either the most recent (instantaneous), the average of them (average), the lowest of them (minimum), or the highest of them (maximum). String and datetime logs must be instantaneous. You can have a string log that contains messages. Note: You can always manually update a log.


Logs, continued

Setting Up a Log

You can define two logs for any point: a short-term log, and an extended log. Short-term logs are stored on the controller that owns the point. As the name implies, an extended log is an extension of a short-term log. Extended logs are stored in the Continuum database rather than the controller. For input, output, numeric, string or datetime points, you can set up one of two basic types of short-term logs: logs that you update manually or logs that the system updates automatically. For a complete description on setting up a log refer to Chapter 13 of the Continuum CyberStation Configurator's Guide. You can use the SIZE attribute in a FOR..NEXT loop to access the values of a log. See the FOR..NEXT keyword in Chapter 7.

Using Arrays or Logs in Functions

In certain functions you can use an array or a log name to represent the entire series of numbers. Usually the function has a special format for arrays or logs. Such functions automatically understand that you want the function carried out on the entire array or log. For example, applying the AVERAGE function to a log called OUTSIDEAIR automatically averages all the temperatures in the log:

AVERAGE (OUTSIDEAIR) However, functions or other keywords that do not have a special format for arrays do not carry out the function on the entire array or log, but instead automatically take the current value of the point. For example, PRINT OUTSIDEAIR prints the current value of OUTSIDEAIR, rather than each value in the log. The current value of the log and the last value logged are not necessarily the same. The current value is the one read by the current scan. Functions automatically carried out on the entire log are:

AVERAGE MAXIMUM MAXITEM MINIMUM MINITEM STANDARDDEVIATION SUM

See Chapter 7 for more information on these function keywords.


Chapter 7

Keywords

At a Glance

Introduction This chapter provides a complete description of all the keywords used in

Andover Controls Plain English programming language. The chapter begins with a discussion of the formatting conventions used to describe each keyword, followed by a listing of the keywords categorized into logical groups. The main body of the chapter contains the keyword descriptions arranged in alphabetical order.

What's in this Chapter

This chapter contains the following topics.

Topic See Page Section 1 Format Conventions 7-2

Keyword Formatting Standard 7-2

Text and Symbols Used in the Format Heading 7-4

Format Terms in Bold Italics 7-6

Section 2 Logical Keyword Groups 7-7

Logical Keyword Groups Listing 7-7

Section 3 Keywords A through C 7-12

Section 4 Keywords D through G 7-75

Section 5 Keywords H through N 7-147

Section 6 Keywords O through R 7-231

Section 7 Keywords S through Z 7-305


Section 1 Format Conventions

Keyword Formatting Standard

Identical Format for All Keywords

The keywords are listed in alphabetical order beginning on page 7-13. Each keyword starts at the top of a new page and its classification by type is indicated in the right-hand side of the keyword heading. The classification types are: constant, function, operator, statement and system variable. The information is presented in identical format for each keyword under the headings described below. Note: If a particular heading does not apply to the keyword being discussed, it will be omitted.

Format Shows the correct way to enter the keyword instruction. The correct order

must be followed when entering the keyword into the system to avoid programming problems. Additional information regarding text style and symbols appearing under this heading are described on page 7-4.

Purpose Describes the exact action the keyword carries out.

Remarks Provides an additional explanation of the format, purpose, and the result of

the keyword statement, including any limitations or cautions.

Example Gives an example/s of how the keyword could be used in a program. The

example always indicates whether it would form part of a Command Line or a Program File. The keywords used in the examples are shown in bold letters to identify where they occur.

Related Keywords

Keywords that are often used with the keyword being described or that are closely related to it.


Keyword Formatting Standard, continued

Alias An equivalent word or symbol for the keyword such as an abbreviation.

Products Supported

The Andover Controls products (controllers and/or CyberStation) that the keyword can be used on.

Modes Available

Lists whether the keyword can be used in the command line mode, the program file mode, or both. Programs cover InfinityPrograms, InfinityFunctions, Functions and Programs. Program Only run at the workstation Function Can only be called at the workstation InfinityProgram For Controllers InfinityFunction For Controllers


Text and Symbols Used in the Format Heading

Format Heading Information

The information contained after the keyword Format heading shows how and what you must enter to correctly use the indicated keyword. Depending on the keyword, the Format may present certain words that you must type exactly as they are shown, and indicate words that you must replace with an appropriate name or number. The details on how to interpret the Format information are presented in the following paragraphs.

Capital Letters Any words shown in CAPITAL LETTERS indicate words that must form

part of the keyword instruction. They can be typed with upper or lower case letters. For example:

Format ACOS (number)

indicates that ACOS must be entered (typed) as "ACOS" or "acos".

Bold Italics Any terms shown in bold italics stand for elements that you must replace

with a name, number, or other item. For example:


indicates that number must be replaced with the appropriate number to satisfy the use of the keyword ACOS (arccosine) in the given program. The terms that appear in bold italics and the items that replace them are described on page 7-6.

Parentheses ( ) When parentheses are shown as part of the Format, they must be typed as

part of the keyword statement. For example:


might require the arccosine of the number ". 7071", so the keyword statement would be entered as ACOS (.7071).


Text and Symbols Used in the Format Heading, continued

Italics Regular italics indicate elements that are not a mandatory part of the

keyword statement. They can be replaced with a particular word or they may be left out of the statement. For example:

Format STRING string_length LocalVariable

which defines a local string variable. You can optionally specify the length of the string in characters.

Comma (,) and Colon (:)

When a comma or colon is shown as part of the Format, it must be typed as part of the keyword statement. For example:

Format SEARCH (string, search_string)

Indicates that the words substituted for string and search_string in the keyword statement must be separated by a comma (,).

Period (.) The period is used as a character in names and is not interpreted as

punctuation. Never put a period at the end of a keyword statement or command line.


Format Terms in Bold Italics

Replacement of Terms

When the following terms appear in bold italics after the keyword in the Format heading, they must be replaced according to the following rules.

Number Replace number with:

• Any number. • Any name that stands for a number. • Any other expression that gives a number, a formula or a function.

The number may have decimal places after it. In some cases number can be a comparison such as TOD > 1500. Such a comparison gives a TRUE or FALSE result, which the controller interprets as a number.

Integer Replace integer or integer_expression with any non-decimal positive or

negative number, including zero

String Replace string with any text (word or words) or any name that stands for a

text. You can also replace it with any expression that gives a string of text, including a formula or function.

Name Replace name with:

• Any point (including input, output, numeric, string, and datetime types. • A variable name. • An object name (program, controller, commport, etc.).

Note: name cannot be a keyword.

List Replace list with a list of either:

• Numbers • Integers • Strings • Names

Separate the items in the list with commas. You can also use AND or OR between the last two items in the list. Often, where a list is called for, you can give a single item or a list of items.


Section 2 Keyword Groups

Logical Keyword Groups

Logical Keyword Groups Listing

This section presents the Andover Controls Plain English keywords in their associated logical groups. Details on each keyword are in the alphabetically ordered keyword descriptions that follow this section.

Table 7-1. Logical Grouping of PE Keywords Group Keyword Type

Access Control ACCESSLOG ACCESSSERVER AVAILRECORDS CABINETTAMPER EVENTLOGSIZE READERPOWER SYSTEMSTATUS UNIQUEPIN

System variable System variable System variable System variable System variable System variable System variable System variable

Alarm Counting ACTIVEALARMS UNACKEDALARMS

System variable System variable

BACnet READPROPERTY RELINQUISH WRITEPROPERTY

Function Function Function

Building Control MOVE TURN

Statement Statement

Control of Inputs and Outputs IOUCOMMFLT# STATUS#

System variable System variable (programmable)

Control Over Communications INITMODEM DIAL CLOSE HANGUP OPEN READ

Function Function Function Function Function Function (comm port)

Creating/Manipulating Files CLOSEFILE FILE OPENFILE POSITIONFILE READFILE WRITEFILE EOF

Function Statement Function Function Function Function Constant


Logical Keyword Groups, continued

Logical Keyword Groups Listing, continued

Table 7-1. Logical Grouping of PE Keywords, continued Group Keyword Type

Date and Time DATE DATETIME DAYOF MONTH DAYOFYEAR DIFFTIME HOD HOUR MINUTE MONTH POWERFAIL POWERUPTIME SECOND STRTODATE TIMEPIECE TOD TS, TM, TH, TD WEEKDAY YEAR

System variable Statement System variable System variable Function System variable System variable System variable System variable System variable System variable System variable Function Function System variable Attributes System variable System variable

Debugging DISABLE ENABLE P Print

Statement Statement Statement Statement

Display ASK CLOSEWINDOW PRINT MESSAGEWINDOW SHOW SHOWREPORT STATUSLINE

Function Function Statement System variable Statement Statement System variable

Flow Control BASEDON..GOTO BREAK CONTINUE FOR..NEXT GOTO IF..THEN..ELSE LINE

Statement Statement Statement Statement Statement Statement Statement



Logical Keyword Groups Listing, continued


Flow Control continued REPEAT..UNTIL RETURN ROTATE RUN STOP SELECT…CASE WHILE

Statement Statement Statement Statement Statement Statement Statement

Input/Output LOGOUT P PRINT

Statement Statement Statement

Logical AND BITAND BITNOT BITOR BITXOR IS IS BETWEEN IS GREATER… IS LESS… NOT OR

Operator Operator Operator Operator Operator Operator Operator Operator Operator Operator Operator

Mathematical ABS ACOS ASIN ATAN ATAN2 AVERAGE CEILING COS DIVIDED BY EXPONENTIAL FACTORIAL FLOOR LN LOG MAXIMUM MAXITEM MINIMUM MINITEM MINUS

Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Operator




Mathematical, continued

MOD PLUS RANDOM ROUND SIN SQRT STANDARDDEVIATION SUM TIMES TAN TRUNCATE

Operator Operator Function Function Function Function Operator Function Function Function Function

Miscellaneous ARG CD THE

Statement Statement Article

Operating System Access SHELL Statement

Retrieving Lists of Objects CLOSELIST GETEXTLOG GETOBJECT OBJECT OPENLIST

Function Function Function Statement Function

String Manipulation ASC CHR LEFT LENGTH MID NUMTOSTR RIGHT SEARCH STRINGFILL STRTODATE STRTONUM TAB

Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Function

System Defined Constants FAILURE OFF ON -ON PASSED SUCCESS

Constant Constant Constant Constant Constant Constant

Using Names in Programs GETNAME Function

Value Assignment SET MOVE TURN ON TURN OFF

Statement Statement Statement Statement



Restricted Keywords

The use of this group of keywords is usually limited to system administrators and other users with appropriate configuration level clearance

Table 7-2. Restricted Keywords Group Keyword Type

Administration CURUSER CURWORKSTATION DELETEEXTLOG ERRORS FREEMEM LOAD SAVE SCAN VERSION

Function Function Function Function System variable System variable Statement Statement System variable

250 Display Unit Keywords

This group of keywords only applies to the 250-display unit.

Table 7-3. Keywords for the 250 Display Unit Group Keyword Type

Display Unit Basics AUDIOBELL BACKLIGHT BEGINPOLYLINE CLEARSCREEN CONTROL DRAWELIPSE DRAWLINE DRAWRECTANGLE ENDPOLYLINE LINEPOINT LOCATE SETDISPLAY TOUCHEDCELL BLUE FILL NOFILL WHITE

System variable System variable Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Function System variable Constant Constant Constant Constant


Section 3 Keywords A through C

ABS Function

Format ABS (number)

Purpose Returns the absolute value of number. The absolute value of any number,

positive or negative, is always the positive number.

Remarks The number is any number or expression.

Example 1 You find the absolute value of -3 as follows:

Program File RESULT = ABS (-3)

This statement sets RESULT to 3.

Example 2 To maintain a setpoint temperature to within plus or minus 3 degrees, when

the temperature changes in either direction, the fan should blow in either the heating or cooling mode as required.

In this situation, you should find the absolute value of the change to control the fan, since it doesn't matter whether the change is positive or negative:

Program File If ABS(TEMP.SP - TEMP.2) > = 3 THEN RUN FAN.2

Products Supported

ACX series, BACnet series, CMX series, CX series, DCX 250, i2 series, LCX series, SCX series, TCX series controllers, and CyberStation

Modes Available

Command lines and programs.


AccessLog System variable

Format AccessLog

Purpose Indicates the amount of the access log that has been filled, from 0 to 1. It can

be interpreted as a percentage of the access log, and displays as .01 for 1 percent, .02 for 2 percent, .03 for 3 percent, etc. The value of the log includes up to six digits after the decimal point.

Remarks This system variable and the event log it refers to exist only on the

controller. Since the event log contains all access events that have occurred on the controller, the keyword applies only if you are using the controller for access control. Types of access events logged include the following:

• Valid Access • Invalid Attempt

• Door Fault • Door Violation • Door Ajar • Request to Exit • Cabinet Tamper • Door Channel Override • Refresh Database • Access Mode

Example 1 If any access events have been stored in the event log of a controller, the

controller's AccessLog system variable value is greater than zero. You can see if the log has any events in it by using the system variable in an IF..THEN statement:

Program File If AccessLog > 0 then GOTO CallingOut

. . .


AccessLog, continued

Example 2 To determine how full the event log is in a CX or CMX series controller, you

can print the AccessLog system variable in a program or from the command line window, as follows:

Command Line PR AccessLog

The response appears in the command line window as follows for a 29% full access log:

AccessLog = .29

Related Keywords

EventLogSize

Products Supported

ACX series, BACnet series, CMX series, CX series, and i2 series controllers.

Modes Available



AccessServer System variable

Format AccessServer

Purpose Generally, a controller System Variable used to designate the mode in which

Continuum validates personnel objects (cardholders). Specifically, refers to the Network ID to which a controller sends validation requests.

Remarks • Applies to ACX 700/780 series Infinet controllers as well as CX99xx

series NetControllers (with AC-1 series IOU modules).

• Setting the AccessServer System Variable to 0 (zero) in an ACX controller allows local validation only (personnel objects with area links must exist in the controller's memory).

• Setting the AccessServer System Variable to its own Network ID in the NetController allows local validation only (personnel objects with area links must exist in the controller's memory).

• Setting the AccessServer System Variable to the Network ID of a Continuum CyberStation (191or above) in the ACX 700/780 or NetControllers allows local and remote validation (personnel objects with area links can exist in the controller's memory or in the Continuum database).

• Users may set AccessServer from the object editor or from the Command Line interface.

AccessServer is not a global System Variable⎯settings will affect only the owner's validation modes.

Example 1 Suppose you want a CX controller with an ID of 126 to store the areas and

personnel for access control. To set the AccessServer system variable, you connect to the ACX controller and type the following Command:

Command line Set AccessServer = 126

You can then proceed to set up the areas and personnel for your access control system.


AccessServer, continued

Example 2 Suppose you want the database to store the areas and personnel for access

control. If you have two workstations with IDs 225 and 226, you can set the AccessServer system variable to either of those IDs. This remains true no matter how many workstations you have on the network. Go to the Command Line and type the following:

Set AccessServer = 225

or

Set AccessServer = 226

Note The value of AccessServer is stored in the controller’s EEPROM memory.

Changing the value of AccessServer does not require a controller reset.

Products Supported

ACX series and CX series controllers.

Modes Available

Command lines.


ACOS Function


Purpose Returns the arccosine of the given number.

Remarks The number is any number or expression that gives a result between -1 and 1

inclusive. The value returned is between 0 and pi (3.14159) radians. Radians = degrees TIMES (3.14159/180). Degrees = radians TIMES (180/3.14159).

Example Program File

AN.VALUE = ACOS(.7071)

Related Keywords

SIN, COS, TAN, ATAN, ATAN 2, ASIN

Alias ARCCOSINE

Products Supported

BACnet series, CMX series, CX series, DCX 250, i2 series controllers (except i2885, i2887, i3885, i3887), and CyberStation.

Modes Available



Alarms System variable

Format ALARMS

Purpose Gives the number of alarms pending. ALARMS increments (increases by

one) each time a new alarm occurs and decrements (decreases by one) each time an alarm returns to normal.

Remarks You cannot change the setting of ALARMS. The controller automatically

updates it.

Example Since ALARMS automatically decrements when the alarm returns to normal,

its value should never get very large. In the program below, you set a limit to how many alarms should be pending (in this case 10) and print a report on all alarms:

Program File IF ALARMS > 10 THEN GOTO REPORT.ALARM

LINE REPORT.ALARM

. . .

Products Supported

ACX series, BACnet series, CMC series, CX series, DCX 250, i2 series, LCX series, SCX series, TCX series controllers, and CyberStation.

Modes Available



AND Operator

Format Format 1: number AND number

Format 2: namelist AND final_name

Purpose Format 1: Provides the logical AND between two expressions.

Format 2: When used in a list of names between the last two items, indicates the end of the series.


The namelist is one or more names with commas between them.

The final_name is a single name at the end of a series of names. AND before the last name is optional.

The controller carries out all other operations (such as adding and subtracting) before it acts on AND or (OR). Table 6-1 compares the order that the controller acts on all operators. Because AND and OR are acted on last, you can form logical statements without using too many parentheses. See Example 3 for how to use AND and OR together. The ampersand (&) is the alias for the logical AND only.

Example 1 Instead of forming separate IF..THEN statements to turn the heat on when

more than one condition exists, you can make one statement using AND:

Program File IF TEMP < 70 AND TOD > 7:00am THEN TURN ON THE HEAT

Or

IF TEMP < 70 & TOD > 7:00am THEN TURN ON THE HEAT


AND, continued

Example 2 To run a series of programs, instead of using RUN several times, you can list

the program names on the same command line, using AND (final comma optional) to indicate the last item in the list:

Program File RUN THE COOLING, HEATING AND FAN

Or using the final comma:

RUN THE COOLING, HEATING, AND FAN

You may not use the ampersand (&) for AND in a series. You may, however, leave out AND as follows:

RUN THE COOLING, HEATING, FAN

Example 3 If OR occurs before AND, the controller interprets OR first because it works

from left to right on AND and OR. For instance, take this statement:

Program File IF WKD = SAT OR WKD = SUN AND TOD > 9:00am THEN...

The above statement is interpreted so that the items in parentheses below are calculated first:

IF (WKD = SAT OR WKD = SUN) AND TOD > 9:00am THEN...

If AND occurs before OR, the controller interprets AND first:

Program File IF TOD > 9:00am AND WKD = SAT OR WKD = SUN THEN...

is interpreted so that the items in parentheses below are calculated first:

IF (TOD > 9:00am AND WKD = SAT) OR WKD = SUN THEN...

Note to Programmer: Use parentheses to enforce the order of interpretations to resolve any ambiguities.


AND, continued

Example 4 AND is also used with the operator BETWEEN, as in the following

example:

Program File IF TOD IS BETWEEN 8:00am AND 6:00pm THEN...

You may not use the ampersand (&) for AND when it is used with BETWEEN.

Related Keywords

IF..THEN..ELSE IS... OR

Products Supported

ACX series, BACnet series, CMX series, CX series, DCX 250, i2 series, LCX series, SCX series, TCX series controllers, and CyberStation.

Modes Available



ARG System variable

Format Format 1: ARG integer_constant name

Format 2: ARG [ integer_expression ]

Purpose Format 1: Renames one of the 15 system defined argument variables

(ARG[1] to ARG[15]) with a name you choose. Can only be used to name an argument in a function. The ARG variables are arguments or parameters that are passed to a function. After you assign an easy-to-remember name to an argument variable, you can then refer to it by its name so your function is easier to understand. Format 2: Calls the argument variable by its number.

Remarks integer_constant is any integer between 1 and 15.

name is any name you choose for the argument; up to 16 alphanumeric characters, including underscore and period, but must begin with a letter. May not be a keyword. integer_expression is any integer or expression that gives an integer. Up to 15 arguments can be passed.

Example 1 In this example, ARG[5] returns the status of a report. To make that easier

to understand, ARG[5] is redefined as RPTSTATUS. The function refers to RPTSTATUS for the variable value from then on.

Function File ARG 5 RPTSTATUS


ARG, continued

Example 2 To test the report status to see if it equals SUCCESS, you can call on the

argument variable using its easy-to-remember name (from Example 1):

Function File IF RPTSTATUS IS SUCCESS THEN…

Example 3 To test the report status to see if it equals SUCCESS, you can also call on the

argument variable using ARG[5]:

Function File IF ARG[5] IS SUCCESS THEN…

Related Keywords

PASSED

Alias PARAM

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs (only in functions).


ASC Function

Format ASC (string)

Purpose Returns the ASCII value of the first character of the string.

Remarks The string is any text (word or words) or text expression.

Example In this example, the function uses a string constant ("S") as its argument:

Program File ASC ("S")

This statement returns 83, which is the ASCII value of the character S.

Related Keywords

CHR

Products Supported


Modes Available



ASIN Function

Format ASIN (number)

Purpose Returns the arcsine of the number.

Remarks The number is any number between -1 and 1 inclusive or expression that

gives a result in that range. ASIN returns the arcsine of number as an angle between -3.14159/2 and 3.14159/2. Radians = degrees TIMES (3.14159/180). Degrees = radians TIMES (180/3.14159).


RESULT = ASIN (1)

Related Keywords

SIN, ACOS, COS, TAN, ATAN, ATAN 2

Alias ARCSINE

Products Supported


Modes Available



ASK Function

Format ASK (title, question, answer_var_or_point)

Purpose This function is available only on a workstation. You can use ASK in

multiple programs, however, only one ASK window displays at a time.

Element Replace with title A string containing the title of the window. The string may

be a string point, a local STRING variable, or a series of characters in quotation marks. It may also be any string expression.

question A string containing the question you want to present. The string may be a string point, a local STRING variable, or a series of characters in quotation marks. It may also be any string expression.

answer_var_or_point Point or local variable to receive an answer to the question. May be numeric, string, or datetime.

When the window displays, the current value of answer_var_or_point displays in the answer text box. If the answer_var_or_point has never been set before, the answer text box appears blank. You can choose to change that value and then press OK. When you change the value and press OK, the answer_var_or_point becomes equal to the value you type in the text box You must use ASK on a labeled line by itself. The program automatically proceeds to the next labeled line after running the ASK statement. The line that follows the ASK statement should check for the result of ASK. ASK returns SUCCESS after the window displays successfully, the person using it responds and presses OK, and the software receives the answer. ASK returns FAILURE if another window generated by ASK is already displaying, since only one such window can display at a time. ASK returns FormCancel if the window displays, but the person responding to it presses CANCEL. Note: When ASK is used, the program waits for user input. It is not possible to enter the required data and submit the result programmatically. This is strictly a manual operation.


ASK, continued

Example 1 Suppose you want to ask the operator to enter a setpoint. You would begin

by creating a variable to receive the setpoint. Then you would use ASK to draw a window on the workstation screen as follows:

Program File Numeric AnySetpt

Ask "Setpoint Information", "Enter the new setpoint", AnySetpt

The displayed window would appear as shown on Figure 7-1.

Figure 7-1. Window created with the ASK keyword Because this program is not asking for a particular type of setpoint, you would be able to run this program in a variety of situations.


Example 2 When you use ASK, you may want to check to see if it returns SUCCESS, FAILURE, or FormCancel. If ASK returns FAILURE, you can continue to try to set up the window until ASK returns SUCCESS, as shown in the following fall thru program: Program File NUMERIC RESULT STRING ANYPOINT, TITLESTRING PRESENTING: RESULT = ASK ("POINT NAME", "ENTER THE POINT NAME", ~ ANYPOINT) TESTING: IF RESULT = FAILURE THEN GOTO PRESENTING IF RESULT = SUCCESS THEN GOTO WORKING IF RESULT = FORMCANCEL THEN STOP

Products Supported

CyberStation

Modes Available

Program only


ATAN Function

Format ATAN (number)

Purpose Returns the arctangent of number.


Returns an angle value between -3.14159/2 and 3.14159/2. Radians = degrees TIMES (3.14159/180). Degrees = radians TIMES (180/3.14159).


VAL.ARC = ATAN (0)

Related Keywords

ASIN, SIN, ACOS, COS, TAN, ATAN 2

Alias ARCTANGENT

Products Supported


Modes Available



ATAN2 Function

Format ATAN2 (sin, cos)

Purpose Returns an angle with a sine of sin and a cosine of cos.

Remarks Replace sin with a number that is the sine of an angle.

Replace cos with a number that is the cosine of an angle. The angle returned is between -3.14159 and 3.14159 radians. Radians = degrees TIMES (3.14159/180). Degrees = radians TIMES (180/3.14159).


ANG.DAMPER = ATAN2 (0.0, 1.0)

Related Keywords

ASIN, SIN, ACOS, COS, TAN, ATAN

Alias ARCTANGENT2

Products Supported


Modes Available



AUDIOBELL System variable

Format AUDIOBELL

Purpose Makes the DCX 250-Display Unit beep for the number of seconds you set it

to.

Remarks You can use "TURN OFF AUDIOBELL" to stop the beep.

Example 1 Inside a program or from the command line, you set AUDIOBELL as

follows to make the controller beep for 15 seconds:

Program File AUDIOBELL = 15

Example 2 Inside a program or from the command line, you can stop the beeping at any

time as follows:

Program File TURN OFF AUDIOBELL

Products Supported

DCX 250 Display Unit.

Modes Available



AvailRecords System variable

Format AvailRecords

Purpose Continuum controller System Variable used to express a close

approximation of remaining "slots" left to store personnel records in the controller's memory.

Remarks • Applies to all ACX, CX, and CMX series controllers.

• Not user settable⎯you cannot set AvailRecords.

• Approximation only⎯calculation based on average memory space taken by a personnel object and its corresponding arealinks.

• You are able to view the value from the object editor or print it from the Command Line interface.

Example 1 To find out approximately how many remaining personnel slots are available

on an ACX series controller's memory, you would enter the following at the command line:

Command Line PR MyNet\MyCX9410\MyACX701\AvailRecords

The control system software then prints the number of personnel records in the following format:

AvailRecords = 3630

The returned AvailRecords value indicates that the ACX 701 controller can store approximately 3630 more personnel records.

Products Supported

ACX series, CMX series, CX series controllers.

Modes Available

Command lines.


AVERAGE Function

Format Format 1: AVERAGE (numeric_list)

Format 2: AVERAGE ( numeric_array) Format 3: AVERAGE ( numeric_log)

Purpose Format 1: Returns the average of the listed items.

Format 2: Returns the average of the items in the array you name. Format 3: Returns the average of the items in the log you name.

Remarks Replace numeric_ list with one or more numbers or names that stand for

numbers, separated by commas. Replace numeric_array with any defined array that contains numbers. Replace numeric_log with any defined log that contains numbers. Items in the list must all be either numbers or variables that contains numbers. Element numbers are not required. Omitting element numbers averages the entire array or log.

Example 1 To average several temperatures, you place them directly in the AVERAGE

function statement. You list them in parentheses after AVERAGE, as follows:

Program File FLR8.AVG = AVERAGE (TMP801, TMP802, TMP803, TMP804)


AVERAGE, continued

Example 2 Since you know a certain temperature varies, you have been storing readings

in an array called OAT. You then use the average function on that array, as follows:

Program File OAT.AVG = AVERAGE (OAT)

Example 3 You have been logging temperatures in a log for several hours. To find their

average, you find the average of that log, as follows:

Program File HOURLYAVG = AVERAGE (TEMPLOG)

Alias AVG

Products Supported


Modes Available



BACKLIGHT System variable

Format BACKLIGHT

Purpose Turns on the background light of the DCX 250-Display Unit for the number

of seconds you set it to. Once it has been set to a number, it will automatically decrement its value by one each second.

Remarks You can use "TURN OFF BACKLIGHT" to turn off the light

Example 1 Inside a program or from the command line, you set BACKLIGHT as

follows to turn on the DCX 250 Display Unit background light for 20 seconds:

Program File BACKLIGHT = 20

Example 2 Inside a program or from the command line, you can turn on the DCX 250

Display Unit background light for 5 minutes when an operator touches anywhere on the screen, as follows:

Program File IF TOUCHEDCELL THEN SET BACKLIGHT = 300

Example 3 Inside a program, you can turn off the DCX 250 Display Unit background

light as follows:

Program File TURN BACKLIGHT OFF

Products Supported


Modes Available



BASEDON..GOTO Statement

Format 1 BASEDON number GOTO linelist

or BASEDON number GO TO linelist or BASEDON number GO linelist

Format 2 BASEDON number GOTO LINE linelist

or BASEDON number GO TO LINE linelist

Purpose Branches to a different line for each value the number can have. You put the

line names in the linelist.

Remarks Replace number with any number or expression. If less than 1 or greater

than the number of lines in the linelist, the system ignores the BASEDON..GOTO statement and executes the statement immediately after BASEDON..GOTO. Replace linelist with one or more defined line labels (see LINE statement) present in the current program. The label must be spelled here just as it is defined, except you may interchange upper- and lowercase. The line label may also be an integer.

Example You may have a series of steps (a line) that you want to run every Friday to

shut down equipment not required over the weekend. And every Monday you may want to restart that equipment. To run different lines on particular days, you write a program that activates certain lines based on what day it is. The lines are labeled with LINE (see LINE), telling the line the routine starts on.


BASEDON..GOTO, continued

Example continued

Remember that SUN is considered the first day of the week, so in the program below, the first line listed after GOTO runs on Sunday, the next on Monday, the next on Tuesday, and so on:

Program File BASEDON WKD GOTO SUN.1, MON.1, TUE.1, WED.1, THU.1, FRI.1 … LINE SUN.1 … LINE MON.1 … LINE TUE.1 … LINE WED.1 … LINE THU.1 … LINE FRI.1

BASEDON.. GOTO works well with logs and arrays. Note: The following variations to the BASEDON statement (above) are acceptable.

You can also include the word LINE in front of the line list:

BASEDON WKD GOTO LINE SUN.1, MON.1, TUE.1, WED.1, THU.1, FRI.1

You can replace GOTO with the word GO:

BASEDON WKD GO SUN.1, MON.1, TUE.1, WED.1, THU.1, FRI.1

You can separate the word GO from the word TO:

BASEDON WKD GO TO SUN.1, MON.1, TUE.1, WED.1, THU.1, FRI.1

You can include the word LINE after GO and TO:

BASEDON WKD GO TO LINE SUN.1, MON.1, TUE.1, WED.1, THU.1, FRI.1


BASEDON..GOTO, continued

Related Keywords

GOTO LINE

Products Supported

ACX series, BACnet series, CMX series, CX series, DCX 250, i2 series, LCX series SCX series, TCX series controllers, and CyberStation.

Modes Available

Programs


BEGINPOLYLINE Function

Format BEGINPOLYLINE ( )

Purpose Indicates that you want to begin drawing either multiple graphic lines

(polylines) or a polygon on the DCX 250-Display Unit. Returns SUCCESS or FAILURE. Parentheses are not required if you put BEGINPOLYLINE at the beginning of a statement.

Remarks Before you use BEGINPOLYLINE, you set the display to NOFILL to form

lines, to FILL to form a polygon. You then give a series of line points (see LINEPOINT) you want connected. Finally, you indicate the series of line points is over by closing the instruction with ENDPOLYLINE. You cannot begin a new polyline with BEGINPOLYLINE between LINEPOINT statements. You may only draw one polyline at a time.

Example 1 You create a line connecting a series of line points on the DCX 250 Display

Unit by entering the following:

Program File SETDISPLAY (NOFILL)

BEGINPOLYLINE

LINEPOINT (10, 10)

LINEPOINT (10, 100)

LINEPOINT (100, 50)

LINEPOINT (40, 10)

ENDPOLYLINE

Notice that the parentheses are not required because BEGINPOLYLINE begins the statement.


BEGINPOLYLINE, continued

Example 1 continued

As shown on Figure 7-2, the DCX 250-Display Unit forms a line (rather than a polygon) because you set the display to NOFILL.

Figure 7-2. Drawing connected line points using BEGINPOLYLINE on the DCX 250 Display Unit

Example 2 You create a polygon connecting a series of line points on the DCX 250

Display Unit by entering the following (again, no parentheses are required):

Program File SETDISPLAY (FILL)

BEGINPOLYLINE

LINEPOINT (10, 10)

LINEPOINT (10, 100)

LINEPOINT (100, 50)

LINEPOINT (10, 10)

ENDPOLYLINE


BEGINPOLYLINE, continued

Example 2 continued

The DCX 250-Display Unit forms a polygon (rather than a line) because you set the display to FILL as shown on Figure 7-3.

Figure 7-3. Drawing a polygon using BEGINPOLYLINE on the DCX 250 Display Unit

Related Keywords

SETDISPLAY LINEPOINT ENDPOLYLINE

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs


BITAND Operator

Format integer BITAND integer

Purpose Logically compares the binary equivalents of the two integers, digit by digit.

Creates a new binary number that contains a 1 for each digit's position where the first number's bit and the second number's bit are both 1. Sets all other digits to zero. Converts the new binary number to its decimal equivalent. For carrying out comparisons of checksums and similar operations

Remarks The integer is any number from 0 to 65535. If you give a number with a

decimal point in it, BITAND uses only the integer from it and drops the fraction.

Example Suppose you want to compare TOTAL1 and TOTAL2:

• TOTAL1 = 13 (binary equivalent is 0000000000001101)


You would compare them with BITAND as follows:

Program File SET RESULT = TOTAL1 BITAND TOTAL2

The comparison would give 0000000000001001. RESULT would be set to 9.

Related Keywords

BITOR BITXOR BITNOT

Products Supported

BACnet series, CMX series, CX series controllers and CyberStation.

Modes Available



BITNOT Operator

Format BITNOT integer

Purpose Switches 1s to 0s and 0s to 1s in the binary equivalent of the integer, digit by

digit. (This is called the "one's complement" of the binary number.) Creates a new binary number and then converts it back to its decimal equivalent. For carrying out bitmasking and similar operations.


decimal point in it, BITNOT uses only the integer from it and drops the fraction.

Example Suppose you want to find the one's complement of AMOUNT.

AMOUNT = 13 (binary equivalent is 0000000000001101) You could reverse the number with BITNOT as follows:

Program File SET RESULT = BITNOT AMOUNT

The BITNOT of the amount would be 1111111111110010. The statement would set RESULT to 65522.

Related Keywords

BITAND BITOR BITXOR

Products Supported


Modes Available



BITOR Operator

Format integer BITOR integer


Creates a new binary number that contains a 1 for each digit position where either the first number's bit or the second number's bit is 1 and where both the first and second number's bits are 1. Sets all other digits to zero. Converts the new binary number to its decimal equivalent.

For carrying out comparisons of checksums and similar operations


decimal point in it, BITOR uses only the integer from it and drops the fraction.




You would compare them with BITOR as follows:

Program File SET RESULT = TOTAL1 BITOR TOTAL2


Related Keywords

BITAND BITXOR BITNOT

Products Supported


Modes Available



BITXOR Operator

Format integer BITXOR integer


Creates a new binary number that contains a 1 for each digit position where either the first number's bit or the second number's bit is 1, but gives zeros where both are 1 or both are 0. Converts the new binary number to its decimal equivalent.

For carrying out comparisons of checksums and similar operations.


decimal point in it, BITXOR uses only the integer from it and drops the fraction.




You would compare them with BITXOR as follows:

Program File SET RESULT = TOTAL1 BITXOR TOTAL2


Related Keywords

BITAND BITOR BITNOT

Products Supported


Modes Available



BLUE Constant

Format BLUE

Purpose Sets the graphics on the DCX 250-display unit screen to blue when you use

it with SETDISPLAY.

Remarks The graphics on the 250 screen may be blue or white.

Example You set color of the graphics on the 250 screen as follows:

Program File SETDISPLAY (BLUE)

Related Keywords

SETDISPLAY WHITE

Products Supported

DCX 250-display unit.

Modes Available

Programs


BREAK Statement

Format BREAK

Purpose Halts the smallest enclosing FOR..NEXT, REPEAT..UNTIL ,WHILE and

SELECT..CASE statements.

Remarks After BREAK executes, the next statement the system carries out is the one

immediately following the end of the loop.

Example To check several stored temperatures to see if any is reading over 75

degrees, you use a FOR..NEXT loop (see FOR..NEXT statement, later in this chapter). Normally, the loop below would end after it checks the 20 temperatures. To exit the loop as soon as you find one over 75 degrees, you use the BREAK statement:

Program File LINE TEMPCK

'This line loops until it finds a temperature over 75 degrees.

FOR NUM = 1 TO 20

IF TEMP[NUM] > 75 THEN BREAK

NEXT NUM

GOTO HIGHTEMP

LINE HIGHTEMP

Related Keywords

CONTINUE

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs


CabinetTamper System variable

Format CabinetTamper

Purpose Indicates whether or not the ACX controller has been tampered with. A

binary value controller System Variable linked to a controller's cabinet door.

Remarks Applies only to ACX controllers.

If it is TRUE, the cabinet door has been opened; if FALSE, the cabinet door is closed.

You cannot set CabinetTamper. You can print it from the Command Line interface or read its value from the object editor.

You must connect to the ACX controller before you can print CabinetTamper from the command line. Or you can access CabinetTamper using the full path.

Example If an alarm indicates the ACX controller cabinet has been tampered with,

you can print the cabinet door status as follows:

Program File PR CabinetTamper

The control system responds as follows: True

If you want to take a particular action whenever the ACX controller cabinet has been tampered with, you can write the following in a program:

If CabinetTamper Then GoTo EmergencyAction

Or

If CabinetTamper is True Then GoTo EmergencyAction

Products Supported

ACX controller.

Modes Available



CD Statement

Format Format 1: CD controller_name

Format 2: CD Format 3: CD \ path_name

Purpose Format 1: Connects to a CX or Infinet controller on the local area network.

Does not connect to a controller at another network (see Format 3). Format 2: Reconnects you to the CyberStation you actually logged on to. Format 3: Connects you to another network or, if you give only the backslash, to the root. (Applies on workstations only.) You can also connect to a controller or Infinet controller at another network by giving the full path with this format. Also connects you to any folder in the system.

Remarks Controller_name is the name of a CX controller or path name to an Infinet

controller. The "path" names first the CX controller, then the Infinet controller. path_name is the path to a site or to the root (backslash alone) on an CyberStation workstation only. The backslash must always precede the path to a site. Can also be a path to a controller or workstation at the same or another site. After you open the connection, it remains open until you use CD again to connect to another site, or until the connection is open and inactive for longer than the SafetyInterval attribute of the site allows (see Appendix B for a listing of Site attributes).


CD, continued

Example of Format 1

From a terminal on any CX controller, you can connect to the FLOOR1 CX controller as follows:

Command Line CD FLOOR1

From a terminal on any CX controller, you can connect to the ROOM4 Infinet controller on the FLOOR1 CX controller as follows:

CD FLOOR1 ROOM4

Or, if you are already connected to the FLOOR1 CX controller, enter the following:

CD ROOM4

Example of Format 2

After connecting to another controller for a while, you can connect to the one you logged on to by entering CD without a name after it:

Command Line CD

To connect to the root from the command line, you enter CD followed by the backslash alone:

CD \

Example of Format 3

To connect to another network from the command line, you enter CD followed by the name of the network.

Command Line CD \Building6

To connect to a controller at another site from the command line, you enter CD followed by the name of the site and the controller.

CD \Building6 Floor1


CD, continued

Example of Format 3 continued

To connect to an Infinet controller at another site from the command line, you enter CD followed by the name of the site, controller, and Infinet controller, in that order. (Remember that the backslash must always precede the site name):

CD \Building6 Floor1 Room4

Example of Format 4

To connect to a controller (on Ethernet or Infinet) that you have highlighted in the Object Tree, you enter CD followed by a period:

Command Line CD .

Products Supported


Modes Available

Command lines


CEILING Function

Format CEILING (number)

Purpose Rounds number to the nearest larger integer on the number line and

returns that integer.


See the keyword "ROUND" for a comparison of all rounding functions.

Example 1 Program File

TOP = CEILING (-2.7)

This statement returns -2. (See figure 7-4.)

Figure 7-4. Number line-showing CEILING (-2.7)


RNDVAL = CEILING (4.3)

This statement returns a 5.

Related Keywords

FLOOR TRUNCATE ROUND

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

0 1 2 3-4 -3 -2 -1 4

��

��

��

��

��

Position of –2.7 CEILING of –2.7 is nearest higher integer


Ceiling, continued

Products Supported

BACnet series (except b3885, b3887), CMX series, CX series, DCX 250, i2 series controllers (except i2885, i2887), and CyberStation.

Modes Available



CHR Function

Format CHR (number)

Purpose Returns one character whose ASCII code is number.


Can be used to send nonprinting characters to a terminal, computer, or printer to initiate action.

Example 1 After several pages of messages print, you then want to send a report to that

printer. You make sure the report starts on a clean sheet of paper by sending an instruction to the printer telling it to bring the paper to the top of a new page. This action is called a formfeed. The ASCII code to generate a formfeed is 12. You would write it like this:

Program File 'Generate a formfeed and report title

PRINT CHR(12); "Weekly Energy Report"

Example 2 Another way to use the CHR function is to send a bell to a terminal,

computer, or printer to warn that the ERRORS variable has reached a critically high value. The ASCII code to generate a bell sound is 7. You would write it like this:

Program File 'Decides too many errors are not acknowledged and generates a bell

IF ERRORS > 15 THEN PRINT CHR(7)


CHR, continued

Related Keywords

PRINT ASC

Products Supported

BACnet series (except b3885, b3887), CMX series, CX series, DCX 250, i2 series controllers (except i2885, i2887), and CyberStation.

Modes Available

Programs


CLEARSCREEN Function

Format CLEARSCREEN ( )

Purpose Erases everything on the DCX 250-DisplayUnit screen and resets all display

attributes (set with SETDISPLAY) to their original settings. Returns SUCCESS or FAILURE.

Remarks You can use CLEARSCREEN in programs only, not from the command

line. This characteristic prevents users from erasing screen settings. You do not need the parentheses if CLEARSCREEN is at the beginning of a statement

Example You can display a graph on the 250 screen and then clear the screen before

you display a list of choices, as follows:

Program File RUN DISPLAYGRAPH

CLEARSCREEN

RUN DISPLAYCHOICES

Notice that the parentheses are not required here because CLEARSCREEN is at the beginning of a statement.

You may also clear the screen at the beginning of a new 250 program.

Alias CLS

Products Supported

DCX-250 Display Unit.

Modes Available

Programs


CLOSE Function

Format CLOSE (comm_port)

Purpose After you have used OPEN, resumes normal interactions with the comm

port. Normally, input appears on the screen and output goes to the Message window. Returns SUCCESS if the comm port closes without a problem and FAILURE if the comm port does not close. Once CLOSE executes, the controller automatically moves to the next labeled line. You never need GOTO after CLOSE.

Remarks The comm_port is the comm port the modem is on. Or it can be the path to

the comm port. You may use CLOSE as a function only on comm ports. CLOSE must always be the last statement on a labeled line or on a line by itself. The line immediately following the CLOSE line must test for SUCCESS or FAILURE; otherwise, the control system software considers that a CLOSE error. Once you open a comm port with OPEN, after you complete communications on that port, you must close the port with CLOSE.

Example After you open a modem with OPEN, then send a message, you can close the

modem comm port with CLOSE. The following example shows a program that uses close. Note that it is a fallthru program and uses a customized function named CALL and this program is named ModemMessage.

Program File

Numeric Startup, Result

Opening:

Startup = Open (Modem1)

Calling:

If Startup = Success Then Call (Modem1, "999999")

Else Goto Ending

Endif


CLOSE, continued

Example continued

Sending:

Print "Alarm on Floor2" to Modem1

Closing:

Result = CLOSE (Modem1)

Ending:

If result = Success Then

Stop ModemMessage

Else

Print "Could not access Modem1 Port"

Endif

Related Keywords

LINE OPENFILE WRITEFILE OPEN READFILE READ CLOSEFILE

Products Supported

CMX series, CX series controllers and CyberStation.

Modes Available

Programs


CloseFile Function

Format CloseFile (file_variable_name)

Purpose Closes the text file you opened earlier with the OpenFile keyword.

Remarks The file_variable_name must be the local FILE variable name you created

with FILE to correspond to a text file name.

CloseFile returns SUCCESS or FAILURE.

If you have used FILE in the program to define a FILE variable name, you can then open the file with OpenFile and later close it with CloseFile.

Example 1 Once you create a text file with FILE and open it with OpenFile, you must

later close it with CloseFile, as shown in this example.

Program File File ZONEDATA Numeric Chars, OK String Dataline 80

Line Opening Set OK = OpenFile ("c:\text\zone.txt", WRITEONLY, ZONEDATA) If OK = Failure Then Print "File Open Failed" Stop Else

Goto Writing

Endif

Line Writing . . . Line Closing Set OK = CloseFile (ZONEDATA) If OK = Failure Then Print "File Close Failed" Else Stop Endif


CloseFile, continued

Example 1 continued

The control system software knows that the file in the string ("c:\text\zone.txt") is the file that the ZONEDATA FILE variable represents. Remember that CloseFile is a function, so you must set a variable to its result or use it in an IF..THEN statement. In this case, you set the OK numeric variable equal to the results of the CloseFile.

Example 2 If you want to close an array of files you opened earlier, you can use a

FOR..NEXT loop with CloseFile, as in the following example. Notice that the FilesOpen variable gives the actual number of files opened successfully. You would set this variable in the OPENING line and later use it in the CLOSING line to close the correct number of files.

Program File FILE ZONEDATA [3]

NUMERIC OK, FileNum, FilesOpen

LINE Opening

.

.

LINE Closing

FOR FileNum = 1 TO FilesOpen

SET OK to CloseFile (ZONEDATA[FileNum])

IF OK = FAILURE THEN BREAK

NEXT FileNum

IF OK = SUCCESS THEN STOP

PRINT "File Close Failed for ZONEDATA"; FileNum

Notice that when CLOSEFILE fails, the control system software breaks out of the loop and prints a failure message.


CloseFile, continued

Related Keywords

FILE OPENFILE READFILE POSITIONFILE WRITEFILE FAILURE SUCCESS

Products Supported

CyberStation.

Modes Available

Programs


CloseList Function

Format Format 1: CLOSELIST (object_var)

Format 2: CLOSELIST (member_object_var)

Purpose Format 1: Closes the list of objects that the local OBJECT variable

stands for. Format 2: Closes the group of objects that the local OBJECT variable (in member_object_var) stands for. Note: An object is any defined item on a controller or workstation

Remarks

The list is always one you opened earlier in the same program with the OPENLIST keyword. You must have defined the local OBJECT variable with the OBJECT keyword. Returns SUCCESS or FAILURE.

Example 1 After you have opened any list with OPENLIST, you must close it with

CLOSELIST. The name of the list to close must be a local OBJECT variable such as:

CLOSELIST (CurrentReport) The following is a complete program that opens a list of programs from the CENTRALSTATION, prints their names, and then closes the list.

CAUTION Be sure you close every list you open with OPENLIST.

! !


CloseList, continued

Example 1 continued

Program File OBJECT CurrentReport

NUMERIC OK

Opening:

OK = OpenList ("Program", CurrentReport, CentralStation)

IF OK = SUCCESS THEN GOTO Checking

ELSE

PRINT "Cannot Open List"

STOP

ENDIF

Checking:

IF GetObject (CurrentReport) IS NOT SUCCESS THEN GOTO Closing

PRINT CurrentReport

Closing:

OK = CloseList (CurrentReport)

IF OK = FAILURE THEN

PRINT "Cannot Close List"

STOP

ENDIF

This program does not print the actual reports, only their names.

Example 2 After you have opened any list of group members with OPENLIST, you

must close it with CLOSELIST:

Program File CLOSELIST (GrpMember)

The name of the list to close must be a local OBJECT variable that stands for a group member.


CloseList, continued

Related Keywords

GetObject OBJECT OpenList

Products Supported

Format 1: BACnet series (except b3885, b3887), CMX series, CX series, i2 series controllers (except i2885, i2887), and CyberStation. Format 2: CyberStation.

Modes Available

Programs


CloseWindow Function

Format Format 1: CloseWindow (graphics_object_name)

Format 2: CloseWindow (graphics_object_name_list)

Purpose Format 1: Closes the window of the named Pinpoint graphic object.

Format 2: Closes the windows of one or more named Pinpoint graphic objects in list.

Remarks Replace graphics_object _name with the name of a Pinpoint graphics object,

including a full path name. Replace graphics_object_name_list with the name of one or more Pinpoint graphic objects, including a full path name. Returns SUCCESS or FAILURE as described below:

• SUCCESS- If the Pinpoint application is running, and the specified graphics object or objects are successfully closed, or are already closed.

• FAILURE - If the Pinpoint application is not running.

A graphics object may include a button, with a Plain English script that closes a specific graphics object, including the one the button is in. The Pinpoint Application does not close itself, but only closes the specified graphics object. The object may be in the front or in the background.

Example 1 To close the Panel1 graphics object on the CyberStation:

Command Line CloseWindow (CyberStation\Panel1)


CloseWindow, continued Function

Example 2 Command Line

CloseWindow(Net1\Controller1\Panel1, Net1\Controller1\Panel2)

Products Supported

CyberStation

Modes Available

Command lines, programs, and functions.


CONTINUE Statement

Format CONTINUE

Purpose Stops the current iteration of the smallest enclosing FOR..NEXT,

REPEAT..UNTIL, SELECT..CASE or WHILE statement and starts the next iteration from the top of the loop.

Remarks Each time the loop repeats the action is an iteration of that loop.

Example To check several temperatures stored in an array and print names of those

over 75 degrees, you use a FOR..NEXT loop (see FOR..NEXT statement in this chapter). Normally, the loop below would print the names of all 20 stored temperatures. To get it to select those over 75, use CONTINUE to break the loop whenever one is less than or equal to 75, and skip to the next array item.

Program File 'The following prints all zones > 75

FOR NUM = 1 TO 20

IF TEMP[NUM] <= 75 THEN CONTINUE

PRINT TEMP[NUM]

NEXT NUM

In the above program, if the temperature is less than or equal to 75 degrees, CONTINUE tells the controller to go back to the top of the FOR..NEXT loop to check the next temperature (and therefore skip any statement between CONTINUE and the NEXT statement).

Related Keywords

BREAK

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs


CONTROL Function

Format CONTROL (style, left, bottom, right, top, user_change,

point_or_attribute_path, title, frame, direction, bot_scale, top_scale, tickmarks, steps, format)

Products Supported

Places a control graphic on the DCX-250 Display Unit's screen and activates it. The type of control is determined by a style number (1 to 14) that you select from a group of predefined controls (see Appendix D). Returns SUCCESS or FAILURE.

Remarks First, you must erase the 250 screen with the CLEARSCREEN keyword and

the backlight must then be turned on for the CONTROL keyword to function. Once the backlight is on, the 250 positions the selected control graphic in the center of the four coordinates (left, bottom, right, and top) that you specify. The example that follows is a very basic illustration of a control button (style 1). Refer to Appendix D for complete details on all 13-control styles.

Example Displays a button control (Control Style 1) for FAN2 in the approximate

center of the screen (see Figure 7+-5) as a 240 dot wide by 50 dot high rectangle with the title "Fan 2".

Program File CLEARSCREEN

TURN ON BACKLIGHT

CONTROL 1, 40, 75, 280, 125, TRUE, Fan2, "Fan 2"


CONTROL, continued

Example continued

Figure 7-5. Display of a Control Style 1 (control button) on the 250 screen

The format for this example uses all the required arguments plus the "title" argument. The user_change argument must be either "TRUE" if you want the operator to be able to change the setting, or "FALSE" if is not to be changed.

Products Supported

DCX-250 Display Unit.

Modes Available

Programs

��

��

Fan 2

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��


COS Function

Format COS (number)

Purpose Returns the cosine of number.

Remarks The number is any number or expression and represents an angle measured

in radians. The following formulas define radians and degrees: Radians = degrees TIMES (3.14159/180). Degrees = radians TIMES (180/3.14159).


MY.COS = COS(3.14159/2)


MY.COS = COS(ANGLE)

Related Keywords

SIN, ACOS, TAN, ATAN, ATAN 2, ASIN

Alias COSINE

Products Supported

ACX series, BACnet series (except b3885, b3887), CMX series, CX series, DCX 250, i2 series, LCX series, SCX series, TCX series controllers (except i2885, i2887), and CyberStation.

Modes Available



CPUPower System variable (programmable)

Format CPUPower

Purpose A predefined variable that you set to OFF to turn off battery power to the

central processing unit (CPU) of the CX series controller. You turn off the CPU after AC power fails. This way you preserve the life of the battery and extend the length of time the controller can retain memory on battery backup.

Remarks For advanced users only. Most often used in programs that respond to loss

of AC power. When you set CPUPower to OFF and AC power is not present, you shut off power to the entire CX series controller, including its modem, EnergyLink, and the 250-display unit. Leave CPUPower set to ON while AC power is up. If AC power has not failed, setting CPUPower to OFF has no affect. Instead of turning off the CPU, it resets itself back to ON at the end of the scan after it has determined that AC power is present and a shutdown has not occurred. After AC power goes down and battery power takes over, setting CPUPower to OFF turns off power to the CPU at the end of the scan; as a result, the controller does not operate at all until AC power returns. When AC power returns to normal, the CX series controller begins the scan at the first program in the firing order list and all programs continue on the line that they were on before you turned off the CPU. To retain memory for the longest possible time, you should turn off CPUPower as soon as possible after PowerFail becomes ON.


CPUPower, continued

Example When the AC power fails, the PowerFail system variable becomes ON. You

can have PowerFail trigger the following looping program to turn off the CPU if the power remains off for 2 minutes:

Program File Line WaitForFail

If PowerFail Is On Then

Goto TimePowerDown

Else

Stop

Endif

Line TimePowerDown

If TM > 2 Then Goto TurnOffCPU

Line TurnOffCPU

If PowerFail Is On Then

Set CPUPower To Off

Else

Stop

Endif

Notice that since the PowerFail variable triggers the program whenever the system variable changes, you must test to be sure that PowerFail is ON, not OFF, before setting CPUPower to OFF.

Related Keywords

PowerFail PowerUpTime ModemPower

Products Supported

CMX series and CX series controllers.

Modes Available



CurUser Function

Format CurUser ( )

Purpose Returns the user object of whoever is logged on to the workstation.

Example 1 If you want to have a program or report check who is logged on to the

current workstation, type the following in a program:

Program File If UserOnWS = CurUser ( ) Then . . .

Notice that in this case, the parentheses are required, because CurUser is not the first word in the statement.

Example 2 If you want to create a USR function that gives the name of the current user,

you can create it by typing the following in a function file called USR:

Function File OBJECT CU

CU = CurUser ( ) Print CU Name Return CU Name

Why create a local OBJECT variable and assign it CU? Since CurUser is a function, you cannot directly print CurUser with PRINT. You must first store what CurUser returns in an OBJECT variable. By making CU an OBJECT variable, you can then print the attributes normally associated with a user, such as NAME or FULLNAME. In this case, the function prints the NAME attribute.

Products Supported

CyberStation

Modes Available



CurWorkstation Function

Format CurWorkstation ( )

Purpose Returns the workstation object that you are currently sitting at.

Example 1 If you want to have a program or report check which workstation it is

running on, type the following in a program:

Program File

If CurWST = CurWorkstation ( ) Then . . .

Example 2 If you want to create a WS function that gives the name of the current

workstation, you can create it by typing the following in a function file called WS:

Function File

OBJECT CurWST

CurWST = CurWorkstation ( ) Print CurWST Name Return CurWST Name

Why create a local OBJECT variable and assign it CurWST? Since CurWorkstation is a function, you cannot directly print CurWorkstation with PRINT. You must first store what CurWorkstation returns in an OBJECT variable. By making CurWST an OBJECT variable, you can then print the attributes normally associated with the workstation, such as NAME.

Products Supported

CyberStation

Modes Available



Section 4 Keywords D through G

DATE System variable

Format DATE

Purpose Retrieves current system date and time so that you can then store it in a

variable.

Remarks The default value for the DATE system variable is January 1, 1989.

DATE is designed to be used with DIFFTIME, along with a datetime variable (defined using the DATETIME statement). You can set the DATE value for the system using the STRTODATE keyword from a program or command line.

Example Once you have defined the datetime variable called TEMP_DATE using the

DATETIME statement (see page 7-77), you can then set the value of that variable using the DATE system variable, as follows:

Program File

DATETIME TEMP_DATE

TEMT_DATE = DATE

This way, TEMP_DATE retrieves the exact system date and time at a given moment. You may, for instance, record the date and time that a point changes. You can use the variable you have created in subsequent calculations.

Related Keywords

DATETIME DIFFTIME STRTODATE


DATE, continued

Alias TIME

Products Supported


Modes Available



DATETIME Statement

Format DATETIME namelist [ array_size_number]

Purpose Creates and defines one or more names as local DATETIME variables. You

define the variables inside a program for use only in that particular program. Each variable may be a single variable or an array. You specify an array by including the array_size_number when you define it.

Remarks Replace namelist with the name of a datetime variable you are defining or a

series of datetime variables separated by commas. Replace array_size_number with a number up to 32,767 that tells the controller the number of elements in the DATETIME array. Because the datetime is stored in seconds, you can add seconds to it to as if it were a number. You must define all local datetime variables at the top of your program. You usually set the datetime variable to the time at a given moment using the DATE system variable (see page 7-75). You can print the datetime variable. When you do, you receive the date and time printed in this format:

MONTH DD YYYY hh:mm:ss The month is spelled out; the day is two digits, the year four digits. The hour, minute, and second are in 24-hour time.


DATETIME, continued

Example 1 In this program, the first statement defines the TEMPTIME as a

datetime variable. The next statement sets the variable to the time at a given moment with the DATE system variable:

Program File

DATETIME TEMPTIME

TEMPTIME = DATE

Example 2 When you print a datetime variable, you cannot set the format:

Program File

PRINT TEMPTIME

October 26, 2003 18:25:06

Example 3 You can define a series of datetime variables in a single statement.

Program File

DATETIME TEMPTIME, FIRSTTIME, LASTTIME

Example 4 You can define more than one array of datetime variables in a single

statement:

Program File

DATETIME TEMPTIME[40], TIMER[30], WATCH[15]

Example 5 You can define several arrays of datetime variables and several single

variables in a single statement:

Program File

DATETIME TEMPTIME[40], FIRSTTIME, TIMER[30], LASTTIME


DATETIME, continued

Related Keywords

DATE DIFFTIME STRTODATE NUMERIC STRING

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs


DAYOFMONTH System variable

Format DAYOFMONTH

Purpose Gives the day of month from 1 to 31.

Remarks You cannot change the DAYOFMONTH. The system automatically

updates it.

Example 1 To print out a headline that contains the date, you would use

DAYOFMONTH, as shown below:

Program File

PRINT 'The kwh History for", MONTH, DAYOFMONTH, "," , YEAR

The resulting header would print the actual month, day of the month, and year, like this: The kwh History for October 15, 2003

Example 2 To make some events occur only on particular days of each month, you

could set up an IF..THEN statement that would check for the day of the month:

Program File

IF DAYOFMONTH IS BETWEEN 7 AND 14 THEN…

Related Keywords

MONTH YEAR DAYOFYEAR


DAYOFMONTH, continued

Alias DOM

Products Supported


Modes Available



DAYOFYEAR System variable

Format DAYOFYEAR

Purpose Gives the number of the day of the year, between 1 and 366.

Remarks You cannot change the DAYOFYEAR. The system automatically

updates it.

Example Suppose on a certain date, you need to switch off the heating and switch on

cooling. You would use DAYOFYEAR to program the controller as in the following example:

Program File

IF DAYOFYEAR is 152 THEN

Stop The Heating_Prog

Run The Cooling_Prog

Endif

Related Keywords

MONTH YEAR DAYOFMONTH

Alias DOY

Products Supported


Modes Available



DeleteExtLog Function

Format DeleteExtLog ( object, datetime )

Purpose Deletes old entries from an extended log for the point, group of points, or

controller you give it. If you are not sure what an extended log is, refer to the Continuum CyberStation Configurator's Guide for further information. Note: The DeleteExtLog function is only available on a CyberStation workstation. It is not available on any controller.

Remarks Replace object with the name or full path and name of a point that is set up

as an extended log, a group (where each point group member is then treated as an extended log), or a controller (whose points are then all treated as extended logs). Can also be a local OBJECT variable. Replace datetime with a datetime point, a local variable, an actual datetime, or expression that results in a datetime. To delete all log entries, enter a time in the future as the datetime.

You must use the DeleteExtLog statement on a line by itself. After executing a statement formed with DeleteExtLog, the program automatically proceeds to the next labeled line.

DeleteExtLog returns SUCCESS or FAILURE.

When you use UpdateExtLog to update an extended log, the log does not automatically drop entries the way a regular log would. It keeps storing entries until you delete them with DeleteExtLog.

When do you delete the extended log entries? When you expect the log has stored more than the maximum number of entries you set it up to log. For instance, if you set up the log for 2880 entries, once it has logged the 2880 entries it continues to log them⎯beyond the 2880. To avoid filling your database with log entries, you must instruct the workstation to remove the extra log entries either automatically or using DeleteExtLog.


DeleteExtLog, continued

Remarks continued

DeleteExtLog removes only old entries⎯those entries that have expired. How does it determine an entry has expired? It calculates the expiration date of each entry as follows:

DateTime Entry Was Logged + ExtLogInterval × ExtLogSize

Notice that the ExtLogInterval and ExtLogSize that the workstation uses in the calculation are the ones that existed when the entry was logged. So, if you later changed the extended log interval or size, the expiration date calculated remains as is. As soon as the software sees the DeleteExtLog statement in a program, it understands the purpose of the datetime variable you defined⎯to tell it to delete all log entries that have expired before that date.

Example 1 Suppose you want to delete the expired extended log entries of all points in the Floor1 controller that were logged more than 90 days ago. You could delete them with a fallthru program like the one that follows:

Program File

Numeric Result

DeleteLog:

Result = DeleteExtLog (Building1 Floor1, Date - 90 * 24 * 3600)

CheckLogDeletion:

IF Result is not success THEN

Print "Failed to delete extended log entries for Floor1"

Stop

Endif

You give DeleteExtLog the controller name, then a calculation that creates a datetime in seconds. The datetime value is the number of seconds that are equivalent to the date and time that the logs must have expired by.


DeleteExtLog, continued

Example 2 Suppose you want to delete the expired extended log entries of a single point

up to the last day of June 1993. You could delete them from the Command line as follows:

Command Line

DeleteExtLog (Building1 Floor1 Temp1, StrToDate ("June 30, 1993 23:59:00"))

This statement converts the date string into a date the controller system can understand and then deletes the log entries that have expired by that date.

Example 3 Suppose you want to delete the expired extended log entries of all points in

the Floor1 controller that have been logged and then expired by a future date⎯a month from now. You could delete them with a fallthru program like the one that follows:

Program File Numeric Result

DeleteLog:

Result = DeleteExtLog (Building1 Floor1, Date + 30 * 24 * 3600)

CheckLogDeletion

IF Result is not success THEN

Print "Failed to delete extended log entries for Floor1"

Stop

Endif

Note: When the datetime argument is greater than or equal to log timestamp, the entry is deleted immediately.

Related Keywords

UpdateExtLog

Products Supported

CyberStation

Modes Available



Dial Function

Format Format 1: Dial (phone_number, commport)

Format 2: Dial (phone_number) Format 3: Dial (phone_number, commport)

Purpose Format 1: From a program, dials the Infinity modem (via the comm port you

indicate) to connect from a controller (often at a remote site) to another device, usually a workstation.

Format 2: From a program, dials the Infinity modem to connect from a controller (often at a remote site) to another device, usually a workstation. Uses the DefaultPort of the program.

Format 3: From the Command line on a terminal, dials the Infinity modem to connect from a controller (often at a remote site) to another device, usually a workstation. The commport is required on the Command line.

Remarks DIAL applies only on a controller with an Infinity modem.

The controller may also connect over modem to a third-party controller with an ASCII interface, another Andover controller, a terminal, or a printer. Replace phone_number with any string expression or series of numbers and other characters, in quotation marks, that represent a phone number. Or any local STRING variable or string point that represents the phone number you must dial to connect to a remote site. Can be up to 132 characters total. Characters allowed are all letters, numbers, and symbols you can print on a printer, but not characters that you cannot print such as ESC, carriage return, or line feed. You can use a comma (,) to force a pause, such as after dialing 9 to get an outside line. For a full 0.5 second pause, use an at sign (@).

The phone number string can also contain valid AT Commands such as “ATD,T,, 978-470-0555”.


DIAL, continued

Remarks continued

If the first character in the phone number is an ‘A’ or ‘a’, the DIAL keyword assumes that the phone number string contains valid AT commands prior to the phone number to command the modem to dial. This feature is useful for 3rd party modems or Cellular Modems that require something other than “ATDT” to command dialing. Note: commport is optional in a program and is required on the Command line Replace with the Controller port that physically connects to the modem. The DefaultMode and Mode attributes of the port must be set to AutoSet or Printer. If, in a program, you do not indicate the comm port, DIAL uses the default port you set at the top of the program or in the File Configuration window. From the command line, you must indicate the comm port. DIAL automatically turns on the DTR (data terminal ready) attribute of the port to put the port in Raw mode. Once DIAL establishes the connection to a workstation, programs can then and only then use the READ comm port function to take data from the port or PRINT to send data out the port. The port stays in Raw mode until you use HangUp or CLOSE to close the connection. You can use DIAL in a program or on the Command line. When you use DIAL from a program, you must use it on a labeled line by itself. After it executes, DIAL automatically moves the program to the next labeled line. The next labeled line should then test for the returned results of DIAL. When you use DIAL from the Command line, it returns right away, before the dialing actually begins. In this case, what DIAL first returns reflect the first response to DIAL rather than the final results:

DIAL can return any of the following results:

Returned When Success Controller has established connection with the workstation or other device.

Failure One of the following situations exists: • Comm port is not in the correct mode.

• Default port is not defined.

• Using HangUp while dialing stops the dialing from continuing. You can hang up any time during dialing.

• Phone number contains an incorrect expression or is otherwise incorrect.

DialNotCarrier Controller's modem does not detect a carrier on the communications line.


DIAL, continued

Remarks continued

Returned When DialNotAnswer Controller's modem detects a continuous ringback

signal on the line for longer than the modem expiration timer allows. The expiration timer is the S-7 register, which is automatically set to 50 seconds if you do not change it. To change it, refer to the modem manual.

DialBusyTone Controller detects a busy signal on the line. DialNotDialTone Modem is waiting for a dial tone before dialing and has

not received one.

DIAL returns the last of the above that occurs. If the controller at first does not detect a carrier, then gets a busy signal, DIAL returns DialBusyTone and does not indicate that initially it could not find the carrier.

Once DIAL is successful, the Mode of the comm port is Raw.

After dialing, DIAL waits up to 90 seconds for a response. (The 90 seconds includes the 50 seconds from the S-7 register.) If it fails, DIAL does not try again. Instead, DIAL responds as follows: • Returns one of the above results

• Reactivates the program it is in.

• Double checks to be sure DTR is ON

• Returns the port to its default mode (either AutoSet or Printer) based on the DefaultMode attribute.

Once DIAL acts on the port successfully, the port is in Raw mode. So to verify its success from the Command line, you can check the Mode attribute of the port.

Whenever you dial the port with DIAL and use PRINT to transmit data, be sure to check the PrintDone attribute of the port before hanging up with HangUp. PrintDone is True when no more characters are waiting to be sent over the port.

CAUTION Whenever you use DIAL to call out from a port, you must later use HangUp to disconnect. If you do not, the line is still open and you are still paying for the connection.

! !


DIAL, continued

Example 1 You can use DIAL to call a workstation and send it messages. The following looping program exists on a controller that calls a workstation:

Program File on Controller Numeric InitResult, DialResult, HangUpResult . . . StartingDial:

DialResult = Dial ("5085551212", Comm1)

‘ Using alternate AT Command

‘ Issue the ATD command, then pause, issue the T command and

‘ pause again…

‘DialResult = Dial ("ATD,T,, 5085551212", Comm1)

CheckingStatus:

IF DialResult is Success THEN

GOTO SendingData

ELSE

GOTO StoppingComms

Endif

Sending Data:

Print Message 1 to Comm1



. . . GOTO CheckingDone

CheckingDone:

IF Comm 1 PrintDone THEN GOTO CompletingComm

CompletingComm:

HangUpResult = HangUp (Comm 1)

Checking Hangup:

IF HangUpResult is not Success THEN Print "Could Not Hang Up Comm Port"

GOTO StoppingComms

StoppingComms: Stop


DIAL, continued

Example 1 continued

The program starts by creating a few local numeric variables for holding the results of initializing the modem, dialing the call, and hanging up.

It then initializes the modem (see the InitModem keyword for more details).

Then, in the StartingDial line, the program uses the DIAL keyword to call a phone number, indicated in quotation marks, and to find the modem on a particular port, Comm1. Notice that the phone number is in quotation marks because it is an actual phone number rather than an object, point, or variable in the control system.

Since DIAL immediately sends the program to the next labeled line, you do not need a GOTO to proceed to CheckingStatus. If DIAL is successful, then the program goes to the SendingData line. Since the port is in Raw mode, the program can now use PRINT to send messages out the port to the workstation. So, on this line the program proceeds to the send a series of messages to the workstation.

After sending data to the port, the program goes to the CheckingDone line, where it checks the PrintDone attribute of the port. When the attribute is True, the port has finished transmitting data. The program remains on this line until the attribute is True. Once PrintDone is True, the program goes to CompletingComm, where it uses HangUp to hang up on the port (see the HangUp keyword for details).

Example 2 Program File on Controller

Numeric InitResult, DialResult, HangUpResult String PhoneNum . . . DeterminingSite:

IF TOD is less than 17:00 THEN

Set PhoneNum = "5085551212"

ELSE

Set PhoneNum = "6175551212"

Endif


DIAL, continued

Example 2 continued

GOTO StartingDial StartingDial:

DialResult = Dial (PhoneNum, Comm1)

CheckingStatus:

IF DialResult is Success THEN

GOTO SendingData

ELSE

GOTO StoppingComms

Endif

. . . CheckingDone:

If Comm1 PrintDone Then Goto CompletingComm

CompletingComm: HangUpResult = HangUp (Comm1)

Checking Hangup:

IF HangUpResult is not Success THEN Print "Could Not Hang Up Comm Port"

GOTO StoppingComms

StoppingComms: Stop


DIAL, continued

Example 3 You can call a site from the controller Command window. First, you must

use InitModem to initialize the modem, and then you can dial with DIAL. When you dial from the Command window, you must include the comm port with DIAL:

Command Window

DialResult = Dial ("6175551212", Comm1)

Pr Comm1 Mode

DIAL immediately returns SUCCESS or FAILURE. If it does not succeed within 90 seconds, it returns the port to its DefaultMode setting. To verify that DIAL has succeeded, you can print the Mode of the comm port from the Command line to be sure the port is in Raw mode. Later, you must be sure to hang up with the HangUp keyword.

Related Keywords

InitModem HangUp

Products Supported

CX series controllers.

Modes Available



DIFFTIME Function

Format Format 1: DIFFTIME (SECOND, date_time1, date_time2)

Format 2: DIFFTIME (MINUTE, date_time1, date_time2) Format 3: DIFFTIME (HOUR, date_time1, date_time2) Format 4: DIFFTIME (WKD, date_time1, date_time2)

Purpose Format 1: Calculates the difference in whole seconds between two dates

and times, date_time1 and date_time2. (Subtracts date_time1 from date_time2.) Format 2: Calculates the difference in whole minutes between two dates and times, date_time1 and date_time2. (Subtracts date_time1 from date_time2.) Format 3: Calculates the difference in whole hours between two dates and times, date_time1 and date_time2. (Subtracts date_time1 from date_time2.) Format 4: Calculates and returns the difference in whole days between two times and dates, date_time1 and date_time2. (Subtracts date_time1 from date_time2.)

Remarks The date_time is any actual date and time or a datetime variable.

DIFFTIME always subtracts the first datetime from the second one. With SECOND, any time beyond a complete second is not counted. So, 2 1/2 seconds becomes 2 seconds. With MINUTE, any time beyond a complete minute is not counted. So, 2 minutes and 15 seconds becomes 2 minutes With HOUR, any time beyond a complete hour is not counted. So, 2 hours and 15 minutes becomes 2 hours.


DIFFTIME, continued

Remarks continued

With WKD, any time beyond a complete day is not counted. So, 2 days and 15 hours becomes 2 days. If date_time1 is later than date_time2, DIFFTIME returns a negative number.

Example 1 You can use DIFFTIME with SECOND to determine how many seconds

have passed. The sample program below calculates the difference between two readings of the datetime variable TIMER.

Program File DATETIME TIMER[2]

IF DIFFTME (SECOND, TIMER[1], TIMER[2]) > 30 THEN RUN TEST

The statement determines the result of TIMER [2] - TIMER [1]. If the difference is greater than 30 seconds, TEST runs. You would substitute MINUTE or HOUR in the above example to get time difference in minutes or hours.

Example 2 You can use DIFFTIME with WKD to determine how many days have

passed. The sample program that follows calculates the difference between the old date (stored in the OLDDATE variable) and the current date (in the DATE system variable).

Program File

Numeric RESULT

RESULT = DIFFTIME (WKD, OLDDATE, DATE)

The statement sets RESULT to the number of days that DATE - OLDDATE gives.


DIFFTIME, continued

Related Keywords

DATE DATETIME STRTODATE TIME

Alias DT

Products Supported

BACnet series, CMX series, CX series, i2 series controllers and CyberStation.

Modes Available



DISABLE Statement

Format Format 1: DISABLE program_name

Format 2: DISABLE point_name Format 3: DISABLE namelist

Purpose Format 1: Stops running the program named with program name at the

current line and does not allow you to run the program until you enable it with ENABLE, setting its state attribute to Enabled or through the menus and windows. Format 2: Disables a point called "point_name". Format 3: Stops program control of a list of programs named namelist all at once, each at the current line.

Remarks Replace program name with any program file name.

Replace point_name with any point, piece of equipment, terminal, computer or printer. Replace point_name with any point. Replace namelist with any list of programs or points as defined above and separated by commas. The named program, name, or each item in the namelist must have a STATE attribute (see page 1-10). The STATE attribute allows the item to be enabled or disabled. All disabled items remain disabled until you enable them (see ENABLE keyword).


DISABLE, continued

Example 1 To stop a blower program named BLOWERPROG that is in the process of

executing, enter the following command:

Command Window DISABLE THE BLOWERPROG

Example 2 When debugging, you may disable a point called FAN temporarily to see

how that affects the program. You could place the following statement in a program or enter it from the command line:

Program File DISABLE THE FAN

Example 3 To stop several active programs at once, enter the following command line:

Program File DISABLE THE HEATING, THE COOLING, THE PUMPING

Note: In the above example HEATING and COOLING are points and PUMPING is the program name.

Related Keywords

ENABLE

Alias DIS

Products Supported


Modes Available



DIVIDED BY Operator

Format number DIVIDED BY number

Purpose Divides one number by another.


The division operator ( /) may be substituted for DIVIDED BY.


USAGE = kwh DIVIDED BY 24


USAGE = kwh/24

Alias /

DIV

Products Supported


Modes Available



DRAWELLIPSE Function

Format DRAWELLIPSE (left, bottom, right, top)

Purpose Draws an ellipse inside an imaginary rectangle that is positioned on the DCX

250 Display Unit screen by its lower left and upper right corner line point locators. Returns SUCCESS or FAILURE.

Remarks Applies the current display settings.

The DCX 250 Display Unit forms the ellipse so the leftmost, rightmost, top, and bottom points on its circumference touch the sides of an imaginary Rectangle. You do not need the parentheses if DRAWELLIPSE is at the beginning of a statement. Replace left with the number of dots (line points) from the left that the left side of the imaginary rectangle around the ellipse should be positioned. Can be an integer from 1 to 320, or a name or expression that gives one.

Replace bottom with the number of dots (line points) from the bottom that the bottom side of the imaginary rectangle around the ellipse should be positioned. Can be an integer from 1 to 200, or a name or expression that gives one.

Left and bottom together give the location of the lower left corner of the rectangle.

Replace right with the number of dots (line points) from the left that the right side of the imaginary rectangle around the ellipse should be positioned. Can be an integer from 1 to 320, or a name or expression that gives one.

Replace top with the number of dots (line points) from the bottom that the topside of the imaginary rectangle around the ellipse should be positioned. Can be an integer from 1 to 200, or a name or expression that gives one.

Right and top together give the location of the upper right corner of the rectangle.


DRAWELLIPSE, continued

Example 1 You can draw an ellipse from the left-bottom (10, 20) to the right-top (250,

100) line point positions as follows:

Program File

DRAWELLIPSE 10, 20, 250, 100

Notice that the parentheses are not required in this case, because DRAWELLIPSE is at the beginning of a statement.

Figure 7- 6 shows how left and bottom give the lower left corner and right and top give the upper right corner of the imaginary rectangle.

Figure 7-6. Ellipse drawn with DRAWELLIPSE showing imaginary

rectangle with bottom left and top right corner locations

The left-bottom and right-top positions are the crosses shown in the lower and upper corners of the rectangle.

Example 2 You can draw a perfect circle (Figure 7-7) by giving a left-bottom (10, 10)

and a right-top (100, 100) line point positions as follows:

Program File

DRAWELLIPSE (10, 10, 100, 100)

(Although the parentheses are not required in this case, you can use them to make the program easier to read.)

(10, 20)

(250, 100)


DRAWELLIPSE, continued

Example 2 continued

Figure 7-7. Circle drawn with DRAWELLIPSE When you draw an ellipse, you can have DRAWELLIPSE tell whether it was successful or not, as follows: IF DrawEllipse (10, 10, 100,100) = Failure THEN Print "DCX Could Not Draw Ellipse" To Floor1 Comm3 Endif

If DRAWELLIPSE is successful, the controller draws the circle, otherwise, the message prints.

Related Keywords

DRAWLINE DRAWRECTANGLE

Products Supported

DCX 250 Display Unit

Modes Available

Programs

��

��

��

��

��

250 SCREEN


DRAWLINE Function

Format DRAWLINE (begin_left, begin_bottom, end_left, end_bottom)

Purpose Draws a line that is positioned on the DCX 250-Display Unit screen by the

arguments you supply as line point locators (dots) to the function. Returns SUCCESS or FAILURE.

Remarks Applies the current display settings with the SETDISPLAY keyword.

The DCX 250-Display Unit forms the line on its screen by joining dots (line points) that mark each end. You indicate the position of these dots as follows: Replace begin_left with the number of dots (line points) from the left that the line should begin. Can be an integer from 1 to 320, or a name or expression that gives one. Replace begin_bottom with the number of dots (line points) from the bottom that the line should begin. Can be an integer from 1 to 200, or a name or expression that gives one. The begin_left and begin_bottom positions give the location of the beginning of the line. Replace end_left with the number of dots (line points) from the left that the line should end. Can be an integer from 1 to 320, or a name or expression that gives one. Replace end_bottom with the number of dots (line points) from the bottom of the screen that the line should end. Can be an integer from 1 to 200, or a name or expression that gives one. The end_left and end_bottom positions give the location of the end of the line.


DRAWLINE, continued


SETDISPLAY (white)

DRAWLINE 10, 100, 200, 50

Notice that the parentheses are not required in this case, because DRAWLINE is at the beginning of a statement.

Figure 7-8 shows how the begin_left, begin_bottom, end_left, and end_bottom values mark the dots that begin and end the line.

Figure 7-8. Line drawn with DRAWLINE showing begin and end line locations.

SETDISPLAY first sets the color to white, so the line appears on the 250 screen in white.

Related Keywords

DRAWELLIPSE DRAWRECTANGLE

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs

��

��

�� Begin_Left= 10 ��

�

��

Begin_

��

��

��

��

End_Left = 200

Bottom

��

�

��

End_Bottom

�

�

��

•

•

= 50

= 100


DRAWRECTANGLE Function

Format DRAWRECTANGLE (left, bottom, right, top)

Purpose Draws a rectangle on the screen of the DCX 250-Display Unit by the

arguments you supply to the function as line point locators (dots) for the lower left and upper right corners. Returns SUCCESS or FAILURE.

Remarks Applies the current display settings.

You do not need the parentheses if DRAWRECTANGLE is at the beginning of a statement. Replace left with the number of dots (line points) from the left that the left side of the rectangle should be positioned. Can be an integer from 1 to 320, or a name or expression that gives one. Replace bottom with the number of dots (line points) from the bottom that the bottom side of the rectangle should be positioned. Can be an integer from 1 to 200, or a name or expression that gives one. The left and bottom positions give the location of the lower left corner of the rectangle. Replace right with the number of dots (line points) from the left that the right side of the rectangle should be positioned. Can be an integer from 1 to 320, or a name or expression that gives one. Replace top with the number of dots (line points) from the bottom that the topside of the rectangle should be positioned. Can be an integer from 1 to 200, or a name or expression that gives one. The right and top positions give the location of the upper right corner of the rectangle.


DRAWRECTANGLE, continued

Example 1 You can draw a rectangle with the left side 10 dots over and the bottom side

20 dots up, the right side 250 dots over and the top 100 dots up as follows:

Program File

DRAWRECTANGLE 10, 20, 250, 100

The 250 display unit draws the rectangle from the left-bottom 10, 20 to the right-top 250, 100 as shown in Figure 7-9.

Figure 7-9. Rectangle drawn with DRAWRECTANGLE showing bottom left and top right corner locations

You can have DRAWRECTANGLE tell you whether or not it drew successfully by putting it inside an IF..THEN statement and including the parentheses: IF DRAWRECTANGLE (10, 20, 250,100) = Failure THEN Print "DCX Could Not Draw Rectangle" Endif If DRAWRECTANGLE is successful, the controller draws the rectangle, otherwise, the message prints.

��

��

�

�

��

�

�

��

� ��

� �� Left= 10 ��

�

�� Bottom

��

� ��Right = 250

= 20

��

�

�� Top = 100


DRAWRECTANGLE, continued

Example 2 You can draw a perfect square (Figure 7-10) by giving the same values for

left and bottom, then the same values for right and top, such as 10, 10, and 100, 100, as follows:

Program File

DRAWRECTANGLE 10, 10, 100, 100

Figure 7-10. Square drawn with DRAWRECTANGLE

Related Keywords

DRAWELLIPSE DRAWLINE SETDISPLAY

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs

��

��

��

��

��

250 Screen


ENABLE Statement

Format Format 1: ENABLE program_ name

Format 2: ENABLE point_name Format 3: ENABLE namelist

Purpose Format 1: Allows the program named by program name to be run by the

RUN or ROTATE statements. Format 2: Places the point, named by point name in an Enabled state where it may be used by a program. Format 3: Allows the listed programs named by namelist to be run by RUN or ROTATE. Places several items under program control at once, or enables points.

Remarks Replace program name with any program file name.

Replace point name with any point. Replace namelist with any list of programs or names, as defined above, separated by commas. The named program, name, or each item in the namelist must have a STATE attribute (see page 1-12). The STATE attribute allows the item to be enabled or disabled.

Example 1 Suppose you have disabled a program that controls cooling. To now let the

controller run it, type the following:

Command Line

ENABLE COOLING


ENABLE, continued

Example 2 When you temporarily disable a point to debug a program, it remains

disabled until you enable it again. You can enter the following as a program statement or command line:

Program File

ENABLE the Fan

Example 3 To activate several programs at once, enter the following command line:

Command Line

ENABLE the Heating, the Cooling, and the Pump

Note: In the above program, Heating and Cooling are program names and Pump is a point.

Related Keywords

DISABLE

Alias EN

Products Supported


Modes Available



ENDPOLYLINE Function

Format ENDPOLYLINE ( )

Purpose After a BEGINPOLYLINE statement and a series of drawing statements,

ENDPOLYLINE indicates drawing on the DCX 250-Display Unit is complete. Returns SUCCESS or FAILURE.

Remarks After you use BEGINPOLYLINE, and you then give a series of line points

(see LINEPOINT keyword) you want connected, you then indicate the series of line points is over by entering ENDPOLYLINE. You do not need the parentheses if ENDPOLYLINE is at the beginning of a statement.

Example You create a line connecting a series of line points on the 250 display unit by

entering the following:

Program File

SETDISPLAY (NOFILL)

BEGINPOLYLINE

LINEPOINT (10, 100)

LINEPOINT (100, 50)

LINEPOINT (200, 100)

LINEPOINT (250, 60)

ENDPOLYLINE

Neither BEGINPOLYLINE nor LINEPOINT actually causes the lines to be drawn. Instead, ENDPOLYLINE takes its cue from those statements and actually executes the drawing.


ENDPOLYLINE, continued

Example continued

Without ENDPOLYLINE, BEGINPOLYLINE does nothing. Without ENDPOLYLINE, LINEPOINT only places dots (line points); it does not draw lines. The DCX 250-Display Unit stores the line points in memory until it sees ENDPOLYLINE which then makes it draw the lines as shown on Figure 7-11.

Figure 7-11. Connected line points executed by ENDPOLYLINE.

If you want to know whether the lines or polygon have been drawn successfully put ENDPOLYLINE inside an IF. . THEN statement:

IF ENDPOLYLINE ( ) = Failure THEN

Print "DCX Cannot Draw Polygon"

Endif

If ENDPOLYLINE is successful, the controller draws the polygon, otherwise, the message prints.

��

��

�

��

�

��

�

�

��

250 Screen


ENDPOLYLINE, continued

Related Keywords

BEGINPOLYLINE LINEPOINT

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs


EOF Constant

Format EOF

Purpose EOF means end-of-file. Used in expressions to indicate a process or function

has failed because it tried to access information past the end of a file read by CyberStation.

Remarks EOF is always numeric.


IF WriteFile (ZONEDATA, RECORDLINE, 80, CHARS) = EOF THEN

Print "Not enough room in file for record"

GOTO WriteCheck

Endif

Related Keywords

FAILURE SUCCESS

Products Supported

CyberStation

Modes Available

Programs


EQUALS Operator

Remarks See the IS keyword.


ERRORS System variable

Format ERRORS

Purpose Is a variable the controller maintains that indicates the number of system

errors pending. The number increments (increases by one) each time a new error occurs and is cleared when manually reset to zero (∅).

Remarks The controller automatically updates ERRORS. You can only reset it to zero.

The controller increments ERRORS when any of the following occurs: • A Plain English program error disables a program (which also sets the

program ERROR attribute).

• The controller’s input reference voltage goes out of its normal range, usually when you apply too much voltage to one or more inputs.

• The controller’s output reference voltage goes out of its normal range, usually when drawing too much current from one or more inputs.

• The Infinet has trouble transmitting or receiving data.

• Someone resets an Infinet controller.

• Someone turns off the AC power to any Infinet, CX series or CMX series controller so that the AC power shuts down, but the battery retains memory.

Example Since the ERRORS variable automatically decrements after you

acknowledge an error, the value of the variable should never get very large. In the sample program below, you set a limit to how many errors can accumulate and generate a report on all errors if the limit is exceeded:

Program File

IF ERRORS > 10 THEN GOTO Report_Error


ERRORS, continued

Products Supported


Modes Available



EventLogSize System variable

Format EventLogSize

Purpose Refers to the event log that stores access control events in the CX series

controller, which is hidden from view. Indicates the number of access control events that the event log can store.

Remarks This system variable applies only if you are using your CX series controller

for access control. You can set the number of events that the event log will contain, based on the size of the controller's memory

Example 1 If you want to know how many events you can fit in the event log of a CX or

CMX series controller, you can print the controller’s EventLogSize system variable in the Command window, as follows:

Command Line

PR EventLogSize

Example 2 If you want to change the number of events the controller can store in its

event log, you can set the EventLogSize system variable in a program or in the Command window, as follows:

Program File

SET EventLogSize = 1000


EventLogSize, continued

Related Keywords

AccessLog

Products Supported

CMX series and CX series controllers.

Modes Available



EXPONENTIAL Function

Format EXPONENTIAL (number)

Purpose Returns a value equal to the base e raised to the number power.



EVAL = EXPONENTIAL (0)

The result of e to the 0 power is 1. Because the EXPONENTIAL function returns 1, EVAL is set to 1.


R.VAL = EXPONENTIAL (-1)

The result of e to the -1 power is 0.368, so R.VAL is set to 0.368.

Alias EXP

Products Supported

ACX series, BACnet series, CMX series, CX series, DCX 250, i2 series, LCX series, SCX series, TCX series controllers (except i2885, i2887, b3885, b3887), and CyberStation.

Modes Available



FACTORIAL Function

Format FACTORIAL (integer_expression)

Purpose Returns the factorial of integer_expression.

Remarks The integer_expression is an integer greater than or equal to zero. The largest

number you can use FACTORIAL on is 34.

Example The following statement sets FVAL to the result of factorial 3:

Program File

FVAL = FACTORIAL (3)

The function returns 6, so FVAL = 6.

Alias FACT

Products Supported

BACnet series (except b3885, b3887), CMX series, CX series, DCX series, i2 series controllers (except i2885, i2887), and CyberStation.

Modes Available



FAILURE Constant

Format FAILURE

Purpose Used in expressions to indicate a function has failed to complete.

Remarks FAILURE is always numeric and equal to one. It can be used to replace

number in a comparison expression.


IF Read (Comm2, 80, TextString, 10) = FAILURE THEN

Print "Could not Read Text" TO Screen GOTO ErrorLine

Endif

IF OpenFile ("Com1", Read Write, File Var) = FAILURE THEN

Print "Error opening file"

Endif

Related Keywords

SUCCESS

Products Supported

CX series and CyberStation.

Modes Available



File Statement

Format FILE file_variable_namelist [array_size_number]

Purpose Creates and defines one or more names as local FILE variables, just as

NUMERIC, STRING, and DATETIME create local variables. You define the FILE variables inside a program for use only in that particular program. You can not use FILE on the command line. Each variable may be a single variable or an array. You specify an array by including the array_size_number when you define it. Each FILE variable name is a control system software name that corresponds to any actual Windows file name. Later you use this name to open the file with OPENFILE, and act on the file with READFILE, POSITIONFILE, WRITEFILE, and CLOSEFILE keywords.

Remarks A FILE variable is a file name that the control system software understands;

this is useful because the control system software does not comprehend Windows file names. After you define the FILE variable, you later use OPENFILE to open a Windows file that goes with it. Although the variable is like a NUMERIC, STRING, or DATETIME local variable, it is also different⎯you do not set it to a Windows file name with a SET statement. Instead, the control system software sets the name within an OPENFILE, CLOSEFILE, READFILE, POSITIONFILE, or WRITEFILE statement, where you give the FILE variable name and a string containing the Windows file name. (See each related keyword for more detail.) What makes it a variable is that you can change the Windows file name to a FILE variable name that it associates with. You always make that change within a statement you form with a related keyword. Replace file_variable_namelist with one or more local FILE variable names that you want Windows text files to correspond to. May be up to 32 characters, including letters, numbers, periods, and underscores, starting with a letter.


File, continued

Remarks continued

Replace array_size_number with a number up to 32,767 that tells the controller how many positions are in the array of file names. Each position in the array is like a separate FILE variable that corresponds to a single Windows text file.

Example 1 You use FILE in a program to define a file called ZONEDATA. Then you

can open an Windows file and put data in it with other related keywords:

Program File

FILE ZoneData Numeric Chars String 80 Dataline

Line Opening

.

.

Line Working

.

.

Line Closing

.

.

Example 2 You can create an array of variables with FILE and once you have defined

them, you can assign each a Windows file name using a FOR..NEXT statement with OPENFILE.


FILE, continued

Example 2 continued

In this example, you open the Windows files in the left column below. Each corresponds to the control system software name you created with a local FILE variable defined in the array, shown in the right column:

Windows File

Control System File Variable

\text\zone1.txt ZoneData[1] \text\zone2.txt ZoneData[2] \text\zone3.txt ZoneData[3] Program File

File ZoneData[3] Numeric OK, NumFile

Line Opening

FOR NumFile = 1 To 3 OK = OPENFILE ("c:\text\zone"; NumFile;".txt", WRITEONLY, ZoneData [NumFile]) IF OK = FAILURE THEN BREAK

NEXT NumFile

Line Working

.

.

Line Closing

.

Related Keywords

CLOSEFILE OPENFILE POSITIONFILE READFILE WRITEFILE

Products Supported

CyberStation

Modes Available

Programs


FILL Constant

Format FILL

Purpose Sets the graphics on the DCX 250 Display Unit screen to filled solids rather

than lines when you use it with SETDISPLAY.

Remarks The graphics on the 250 screen may be filled (FILL) or not filled

(NOFILL).

Example You set the graphics on the 250 screen to solids, as follows:

Program File

SETDISPLAY (FILL)

Related Keywords

NOFILL SETDISPLAY

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs


FLOOR Function

Format FLOOR (number)

Purpose Rounds number to the nearest smaller integer on the number line and returns

that integer.

Remarks The number is any number or expression. (See ROUND keyword for a

comparison of all rounding functions.)


TmpVar = FLOOR (42.7)

This statement returns 42.


RESULT = FLOOR (-1.1)

This statement returns -2. Figure 7-12 illustrates how the controller arrives at -2 for the floor of -1.1.

Figure 7-12. Number line showing FLOOR (-1.1)

Related Keywords

CEILING TRUNCATE ROUND

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

0 1 2 3-4 -3 -2 -1 4

��

��

��

�

�

��

Position of –1.1 on the number linePosition of FLOOR (–1.1)��

��

��


FLOOR, continued

Products Supported

BACnet series (except b3885, b3887), CX series, DCX 250, i2 series controllers (except i2885, i2887), and CyberStation.

Modes Available



FOR..NEXT Statement

Format Format 1: FOR numeric_name = begin TO end

statement statement . . . NEXT numeric_name Format 2: FOR numeric_name = begin TO end STEP number statement statement . . . NEXT numeric_name

Purpose Carries out all statements in a loop a fixed number of times.

Remarks Replace numeric_name with a defined local variable or point that stands for

a number.

The numeric_name after NEXT must be the same as the one after FOR.

Replace statement with any complete instruction that tells the program what to do next or what action to take.

Replace begin with an integer expression.

Replace end with an integer expression.

number tells the amount to increase numeric_name by each time the controller goes through the loop. A FOR..NEXT loop looks like this:

FOR Count = 2 TO 10 STEP 2

Print Count, " "; Print (10 + Count)

NEXT Count


FOR..NEXT, continued

Remarks continued

The statement sets the value of the numeric_name to the begin value, then carries out the statements after FOR until it reaches NEXT. At NEXT, the program goes back to FOR and gets the next value of numeric_name by adding number to begin. Here, since begin is 2, end is 10, and number is 2, the numeric_name (often called the “counter”) counts 2, 4, 6, 8, 10. The first time through the loop numeric_name is 2, the second time it is 4, and so on. As long as numeric_name is less than or equal to end, the statements inside the loop are carried out. When numeric_name is greater than end the program then goes to the statement after NEXT. Here is the output printed by the loop above: 2 12 4 14 6 16 8 18 10 20

If you do not specify a STEP number, the name automatically increases by one (increment) each time the loop executes. The step may also be a negative step, taking the value of the name from a begin of, for instance, 10 to an end of 1 by a number of –1.

The setting of counter numeric_name cannot be changed from within the loop.

CAUTION The scan action limits the number of statements that can execute on one line to 5000. Be careful of exceeding the limit when using FOR..NEXT.

! !



Example 1 Before you run functions that use the ARG variables, you may want to set

them all to zero. You can set them all with one programming statement using FOR..NEXT:

Program File

FOR Count = 1 TO 15

Set Arg [Count] = 0

NEXT Count

The first time through the loop, ARG[1] is set to 0, the second time ARG[2] is set to 0, the third time ARG[3] is set to 0, and so on.

Example 2 To set every third value in an array to zero, you can go to the third item, then

sixth, then ninth, and so on using STEP with FOR..NEXT:

Program File

Number Count

FOR Count = 3 TO 15 Step 3

Set Pump [Count] = 0

NEXT Count

Example 3 To find a filtered average, you could set up a function called FILT.TOTAL.

The function, shown below, uses FOR..NEXT to loop from ARG[3] through ARG[15], and add only the numbers with a value between that of ARG[1] and ARG[2]:

Function File

Number Total, Count, Num

SET Num, Total = 0

FOR Count = 3 TO 15 IF Arg[Count] is Between Arg[1] AND Arg[2] THEN

Total = Arg[Count] + Total Num = Num + 1

Endif

NEXT Count

RETURN (Total/Num)



Products Supported


Related Keywords

BREAK, CONTINUE

Modes Available

Programs


FREEMEM System variable

Format FREEMEM

Purpose Contains the number of bytes of free memory.

Does not indicate memory available on a workstation.

Remarks For system manager only. Primarily designed to be used on the command

line because the value of FREEMEM does not change dynamically. Also, it can be used in programs but doing so will slow the controller down.

Example If you want to know the size of the largest block of free memory available on

a controller, enter the following:

Program File

Print FREEMEM

Products Supported

ACX series, BACnet series, CMX series, CX series, DCX 250, i2 series, LCX series, SCX series, and TCX series controllers.

Modes Available



GetExtLog Function

Format GetExtLog (object_name , value_var , start_time , end_time)

Purpose Gets the value from an entry in the extended log and gets the time it

was stored in the log. Retrieves this information for a particular point and a range of times that begins with the start_time and ends with the end_time.

Remarks When you use GetExtLog, you must use it on a labeled line by itself. Once

GetExtLog executes, the controller automatically goes to the next labeled line, where the program should test to see if GetExtLog returns SUCCESS or FAILURE. Replace object_name with the full path name of the object. Replace value_var with a local variable or point to hold the value of the next extended log entry that GetExtLog retrieves. Replace start_time with a time of first entry that the GetExtLog should retrieve from the log. Can be a datetime point or local datetime variable. Replace end-time with the Time of last entry that the GetExtLog should retrieve from the log. Can be a datetime point, local datetime variable, or datetime data file field. If you do not give an end time, GetExtLog continues to retrieve the time and log values until the current date and time. May be a numeric or string expression that results in a datetime (or number of seconds representing one). The program starts getting extended log values at the start_time you give. The program continues to get the extended log times and associated values until it reaches the end_time you give.


GetExtLog, continued

Example Fall-Thru program that retrieves all the extended log entries of a numeric

point since 30 days ago. Program File

Numeric result, logvalue DateTime LogTime, endLogTime SetEndLogTime1:

EndLogTime = StrToDate(“12/10/2003 09:50:00 AM”)

Print “Start Log Extraction” to MessageWindow

GettingLogEntry:

result = GetExtLog(MyNetwork\MyCX\n1log, logvalue, logtime, endLogTime)

PrintingLogEntry:

If result = Success then

Print logtime, endLogTime, logvalue to MessageWindow

‘do we need to finish thelog?

if logtime >= endLogTime then

print "Log Extraction Finished" to MessageWindow

stop

endif

Goto GettingLogEntry

Else

Print “Failed getting extended log” to MessageWindow

Stop

Endif


GetExtLog, continued

Related Keywords

DeleteExtLog UpdateExtLog

Products Supported

CyberStation

Modes Available

Programs


GETNAME Function

Format GETNAME (string)

Purpose Changes the string to a name, such as the name of a defined point, so it can

then be set to a value or used anywhere in the language that a point name is allowed. Can be used to give one name to a series of items in the database that has the same root in their names. Each of the names is made up of a root abutted with (joined to) a variable. CAUTION: This function is time consuming and should be used sparingly. It is recommended that it only be used in reports.

Remarks The string can be either text (word or words) or a text expression. The text

expression can be a known character or characters combined with a changeable character or characters to form one word. A semicolon joins the parts of the combined string (TEMP; X gives TEMP1, TEMP2, TEMP3, as X becomes 1, then 2, then 3). The “word” formed in the string must be a path name or a single-word name that you have defined somewhere in the control system software.


GETNAME, continued

Example 1 In the following example, GETNAME converts the "TEMP"; ROOM string

to the TEMP1, TEMP2, and other temperature point names up to TEMP10. These points have been defined on the controller. The program prints the values of the points:

Program File Numeric Room

Line SettingRoom

SET Room = 1 GOTO PrintingTemp

Line PrintingTemp

Print GETNAME("Temp";Room)

GOTO GettingRoom

Line GettingRoom

SET Room = Room + 1 IF Room is less than 11 THEN GOTO PrintingTemp ELSE

Stop ENDIF

Example 2 You can use GETNAME to get the value of a point from more than one

controller. In this example, the controllers are VAV box controllers called ROOM1, ROOM2, ROOM3, and so on, up to ROOM10. Since each ROOM controller has a TEMP point, GETNAME can easily retrieve that point from each controller:

Program File Numeric ROOM

Line SettingRoom

ROOM = 1 GOTO CheckingTemp

Line CheckingTemp

IF GETNAME("Room";ROOM;" Temp") > 75 THEN Print "Room |## is |###", ROOM, GETNAME("Room"; ~ ROOM;" Temp")


GETNAME, continued

Example 2 continued

Endif GOTO GetNextRoom

Line GetNextRoom

IF ROOM >= 10 THEN STOP ROOM = ROOM + 1 GOTO CheckingTemp

"Room"; ROOM;" Temp" gets the path to the TEMP point on the ROOM1 controller first. Once the program gets the value of TEMP from each controller, it compares that value to the setpoint of 75. If the temperature is not at setpoint, the program prints a message.

Example 3 To get an attribute with GETNAME, you must include the attribute name in

the GETNAME string. (You cannot get the name and then put an attribute after it.) Include the attribute as follows:

Program File

Print GETNAME("Room"; ROOM; "Temp VALUE")

Example 4 You can also get attributes of a point other than the value. This example

retrieves the STATE attribute (enabled or disabled):

Program File Print "The Lights are |*", GETNAME("Room";ROOM;"Lights State")

Example 5 You can also get attributes of any other name defined in the control system

software, for instance, the STATUS of a program called HEATING (active or inactive):

Program File Print "Status of Heating is |*", GETNAME("Floor";FloorNum;" "Heating STATUS")


GETNAME, continued

Example 6 You can use GETNAME to generate a report on several points at a

particular time. For example, you can get the setting of the lights in a particular space, the status of the lighting program, the setpoint at that time, the actual temperature at that time, the airflow setpoint, and the actual airflow:

Program File

Numeric ROOM

Line SetRoom

ROOM = 1 Print "Today's Date and Time are ";DATE

GOTO CheckRoom

Line CheckRoom

PRINT "Room |## Status", ROOM PRINT "The lights are |$###", GETNAME("Room";ROOM;" Lights") PRINT "The lighting program is |*", GETNAME("Floor";Num,"Lighting STATUS") PRINT "The temperature setpoint is ⏐##..#", GETNAME ("Room"; ROOM;" Sept") PRINT "The actual temperature is ⏐##..#", GETNAME ("Room"; ROOM;" Temp") PRINT "The airflow setpoint is ⏐##.# cmf", GETNAME ("Room"AirSetpt") PRINT "The actual airflow is ⏐##.# cmf", GETNAME ("Room"; ROOM;" AirFlow)

GOTO GetNextRoom Line GetNextRoom

IF ROOM >=10 THEN STOP ROOM = ROOM + 1 GOTO CheckRoom

Products Supported

BACnet series (except b3885, b3887), CX series, CMX series, i2 series controllers (except i2885, i2887), and CyberStation.

Modes Available

Programs


GetObject Function

Format Format 1: GETOBJECT ( object_var )

Format 2: GETOBJECT ( member_object_var )

Purpose Format 1: Gets the next object from a list of objects you opened with

OPENLIST. The list is always of one particular class of objects, such as INPUT, OUTPUT, PROGRAM.

Remarks The object_var is a local OBJECT variable you defined with the

OBJECT statement. Returns SUCCESS or FAILURE. After it gets the last object in the list of that object class, GETOBJECT returns FAILURE. See the related keywords for details on how to open and close the lists. Format 2 is available only on a workstation.

Example 1 After you have defined a local OBJECT variable with the OBJECT keyword,

you can then open the list of objects of a particular class (see OPENLIST) and get each object with GETOBJECT. In this case, you open a list of VAV points and get each point as follows

Program File

Object VavPoint

Line OpenPoint

. .

Line GetPoints

IF GetObject (VavPoint) Is Not SUCCESS THEN GOTO ClosePoints


GetObject, continued

Example 1 continued

IF VavPoint State Is Disabled THEN Print VavPoint Name

Line ClosePoints

. . Stop

The program is looping, so that it stays on the GetPoints line until GETOBJECT fails to retrieve another point. You know GETOBJECT cannot find anymore points when it returns FAILURE rather than SUCCESS. Notice that because the program is looping, you use the STOP keyword to prevent it from repeating the actions on the ClosePoints line.

This program checks the state of each point it retrieves from a particular controller. If the point is disabled, the program prints the point name. When the control system software has finished getting all the points, you have a list of the disabled points.

See the related keywords for details on how to open and close the lists.

Example 2 You can print a list of disabled programs on a particular controller using

GETOBJECT. This time, the program is not looping, but fallthru. Notice that GOTO creates the loop that continues to look for programs on the controller.

Program File Object Prog

Line OpenProg

. .

Line GetProgs

IF GetObject (Prog) Is Not SUCCESS THEN GOTO CloseProg IF Prog State Is Disabled THEN Print Prog Name

GOTO GetProgs

Line CloseProg

.



Example 2 continued

This program checks the state of each program it retrieves from a particular controller. If the program is disabled, the control system software prints the program name. When the control system software has finished getting all the programs, you have a list of the disabled programs.

Example 3 You can print a list of the CX series controllers that are off-line using

GETOBJECT. The sample program is looping:

Program File

OBJECT EnetCtrlr

Line OpenController

. .

Line GetController

IF GetObject (EnetCtlr) Is Not SUCCESS THEN GOTO CloseController

Endif IF EnetCtlr CommStatus Is OffLine THEN

Print EnetCtlr Name Endif

Line CloseController

. This program checks the COMMSTATUS of each Cx series controller on the network. If the controller is off-line, the control system software prints the controller name. When the control system software has checked the entire list of controllers, you have a complete list of the CX controllers that are off-line.

Since this information can change, you might run a program like this every hour (trigger it from the HOUR system variable) or more frequently.

Example 4 You can also get a list of all points or all files rather than a particular type of

point or file. GETOBJECT gets all points in the following example.

Program File Object VavPoint



Example 4 continued

Line OpenVavPoints

.

.

Line GetVavPoints

IF GetObject (VavPoint) Is Not SUCCESS THEN GOTO CloseVavPoints Endif

PR VavPoint

Line CloseVavPoints

.

.

This program gets each point from the VAVPoint list. PR prints the name, value, and units of each point. You can use this type of program to retrieve all point values from a single controller quickly and easily.



Related Keywords

CloseList OBJECT OpenList

Products Supported

Format 1: BACnet series (except b3885, b3887), CX series, CMX series, i2 series controllers (except i2885, i2887), and CyberStation.

Modes Available

Programs


GOTO Function

Format Fromat 1: GOTO linename Format 2: GOTO LINE linename

Format 3: GO linename Format 4: GO TO linename Format 5: GO TO LINE linename

Purpose Branches to the line labeled linename.

Remarks The linename is any line label created with the LINE statement.

Must be in the same program. (See LINE.) Note: Do not use GOTO in FOR..NEXT, WHILE, or REPEAT..UNTIL loops. The controller gives an error if you do.

Example 1 In the following looping program the GOTO statement with IF..THEN

controls the heating and cooling processes:

Program File

Line Beginning

IF Temp is Less Than 68 THEN GOTO Heating IF Temp is Greater Than 76 THEN GOTO Cooling

Line Heating

Turn On Heater1 GOTO Beginning

Line Cooling

Turn On Cool1 GOTO Beginning

Both "HEATING" and "COOLING" are line labels. When the temperature changes, GOTO sends control to the appropriate line.

The controller then executes instructions in the labeled line.

Notice that the GOTOs have been strategically placed so the controller executes some statements and skips others.


GOTO, continued

Example 2 You can include the word LINE in front of the line name, as follows:

Program File

LINE 1

Start Fan1 GOTO LINE 2

LINE 2

IF Fan1.Status is on THEN GOTO LINE Shutdown

LINE Shutdown

IF Zone1 Temperature is less than 60 THEN Stop Fan1

GOTO LINE 1 Endif

Example 3 You can leave out TO and type only GO:

Program File

Line Beginning

IF Temp is less than 68 THEN GO Heating IF Temp is greater than 76 THEN GO Cooling

Line Heating

Turn On Heater1 GO Beginning

Line Cooling

Turn On Cool1 GO Beginning

Example 4 You can separate GO and TO as follows:

Program File

Line Beginning

IF Temp is Less Than 68 THEN GO TO Heating IF Temp is Greater Than 76 THEN GO TO Cooling


GOTO, continued

Example 4 continued

Line Heating

Turn On Heater1 GO TO Beginning

Line Cooling

Turn On Cool1 GO TO Beginning

Example 5 You can separate GO and TO, and include LINE as well:

Program File

Line Beginning

IF Temp is Less Than 68 THEN GO TO LINE Heating IF Temp is Greater Than 76 THEN GO TO LINE Cooling

Line Heating

Turn On Heater1 GO TO LINE Beginning

Line Cooling

Turn On Cool1 GO TO LINE Beginning

Related Keywords

BASEDON..GOTO LINE

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs


Section 5 Keywords H through N

HangUp Function

Format Format 1: HangUp (commport)

Format 2: HangUp ( ) Format 3: HangUp (commport)

Purpose Format 1: From a program, using the comm port you indicate, hangs up on

the Infinity modem connection. The Infinity modem is on the comm port. Format 2: From a program, hangs up on the Infinity modem connection. Determines the comm port based on the DefaultPort attribute for the program. Format 3: From the Command line on a terminal, hangs up on the Infinity modem connection over the comm port you give.

Remarks HangUp applies only on a controller with an Infinity modem.

The controller may also be connected over a modem to a third-party controller with an ASCII interface, another Andover controller, a terminal, or a printer.

Replace commport with the controller port that physically connects to the modem. (Optional in a program but required on the command line.)

If, in a program, you do not indicate the comm port, HangUp uses the default port you set at the top of the program or in the File Configuration window. From the command line, you must indicate the comm port.

You can use HangUp in a program or on the command line. When you use HangUp from a program, you must use it on a labeled line by itself. After it executes, HangUp automatically moves the program to the next labeled line. The next labeled line should then test for the returned results of HangUp.


HangUp, continued

Remarks continued

When you use HangUp from the command line, it returns right away, before the hanging up actually begins. In this case, what HangUp first returns reflects the first response to HangUp rather than the final result.

HangUp can return one of the following results:

SUCCESS⎯Controller has successfully disconnected from the workstation or other device.

FAILURE⎯If the commport is not in the correct mode or the default port is not defined in the program.

If the Mode of the port is PPP, Window, or Command, then HangUp does not hang up the phone. Instead, it returns FAILURE and reactivates the program that attempted to hang up.

If the Mode of the port is AutoSet or Printer, then HangUp turns off DTR, returns SUCCESS, and reactivates the program that is hanging up.

Hanging Up While Dial is in Process If the Mode of the port is Raw, and DIAL is in progress, HangUp responds as follows:

• Attempts to hang up and waits 10 seconds for the hang-up to complete.

• If CXD is still ON sets DTR to OFF and waits 10 seconds for the modem to reinitialize.

• Sets DTR to ON.

• Returns FAILURE.

• Reactivates the program that used DIAL to connect.

• Reactivates the program that used HangUp to disconnect.

• Sets the port to its DefaultMode.

• If you attempt to use CLOSE on the port while DIAL is active, HangUp ignores it. CLOSE is not accepted.

Hanging Up While Connected to a Remote Device If the Mode of the port is Raw, and DIAL has established a connection with a workstation (from a remote site), HangUp responds as follows:

• Does not respond to characters from the port with READ or characters sent to the port with PRINT.


HangUp, continued

Remarks continued

• Discards all characters the controller has not yet printed to the port.

• If READ is occurring, sets the TimedOut attribute of the port to True and reactivates the program that was using READ.

• Attempts to hang up and waits 10 seconds for the hangup to complete.

• If CXD is ON then sets DTR to OFF and waits 10 seconds for the modem to reinitialize.

• Sets DTR to ON.

• Reactivates the program that used HangUp to disconnect.

• Sets the port to its DefaultMode.

• Sets the PrintDone attribute of the port to True when the last PRINT has been completed.

Hanging Up While InitModem is in Process

If you use HangUp or CLOSE while the InitModem keyword is preparing the modem for communication, the controller ignores these two statements.

CAUTION If you attempt to use CLOSE instead of hanging up while the port is connected using DIAL, CLOSE is successful, but the phone does not disconnect. If you do not HangUp, the line is still open and you are still paying for the connection

! !


HangUp, continued

Example 1 Suppose you are on a controller and have written a program to call a device

with DIAL. After you have the program call the device successfully, and once you determine the PrintDone attribute of the port is True, you can hang up. To have the program hang up, you use HangUp and give it the name of the port to hang up on:

Program File CheckingDone:

IF Comm1 PrintDone THEN GOTO CompletingComm CompletingComm:

HangUpResult = HangUp (Comm1) CheckingHangUp:

IF HangUpResult is not Success THEN

Print "Could Not Hang Up Comm Port" On the line immediately after you use HangUp, you must check for the result of hanging up. If it was successful, HangUpResult is equal to SUCCESS; otherwise it is equal to FAILURE.

Example 2 You use HangUp to have a program hang up after it has successfully called a

device. If you do not give HangUp the name of the comm port, it automatically assumes you want it to hang up on the DefaultPort you set in the File Configuration window or at the top of the program, as in the following example.


HangUp, continued

Example 2 continued

Program File Preparing:

Set Floor1 CallingUp DefaultPort = Comm3 . . . CheckingDone:


HangUpResult = HangUp ( ) CheckingHangup:

IF HangUpResult is not Success THEN

Print "HangUp of Comm Port Failed"

Remember that if you used DIAL to make the call on the comm port and used PRINT to send messages through the port, you should check the PrintDone attribute of the port before hanging up

Example 3 You can hang up on a port from the Command window of a controller as

follows:

Command Window HangUp (Comm3)

From the Command line, you must always name the comm port Before you attempt to hang up from the Command line, you should check the PrintDone attribute of the port from the Command line:

Pr Comm3 PrintDone

If PrintDone is True, then proceed to hang up.


HangUp, continued

Related Keywords

DIAL CLOSE OPEN READ InitModem WRITE

Products Supported

Available only on CX and CMX series controllers.

Modes Available



HOD System variable

Format HOD

Purpose Give the time in a decimal form from 0.0 to 23.99.

Remarks You cannot change the HOD. The controller automatically updates it.

Example 1 You can use the decimal form of the time to see if the time is past 5:30 a.m.

Program File

IF HOD is greater than 5.50 THEN . . . .

Example 2 A simple way to calculate the StartTime based on OutsiedAir could use

HOD as follows:

Program File

IF OutsideAir > 70 THEN GOTO CoolStart

Set StartTime = 8.00 - (70 - OutsideAir) * RateOfRise

IF HOD = StartTime THEN GOTO StartBldg

Related Keywords

HOUR MINUTE SECOND TOD

Alias HOUROFDAY

Products Supported


Modes Available



HOUR System variable

Format HOUR

Purpose Gives the current hour, from 0 to 23.

Remarks If the time is 5:23:02, the hour is 5.

Although the system automatically updates HOUR, you can reset it for daylight savings time or a change in time zone. You reset HOUR using the SET statement.

Example To take action every day at 5:00 a.m., you would check the hour with the

following statement:

Program File IF HOUR is Equal to 5 THEN GOTO StartUp

Related Keywords

HOD MINUTE SECOND TOD

Alias HR

Products Supported


Modes Available



IF..THEN..ELSE Statement

Format Format 1: IF expression THEN statement

Format 2: IF expressionTHEN statement statement statement . . ENDIF Format 3: IF number THEN statement ELSE statement Format 4: IF expression THEN statement statement statement . . ELSE statement statement statement . . ENDIF

Format Rules Here are some general rules for all formats:

• IF and THEN must always be on the same physical line.

• THEN can be followed by one statement on the same physical line or multiple statements on the physical lines that follow it.

• If a multi-line statement, ELSE must always be on a physical line by itself (Format 4).

• ELSE can be followed by one statement on the same physical line or multiple statements on the physical lines that follow it (Format 4).

• ENDIF is required to close an IF..THEN block when multiple statements occur after THEN or when one or more statements occur after ELSE.


IF..THEN..ELSE, continued

Format Rules continued

• When you use an IF statement after THEN, it must be nested under THEN and end with ENDIF (see "If Statement after Then" example).

Purpose Carries out a given statement or series of statements if the expression is true.

May also carry out a given statement or series of statements if the given expression is false.

Remarks Replace expressionr with any number or expression. The expression can be

a TRUE or FALSE comparison.

Replace statement with any complete instruction that tells the program what to do next or what action to take.

Actions For all formats, the following action takes place:

• If the expression is TRUE, the controller carries out the statement or statements following THEN.

• If the expression is FALSE, the controller skips those statements after THEN and does either of these:

⎯ Carries out the statements after ELSE (if ELSE is used).

⎯ Moves on to the next statement after the IF..THEN block.

Whether the number is TRUE or FALSE, when the IF..THEN statement is complete, program flow goes to the statement following the IF..THEN statement unless it is directed to another line using GOTO, Break or Continue.

If you have multiple statements after THEN, they must occur on consecutive (physical) lines, and the end of the statement must be marked with ENDIF.

CAUTION To use WHILE, FOR..NEXT, REPEAT..UNTIL or similar looping statements with IF..THEN..ELSE, you must use Format 2 or 4.

! !



Example of Format 1

To take a single action if the expression is true, you use Format 1, the single-line IF..THEN statement:

Program File IF TOD > = 1200 THEN GOTO Noon

If the time of day is greater than 12:00 noon, then program flow moves to the NOON line. Otherwise, the program continues with the next statement. Note: If you put THEN on a separate physical line from IF, a syntax error will occur.

Example of Format 2

To take several actions if the expression is true, and take no action if it is false, you use format 2:

Program File IF Wkd = Mon and TOD > 800 and TOD < 1600 THEN

Run the HeaterProg Run the FanCheckProg Stop the PumpProg

ENDIF

If the expression is false, the controller ignores the statements following THEN and moves to the statement after ENDIF.

Example of Format 3

To take a single action if an expression is true and another single action if it is false, you use Format 3:

Program File IF TOD > 800 & TOD < 1700 THEN Run DayPrg ELSE Run NiteProg

Notice that IF, THEN, AND ELSE must all be on one line in this format.



Example of Format 4

To take several actions if the expression is true or take several others if it is false, you use Format 4:

Program File

IF Temp < 72 AND Pump.Stat is OFF THEN

Turn ON the Fan Close the Damper

ELSE Turn OFF the Fan Open the Damper

ENDIF ELSE stands on a line by itself in this format and the end of the IF.. THEN..ELSE statement must be marked by ENDIF.

Example of Nested IFs

IF statements may be included (nested) within other IF statements.

Program File

IF the Wkd is Either Saturday OR Sunday THEN

Set Occupancy to Off

Stop the DailyProgram IF the Temp is Greater Than 70 THEN

Turn On the Fan Open the Damper

ELSE Turn OFF the Fan Open the Damper

ENDIF ELSE

Set Occupancy to On

Start the DailyProgram ENDIF



Example of Nested Ifs continued

Notice that each IF ends with an ENDIF. The inner (indented) ENDIF goes with the inner IF and ELSE, the outer ENDIF with the outer IF and ELSE. The ELSE and ENDIF that belong to the indented IF are aligned under that IF. Notice that the last IF ends first.

Example of an IF Statement after THEN

Take a look at the following statement with an IF after THEN:

Program File

The ELSE goes with this IF

IF the Wkd is Sat THEN IF the Hour is 1 THEN GOTO 1 ELSE GOTO 2

Which IF does the ELSE belong to? In this case the ELSE belongs to the IF the arrow points to. Why? Because it belongs to the closest previous IF on the same physical line. An IF..THEN statement that starts right after THEN is always a self-contained statement that ends on that physical line. To make the ELSE belong to the first IF, you must form a nested IF arrangement, as follows:

Program File The ELSE goes with this IF

IF the Wkd is Sat THEN

IF the Hour is 1 THEN GOTO 1

ENDIF ELSE

GOTO 2 ENDIF

In this nested IF statement, the ELSE belongs with the first IF, the one the arrow points to.



Example of a Nonzero Value number

Program File IF 10 THEN Start Burner

Here, since 10 is a nonzero value it is interpreted as TRUE and will cause the burner to fire up.

Related Keywords

AND IS. . . OR

Products Supported


Modes Available


CAUTION Be careful when programming with IF..THEN..ELSE statements if the number is any nonzero value. When this occurs, the number is interpreted as TRUE and the THEN block is executed.

! !


INFINET#COUNT System variable

Format INFINET#COUNT

Purpose Gives the number of Infinet controllers on-line on COMM1 or COMM2 of

the CX series controller you are connected to. Or gives the number of Infinet controllers on-line on the single Infinet on the CMX 9924 series controller you are working on.

Remarks The pound sign (#) can be either 1 (for COMM1 on a CMX 9924 series

controller), or 2 for COMM2. You cannot change the value of these system variables; the control system software updates them automatically. You may give the path to another CX series controller to find the total Infinet controllers on one of its comm ports.

Example 1 After you have pressed the LEARN button for an Infinet on COMM1, you

can print the value of INFINET1COUNT on the command line as follows:

Command Line Print INFINET1COUNT

Example 2

To find out how many Infinet controllers are online on COMM2 of the FLOOR6 99xx controller, you can print the value of INFINET2COUNT on the command line as follows:

Command Line Print Floor6 INFINET2COUNT


INFINET#COUNT, continued

Products Supported

CX series controllers and CMX 9924 controller.

Related Keywords

SELECT..CASE

Modes Available



InitModem Function

Format Format 1: InitModem (commport)

Format 2: InitModem ( ) Format 3: InitModem (commport)

Purpose Format 1: From a program, initializes the Infinity modem so it can connect

from a controller (often at a remote site) to another device, usually a workstation. Format 2: From a program, initializes the Infinity modem so it can connect from a controller (often on a remote network) to another device, usually a workstation, using a default commport. Format 3: From the Command line on a terminal, initializes the Infinity modem so it can connect from a controller (often on a remote network) to another device, usually a workstation.

Remarks

Before you can dial a call over a modem through a comm port, the modem must be correctly set up. To set the modem up correctly is to initialize it. To correctly initialize the port every time, use InitModem rather than setting the comm port attributes for the modem. InitModem applies only on a controller with an Infinity modem. The controller may also connect over a modem to a third-party controller with an ASCII interface, another Andover controller, a terminal, or a printer. Replace commport with a Controller port that physically connects to the modem. (Optional in a program.) The DefaultMode and Mode attributes of the port must be set to AutoSet or Printer. If, in a program, you do not indicate the comm port, InitModem uses the default port you set at the top of the program or in the File Configuration window. From the command line, you must indicate the comm port. If the port is in Printer mode when InitModem tries to initialize it, all characters waiting to print are discarded.


InitModem, continued

Remarks continued

InitModem automatically sets the following attributes of the port: Attribute Setting TrackCXD True

Baud Equal to the DefaultBaud attribute of the port. Parity None StopBits StopBit1 DataLength DataBits8 FlowControl CtsRts DTR On

You can use InitModem in a program or on the Command line. When you use InitModem from a program, you must use it on a labeled line by itself. After it executes, InitModem automatically moves the program to the next labeled line. The next labeled line should then test for the returned results of InitModem.

Tffsasfff

When you use InitModem, it returns right away, before the initialization is actually complete. For this reason, you should wait up to 10 seconds before checking for the result of InitModem (or before taking the next action if you used it from the Command line). While initializing the port, InitModem momentarily puts the port in Raw mode and then returns it to its DefaultPort mode. You cannot use PRINT or READ after InitModem. Instead, you must wait until the comm port returns to its original DefaultMode setting and then use DIAL or UpDate.

CAUTION Be careful not to use IinitModem to initialize Comm3 of a controller if you want to keep that port set up for a terminal since Comm3 does not automatically revert to the terminal settings if the the controller resets.

To revert Comm3 to its original settings after initializing it, you must manually set the FlowControl attribute of Comm3 to NoFlowControl either before or after you reset the controller.

If you do not change FlowControl, Comm3 remains set at CtsRts.

! !



Remarks continued

You wait the 10 seconds before you check the result of InitModem to be sure your program waits for the transition from Raw to the AutoSet or Printer. Or you could, instead, check to be sure that the Mode attribute of the port is AutoSet or Printer rather than Raw.

InitModem can return one of the following results:

• Success when the modem has been initialized successfully.

• Failure when one of the following situations exists: � Comport is not in the correct mode. � Default port is not defined. � Modem initialization failed.

The modem AT commands that InitModem executes for you are listed below.

Command Resulting Action AT&F Sets all modem setting to factory defaults. ATE Turns off screen display of commands and responses. ATV Enables short-form result codes. AT&C1 Sets CXD (DCD) to ON while carrier is present; to OFF if it is not. AT&D3 If DTR drops (becomes OFF), hang up the phone and reset the

modem. AT&S1 Activates DSR when connection has been established. ATS0=1 Sets the modem to answer automatically after one ring. AT\N3 Sets autoreliable mode to ON, turning on MNP error correction

protocols.

AT\A3 Sets the maximum block size in MNP to 256. AT%E1 Monitors line quality and automatically falls back/forward in error

correcting mode. AT%C1 Turns on the modem's MNP5 data compression/error correction

protocol. ATX3 Monitors busy signals. Sends only OK, Connect, Connect XXXX,

Ring, No Carrier, Error, No Dialtone, No Answer AT&W Stores the current modem setup in memory.

CAUTION While Raw mode is temporarily in effect, you cannot use READ to receive data from the port or PRINT to send data to the port. If you do use them, READ and PRINT both return failures.

! !



Example 1 Before dialing a call over the modem, to correctly initialize the port, you use the

InitModem keyword.

Because the actual initialization process may takes a few seconds, you should wait for a few seconds before checking the result. In this example, the line after InitializeModem waits 10 seconds before going to the CheckModemInit line, where it checks the result of InitModem.

Program File Numeric DialDelay, InitResult, DialResult, HangUpResult

SettingDelay:

DialDelay = 20 GOTO InitializeModem

InitializeModem:

InitResult = InitModem (Comm3) GOTO WaitForModInit

WaitForModInit:

IF TS > 10 THEN GOTO CheckModemInit CheckModemInit:

IF InitResult = Success THEN GOTO StartingDial . . .

CheckingDone:


HangUpResult = HangUp (Comm3) CheckingHangup:

IF HangUpResult is not Success THEN Print "Could Not Hang Up Port"

Example 2 If you are using InitModem inside a program, you can have the program

automatically initialize the DefaultPort of the program that you set in the File Configuration window or at the top of the program. Just give InitModem without a comm port name, as shown on the next page.



Example 2 continued

Program File Numeric DialDelay, InitResult, DialResult, HangUpResult

SettingDelay:

DialDelay = 20 GOTO InitializeModem

InitializeModem:

InitResult = InitModem ( ) WaitForModInit:

IF TS > 10 THEN GOTO CheckModemInit . . .

Example 3 You can use InitModem in the Command window of a controller. When you

do, you must include the name of the comm port:

Command Window

InitModem (Comm3)

If the result was successful, the port Mode should switch from Raw to its DefaultMode. You can check to be sure the result is successful by printing the Mode attribute of the port as follows:

Command Window

Pr Comm3 Mode

If it is still in Raw mode, the port is not yet ready to send data.

Related Keywords

DIAL HangUP

Products Supported

Available only on CX series controllers.

Modes Available



IOUCommFlt# System variable

Format IOUCommFltnumber

Purpose Gives ON if there is a communication fault (failure) on an input/output unit

(IOU) or OFF if there is no communication fault.

Remarks The number is any number or expression that gives the number of the IOU,

up to 16. If number is greater than the highest IOU number, the controller does not recognize the word. You may not put a space between IOUCommFlt and the number (#).


IF Floor1 IOUCommFlt2 = On THEN

Print "IOU #2 has failed" ENDIF

This statement can be for IOUCommFlt1, IOUCommFlt2, IOUCommFlt3, and so on, up to IOUCommFlt16 if you have that many IOUs.

Products Supported


Modes Available



IS… Operator

Format Greater-than-expression:

number > number

number IS GREATER THAN number

number IS ABOVE number

Greater-than-or-equal-to-expression: number > = number

number IS GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO number

Less-than-expression: number < number

number IS LESS THAN number

number IS BELOW number

Less-than-or-equal-to-expression: number <= number

number IS LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO number

Equal-expression: number = number

number IS number

number IS EQUAL TO number

number EQUALS number

Not-equal-expression: number < > number

number IS NOT number

number IS NOT EQUAL TO number

number DOES NOT EQUAL number

List-inclusion-expression: number IS IN list

number IS range (see range-expression below)

number IS EITHER list


IS…, continued

Format continued

List-exclusion-expression: number IS NOT IN list

number IS NOT range (see range-expression below)

number IS NEITHER list

Range-expression: number IS BETWEEN lower_number AND higher_number

number IS NOT BETWEEN lower_number AND higher_number

number IS lower_number THRU higher_number

number IS NOT lower_number THRU higher_number

Purpose Carries out the logical test you specify.

Remarks Replace number with any number or expression, including a date and time,

or name that stands for one. Replace list with two or more numbers (as defined above) with commas between them. Replace range with two numbers (as defined above), each marking one end of a range with THRU between them, or two numbers preceded by BETWEEN with AND between them.

Example 1 To compare two values, you usually place an IS... statement between IF and

THEN in an IF..THEN statement, as illustrated in the following examples. Note: Because THAN is optional, in the following pairs of statements, each statement gives the same instructions to the controller.


IS…, continued

Example 1 continued

Program File

IF Zone.Temp IS GREATER THAN 70 THEN…

IF Zone.Temp IS GREATER 70 THEN…

IF Zone.Temp IS ABOVE 70 THEN…

IF Zone.Temp IS LESS THAN 70 THEN…

IF Zone.Temp IS LESS 70 THEN…

IF Zone.Temp IS BELOW 70 THEN…

Example 2 The following the statements are grouped together and give the same

instructions to the controller, because TO is optional and EQUALS can stand alone without IS: Program File

IF Zone.Temp IS EQUAL TO 70 THEN…

IF Zone.Temp IS EQUAL 70 THEN…

IF Zone.Temp EQUALS 70 THEN…

IF Zone.Temp IS NOT EQUAL TO 70 THEN…

IF Zone.Temp DOES NOT EQUAL 70 THEN…

Example 3 With IS IN, IS EITHER, IS NOT IN, or IS NEITHER, the comma in the list

means OR. You can also use the word OR before the last item in the list, for example: Program File

IF Zone.Status IS IN Occupied, WarmUp THEN…

IF Zone.Status IS EITHER Occupied, WarmUp, or Reset THEN…

IF Zone.Status IS NOT IN Occupied, WarmUp THEN…

IF Zone.Status IS NEITHER Occupied, WarmUp THEN…

IF Zone.Status IS NOT 80 Through 81 THEN…


IS…, continued

Example 4 With IS BETWEEN and IS NOT BETWEEN, you always use AND. IS

BETWEEN with AND is equivalent to IS with THRU. The following statements are equivalent: Program File

IF Zone.Temp IS BETWEEN 70 AND 80 THEN…

IF Zone.Temp IS 70 THRU 80 THEN…

Note: With THRU or BETWEEN, do not put parentheses around the two elements being compared. The following are not allowed:

IF Zone.Temp IS (70 THRU 80) THEN…

IF Zone.Temp IS BETWEEN (70 THRU 80) THEN…

Program File

IF Zone.Temp IS NOT BETWEEN 70 AND 80 THEN…

IF Zone.Temp IS NOT 70 THRU 80 THEN…

IF Zone.Temp IS NOT (RoomTmp - 5) THRU (RoomTmp + 5)

IF Zone.Temp IS NOT RoomTmp - 5 THRU RoomTmp + 5

Note: With THRU or BETWEEN, always put the lower number first. The following are not allowed:

IF ZONE.TEMP IS 80 THRU 70 THEN...

IF ZONE.TEMP IS BETWEEN 80 AND 70 THEN...

Note: Both THRU and BETWEEN are always inclusive, so the following are both TRUE if the ZONE.TEMP is equal to 70 or 80:

IF ZONE.TEMP IS 70 THRU 80 THEN...

IF ZONE.TEMP IS BETWEEN 70 AND 80 THEN...


IS…, continued

Related Keywords

AND IF..THEN..ELSE OR WHILE

Products Supported


Modes Available



LCDPassword System variable

Format LCDPassword

Purpose Contains the password to the keypad of an Infinet controller.

Remarks Applies only to Infinet controllers with keypads (see "Products Supported").

You may only set the LCDPassword from the System Variable dialog box on a Continuum CyberStation. You must select the Infinet controller from the CyberStation before you can set its password.

Example To set the password for the keypad of an Infinet controller:

• Select the controller from the Continuum Explorer window. • Select the Infinity System Variable folder. • Select the LCDPassword system variable. • Enter the password in the Value text box of the System Variable dialog

box. Be sure the password is a number and only three digits, such as 237.

• Click on the Apply button and then the OK button.

Products Supported

BACnet series, SCX 900 and 920, i2 series, and LCX 810 controllers (with keypads only).

Modes Available

N/A


LEFT Function

Format LEFT (string, integer)

Purpose Returns a string consisting of the leftmost characters of string with a length

specified by integer.

Remarks Replace string with any text (word or words) or text expression.

Replace integer with any integer or integer expression up to the length of the string that tells how many characters you want from the string.

If integer is greater than the length of the string then the controller returns the entire string.

Example1 Program File

LVAL = LEFT("ABCDEF",2)

This statement returns "AB".

Example 2 Suppose that the TEXT variable contains "ROOM808"; the following

statement retrieves the word ROOM by carrying out the LEFT function:

Program File

LVAL = LEFT(TEXT, 4)

This statement returns "ROOM".

Alias FIRST

Products Supported

ACX series, BACnet series (except b3885, b3887), CX series, DCX 250, i2 series controllers (except i2885, i2887), and CyberStation.

Modes Available



LENGTH Function

Format LENGTH (string)

Purpose Returns the number of characters in the string.

Remarks The string is any text (word or words) or text expression.


RESULT = LENGTH ("ABCDE")

The LENGTH function returns 5 and the statement sets RESULT to 5.


RESULT = LENGTH ("")

The LENGTH function returns 0 and the statement sets RESULT to 0.

Alias LEN

Products Supported

ACX series, BACnet series (except b3885, b3887), CMX series, CX series, DCX 250, i2 series controllers (except i2885, i2887), and CyberStation.

Modes Available



LINE Statement

Format Format 1: LINE linename

Format 2: linename: Format 3: LINE integer Format 4: integer:

Purpose Labels a particular line in the program so that program control can later

branch or move to that line with the GOTO (or the more advanced BASED ON..GOTO) statement.

Remarks Replace linename with any single character or word that is not a keyword,

except: • C (reserved) • E (used for error detection)

Note: On CX series and CMX series controllers, and CyberStation you may label a line LINE E and the program automatically goes to that line when an error occurs. (See Example 5.) The line name can contain up to 16 characters, each an alphanumeric, underscore, or period character. You must begin the name with an alphabetic character. In the GOTO statement, the label must be spelled exactly as it is in the LINE statement, only you may interchange upper- and lowercase. Replace integer with a single whole number, except zero (0). LINE 0 is predefined for stopping the program, so you may not label a line LINE 0, but you can use GOTO line 0 to stop a program. Format 2 is the linename followed by a colon (:) on its own line.


LINE, continued

Remarks continued

Format 4 is the integer followed by a colon (:) on its own line. In this case, the line has a line number for a name. You can label lines to redirect program flow to any part of the program. For instance, you could return program flow to an earlier line, such as the first line. Or you could send program flow to a later line to branch into a specific set of actions. Note: When you use View Programs in a CX series controller menu system, one column tells you the line each executing file is on. If you use words for line labels, rather than numbers, the View Programs information becomes readily understandable. Labels such as COOLING or HEATING tell you exactly what the controller is doing.

Example 1 In the following example the first linename is “STARTUP,” labeled “LINE

STARTUP.” Follow the program flow to see how the line name directs the control of the program.

Program File LINE STARTUP

IF TEMP > 72 THEN GOTO COOLING

IF TEMP < 70 THEN GOTO HEATING

LINE HEATING

TURN ON THE HEAT

...

GOTO STARTUP

LINE COOLING

TURN ON THE BLOWER

...

GOTO STARTUP


LINE, continued

Example 2 This example is the same as the last, only each linename is labeled with the

name followed by a colon:

Program File STARTUP:

IF TEMP > 72 THEN GOTO COOLING

IF TEMP < 70 THEN GOTO HEATING

HEATING:

TURN ON THE HEAT

...

GOTO STARTUP

COOLING:

TURN ON THE BLOWER

...

GOTO STARTUP

Example 3 This example shows how to use an integer (lines 1 and 2) as a line label:

Program File LINE 1

START FAN1 GOTO 2

LINE 2 IF FAN1.STATUS IS ON THEN GOTO SHUTDOWN

LINE SHUTDOWN

IF ZONE1 TEMPERATURE IS LESS THAN 60 THEN STOP FAN1

GOTO 1

ENDIF


LINE, continued

Example 4 This example shows an integer with a colon as a line label:

Program File 1: START FAN1 GOTO 2

2: IF FAN1.STATUS IS ON THEN GOTO 3

3: IF ZONE1 TEMPERATURE IS LESS THAN 60 THEN

STOP FAN1 GOTO 1

ENDIF

Example 5 This example shows a program that has a line labeled E. The program

automatically goes to line E when an error occurs. If you do not have a line E, the software automatically disables the program. You might want the program to go to a special line when an error occurs to take such actions as the following: • Closing an open comm port (see the OPEN keyword) • Closing an open file (see the OpenFile keyword)

The following program goes to line E and closes the comm port when an error occurs.

Program File Numeric Result

Line OpenPort3

Result = OPEN (Comm3)

Line TestingOpen

If Result = SUCCESS Then GOTO PrintMenus


LINE, continued

Example 5 continued

Line PrintMenus

Run MenuDisplay

.

.

.

If Comm3 PrintDone = TRUE Then Goto ClosePort3

Line ClosePort3

Result = CLOSE (Comm3)

Line TestingClose

If Result = SUCCESS Then STOP

Line E Result = CLOSE (Comm3) Print "Emergency Exit ⎯ MenuProgram failed."

If you have a line E, when an error occurs, line E appears in the file status information. Remember that line E is available only on CyberStation, and CX series and CMX series controllers.

Related Keywords

BASEDON..GOTO GOTO (can also use LINE with GOTO) ROTATE RUN

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs


LINEPOINT Function

Format LINEPOINT (horizontal, vertical)

Purpose Places a dot (vertex) on the DCX 250 Display Unit screen at the horizontal

and vertical dots you indicate. This dot is where a long graphic line should bend or a polygon should begin a new side. The dots are called “line points.” The line points do not actually appear on the screen, but form the corners when lines or polygons print. Returns SUCCESS or FAILURE.

Remarks All LINEPOINT statements for the same line or polygon must always be

between a BEGINPOLYLINE statement and an ENDPOLYLINE statement. You can have up to 100 line points in a single graphic line (polyline) or polygon. You cannot begin a new polyline with BEGINPOLYLINE between LINEPOINT statements. You may draw only one polyline at a time. Replace horizontal with the number of dots (line points) from the left of the screen that the DCX 250 Display Unit should position the dot horizontally. Can be an integer from 1 to 320, or a name or expression that gives one. (See Appendix D for a description of the 250 screen layout.) Replace vertical with the number of dots (line points) from the bottom of the screen that the DCX 250 Display Unit should position the dot vertically. Can be an integer from 1 to 200, or a name or expression that gives one. (See Appendix D for a description of the 250 screen layout.) Horizontal and vertical positions set the location of the line point. You do not need parentheses if LINEPOINT is at the beginning of a statement.

Example 1 You can create a graph using LINEPOINT (see Figure 7-13) by giving the

dots (line points) you want to graph in a program. First, you must have a SETDISPLAY statement that sets the display to NOFILL. NOFILL always gives a graphic line rather than a polygon.


LINEPOINT, continued

Example 1 continued

Second, you must have a BEGINPOLYLINE statement. Third, you enter one LINEPOINT statement for each line point. Finally, you enter the ENDPOLYLINE statement. The program looks like this:


BEGINPOLYLINE

LINEPOINT 20, 30

LINEPOINT 60, 80

LINEPOINT 90, 50

LINEPOINT 150, 90

ENDPOLYLINE

Figure 7-13. Graph drawn with LINEPOINT.

��

��

�

��

�

�

��

��

250 SCREEN



Example 2 You can create a polygon (see Figure 7-14) using LINEPOINT by giving the

dots (line position) at the corners of the polygon.

First, you must have a SETDISPLAY statement that sets the display to FILL. FILL gives a polygon rather than a graphic line.

Second, you must have a BEGINPOLYLINE statement.

Third, you enter one LINEPOINT statement for each line point.

Finally, you enter the ENDPOLYLINE statement.

Program File SETDISPLAY (FILL)

BEGINPOLYLINE

LINEPOINT 20, 30

LINEPOINT 60, 80

LINEPOINT 90, 50

LINEPOINT 20,30

ENDPOLYLINE

Figure 7-14. Polygon drawn with LINEPOINT.

��

��

�

��

�

�

��

��

250 SCREEN



Example 3 You can use an array of values to create a graph with LINEPOINT. First

you decide how far apart you want the values horizontally for easy viewing. Then make each array element a vertical value. For instance, to graph temperatures, you can use an array that stores the temperatures for the vertical (vertical) values. To space the values 20 dots apart horizontally, you can multiply the index variable (1, 2, 3, 4, and 5) times 20 for the horizontal values, so the values are placed at 20, 40, 60, 80, and 100 dots across the screen. The program looks like this:


BEGINPOLYLINE

FOR INDEX = 1 to 5

LINEPOINT INDEX *20, OUTSIDEAIR[INDEX]

NEXT INDEX

ENDPOLYLINE

You enter the expression INDEX * 20 for the horizontal value, since the controller understands an expression that gives a number just as it does an actual number. Suppose these are the first five array values:

OUTSIDEAIR[1] = 45 OUTSIDEAIR[2] = 60 OUTSIDEAIR[3] = 52 OUTSIDEAIR[4] = 48 OUTSIDEAIR[5] = 30

The resulting line points are as follows: 20, 45 40, 60 60, 52 80, 48 100, 30 The graph appears on the 250 screen as shown on Figure 7-15.



Example 3 continued

Figure 7-15. Graph drawn with LINEPOINT using and array of values.

To magnify the differences between the values, and to center the graph vertically, you can multiply the temperature values by 2, changing the program as follows:


BEGINPOLYLINE

FOR INDEX = 1 to 5

LINEPOINT INDEX *20, OUTSIDEAIR[INDEX] *2

NEXT INDEX

ENDPOLYLINE

Now, 45 becomes 90, 60 becomes 120, and so on, so the vertical distance between values is greater. The graph also appears more centered on the 250 screen, as shown on Figure 7-16.

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

250 SCREEN



Example 3 continued

You can also label the graph and add scales as described under the LOCATE keyword.

Figure 7-16. Expanded vertically centered graph drawn with LINEPOINT

using and array of values.

Related Keywords

BEGINPOLYLINE ENDPOLYLINE LOCATE

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

�

��

250 SCREEN


LN Function

Format LN (integer_expression)

Purpose Returns the natural logarithm of integer_expression.

Remarks The integer_expression is any integer not equal to zero.


LGVAL = LN(3.2)

The natural log of 3.2 is returned and placed in LGVAL.

Products Supported

ACX series, BACnet series, CX series, DCX 250, i2 series, LCX series, SCX series, TCX series controllers, and CyberStation.

Modes Available



LOAD Statement on controller

Format Format 1: LOAD

Format 2: LOAD -o Format 3: LOAD -m Format 4: LOAD -o -m

Purpose Note: You must use this statement on a computer attached to a comm port

on the CX series controller. The computer must be running a terminal emulation program, such as HyperTerminal. For information about how to use LOAD on a CyberStation, see the next LOAD (Statement on workstation) keyword description on page 193. Note: Restricted to users with administration level access. Loads a saved file (called a “dump” file) from a disk into the controller. The dump file is an appropriately formatted ASCII file (see Appendix A) that you usually create using the SAVE command (see the SAVE keyword). You can also create a dump file manually, if you want. Format 1: Does not erase any points, files, or other items (objects) already on the controller, but loads information alongside them. Format 2: Updates any existing points or creates points, files, or other items on the controller using the information from the dump file. The “o” stands for “overwrite.” Overwriting is similar to recording over information on a tape recorder. Format 3: While loading, sends messages about any errors that occur to a Messages window. The "m" stands for "message". Format 4: While loading, erases any points, files, or other items on the controller and replaces them with information from the dump file and also displays messages about errors that occur. The messages appear in the Messages window.


LOAD (controller), continued

Remarks You must use a communication package with an ANSI terminal emulator

such as HyperTerminal in order to send a dump file from a computer on the network to the controller. The dump file must be sent either immediately before or after you enter the LOAD command into the controller's command line window.

On a CX series or CMX 220 controller, the LOAD command allows up to 60 seconds to start receiving the dump file.

Once you have sent the file from the computer, you return to the talk-through mode on the computer so that you can resume working with the controller. (Refer to Appendix C for information on how to set up an ASCII file to load.)

Example 1 In the following example, you load a dump file onto a controller so that it

adds to the items on the controller, but does not replace items already present:

Command Line window on controller LOAD

On a terminal attached to a controller, within 60 seconds you type a command to send the file from the communications package on the computer. The command is determined by the communications package used. The following is an upload command from HyperTerminal:

Host Computer running HyperTerminal Upload C: addpnts



Example 2 In the following example, you load a dump file from a disk into the

controller to replace any points, programs, or other items (objects) on the controller with information from the dump file:

Command Line window on controller LOAD –o

On the terminal, within 60 seconds you type a command to send the file from the communications package on the computer. The command is determined by the communications package used. The following is an upload command from HyperTerminal:

Host Computer Running HyperTerminal upload C: ctrlinfo

Example 3 In the following example, while the dump file or database reloads into the

controller, the controller sends messages to the Messages window:

Command Line window on controller LOAD –m

On the terminal, within 60 seconds you type a command to send the file from the communications package on the computer. The command is determined by the communications package used. The following is an upload command from HyperTerminal:

Host Computer Running HyperTerminal upload C: ctrlinfo

Example 4 In the following example, the dump file replaces any points, programs, or

other items on the controller with information from the file, and the controller sends messages to the Messages window on the terminal during the reload.



Example 4 continued

Command Line window on controller LOAD –o –m

You may put the options in any order, -m first or -o first. The -m option applies only when loading the controller from a disk via a terminal emulation program. On the terminal, within 60 seconds you type a command to send the file from the communications package on the computer. The command is determined by the communications package used. The following is an upload command from HyperTerminal:

Host Computer Running HyperTerminal upload C: database

Related Keywords

SAVE

Alias RELOAD

Products Supported

CX series controllers and CM X220.

Modes Available

Command lines.


LOAD Statement on workstation

Format Format 1: LOAD object_list -o

Format 2: LOAD object_list -c -o Format 3: LOAD object_list any_combination_of_options -o Format 4: LOAD filename -u -a -o -x

Purpose Note: You must use this statement on a workstation. running CyberStation

software. The workstation must store the database or be networked to a server that stores the database For information about how to use LOAD on a terminal connected to a CX series or CMX 220 controller, see the previous keyword description on page189. On a CyberStation, you use this command to reload a controller using information you have saved and stored in the database on the server. Format 1: Updates any existing points or creates points, files, or other items on the controller using the information from the dump file. The “o” stands for “overwrite.” Overwriting is similar to recording over information on a tape recorder. Format 2: Loads the information you indicate but first displays a window where you confirm your choice of controllers to reload. The “c” stands for “confirm.” When you use LOAD from the command line, you do not have to use this format; LOAD automatically gives you the confirmation window. If, however, you use LOAD in a program, to have a confirmation window appear, you must use this format. Format 3: Loads the information you indicate using any combination of the “options” from the above formats: –c (confirm). The –o (overwrite) is always required.


LOAD (workstation), continued

Purpose continued

Format 4: Loads a filename with either a .CSV (Comma Separated Variable) or .dmp extension. You must choose only one of these three options:

• u (update) this is the default

• a (append)

• o (override)

The x option stands for distribute personnel.

Remarks Restricted to users with a minimum of configure level access.

Replace object_list with a list of controllers, Infinet controllers, or other objects that are stored in a controller, since you are loading the information into a controller. The objects should all be of the same class; for instance, all numeric points or all programs. If the list is of a class other than Controller or InfinetCtlr, the class list should contain only objects from the same controller and each name should include the full path. Replace any_combination_of_options with one or more of the options:–c (confirm) and/or –v (validate). The –o (overwrite) is always required. You can use LOAD from the command line or in a program. If you use it in a program, you must use LOAD on a line by itself. You do not have to indicate that the program should then go to the next line, because it automatically proceeds to the next line after completing the load. Once you begin the LOAD, you can see the actions listed in the Distribution Properties window on the CyberStation.

Example 1 To load the information from a workstation database into the FLOOR1 CX

series controller and replace any objects (points, programs, and others) already present on that controller, you give the name of the controller and then -o, as follows:

Command Line LOAD Floor1 –o



Example 2 In the following example, from a workstation, you load only the information

about the TEMP1, TEMP2, and TEMP3 points into the FLOOR1 controller:

Command Line LOAD Floor1 Temp1, Floor1 Temp2, Floor1 Temp3 –o

Other information on the controller, such as Infinet controllers and other points, remains intact..

Example 3 You can use LOAD from a program as well as from the command line. For

instance, to reload a controller that has been reset by some strong, external interference, you may want to load the information from the database when the FREEMEM system variable is greater than a predetermined value:

Program File LINE CheckingMem

IF FREEMEM > 18,000 THEN GOTO UpdateMem

LINE UpdateMem

LOAD Floor4 –o

LINE EndingLoad

GOTO CheckingMem

Notice that the program does not require a GOTO after the LOAD statement. The program automatically proceeds to the next line.

Example 4 Normally, when you use LOAD from the command line, the software

automatically displays a window where you can confirm the load. To have the software display that window when you use LOAD in a program, you must use -c with the LOAD command:

Program File LINE UpdateMems

LOAD Floor4, Floor5, Floor6, Floor7 –c –o




LOAD Personnelfile.CSV –a

Personnel distribution is automatically done with CSV files.

Example 6 :

Program File LOAD Floor1.dmp -o

Example 7 :

Program File LOAD PersonnelFile.dmp –x -o

The –x option instructs the LOAD command to distribute personnel records to the controller(s). Personnel distribution usually takes place when something about their record, such as the card number, has changed.

Related Keywords

SAVE

Alias RELOAD

Products Supported

CyberStation

Modes Available



LOCATE Function

Format LOCATE (left, bottom)

Purpose Places the next text you print on the DCX 250 Display Unit screen at the

location you indicate with left and bottom, indicating the number of dots from the left and from the bottom. The next text you print appears at the location. Returns SUCCESS or FAILURE.

Remarks To place text accurately, locate it in the position where the lower left corner

of the first character should begin. You usually follow each LOCATE statement with a PRINT statement. Replace left with the number of character dots from the left of the screen that the DCX 250 Display Unit should position the text horizontally. Can be an integer from 1 to 320, or a name or expression that gives one. (See Appendix D for a description of the 250 screen layout.) Replace bottom with the number of character dots from the bottom of the screen that the DCX 250 Display Unit should position the text vertically. Can be an integer from 1 to 200, or a name or expression that gives one. (See Appendix D for a description of the 250 screen layout.) You do not need parentheses if LOCATE is at the beginning of a statement.

Example 1 Suppose you want to print text on the screen to label two buttons. First, you

draw the buttons with, for instance, DRAWRECTANGLE. Then you locate the text with the LOCATE function and print the button label, as follows:


DRAWRECTANGLE 50, 100, 100, 120 DRAWRECTANGLE 50, 50, 100, 80 LOCATE 125, 105 PRINT "OPEN VALVE" LOCATE 125, 85 PRINT "CLOSE VALVE"


LOCATE, continued

Example 1 continued

Notice that you do not need the parentheses in this case, because LOCATE is at the beginning of a statement. (You can, however, use the parentheses to make the program easier to read.)

The labels appear next to the buttons as show in Figure 7-17.

Figure 7-17. Using the LOCATE function to label buttons.

Example 2 Suppose you want to put labels on a graph, such as the one discussed in

Example 3 of the LINEPOINT keyword. You use LOCATE to first position the title of the graph, then locate the temperature labels, as follows:


LOCATE 20, 150 PRINT "Outside Air Temp–Occupied Hours" SETDISPLAY (NOFILL) BEGINPOLYLINE FOR INDEX = 1 to 5 LINEPOINT INDEX *20, OUTSIDEAIR[INDEX] * 2 NEXT INDEX

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�� CLOSE VALVE

OPEN VALVE

Lower left corner at 125, 85

��

��

Lower left corner at 125, 105

��

��

250 SCREEN


LOCATE, continued

Example 2 continued

ENDPOLYLINE LOCATE 20, 130 PRINT "70" LOCATE 20, 100 PRINT "50" LOCATE 20, 70 PRINT "30" LOCATE 35, 45 PRINT " 8 10 12 14 16" DRAWLINE 30, 42,110, 42 DRAWLINE 30, 42, 30, 145 The title appears where you position the text as shown in Figure 7-18.

Figure 7-18. Using the LOCATE function to label a graph. For the temperature scale along the left side, you must place each temperature individually. For the horizontal list of hours, you can use a single LOCATE statement followed by a single PRINT statement.

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

Outside Air Temp–Occupied Hours

70

50

30

8 10 12 14 16

�

�

��

250 SCREEN


LOCATE, continued

Related Keywords

PRINT

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs


LOG Function

Format LOG (integer_expression)

Purpose Returns the base 10 logarithm of integer_expression.

Remarks The integer_expression is an integer greater than zero.


RESULT = LOG(10)

This statement sets RESULT equal to 1.

Products Supported

ACX series, BACnet series (except b3885, b3887), CX series, DCX 250, i2 series (except i2885, i2887), LCX series, SCX series, TCX series controllers, and CyberStation.

Modes Available


Andover Controls Corporation

7-202

MAXIMUM Function

Format Format 1: MAXIMUM (numeric_list)

Format 2: MAXIMUM (numeric_log) Format 3: MAXIMUM (numeric_array)

Purpose Format 1: Finds the maximum number in a list of numeric values.

Format 2: Finds the maximum number in a numeric log. Format 3: Finds the maximum number in a numeric array.

Remarks Replace numeric_list with one or more numbers or names that stand for

numbers, separated by commas. Replace numeric_log with any defined log that contains numbers. Replace numeric_array with any defined array that contains numbers. Items in the list must all be either numeric expressions, numbers, or variables that contains numbers. If any of the items in the list in Format 1 is an array or a log but does not indicate an element number, the controller retrieves the current value of the point and treats it like any other single item in the list.

Example 1 The MAXIMUM function finds the maximum number in a list of variables

as follows:

Program File TOPNUMBER = MAXIMUM (ZONE1, ZONE2, ZONE4)

The TOPNUMBER variable is assigned the maximum value found.

Plain English Language Reference 7- 203

MAXIMUM, continued

Example 2 You have a log called AV.TEMP that holds the average temperature for each

of the last five days. You can use the MAXIMUM function to find the maximum temperature:

Program File WKLYMAX = MAXIMUM (AV.TEMP)

If AV.TEMP contains 110, 114, 112, 108, 109, MAXIMUM returns 114 and the program statement sets WKLYMAX to 114.

Example 3 You can find the maximum number of kilowatts in the array of variables as

follows:

Program File TOP = MAXIMUM (KW)

Example 4 You find the highest of several temperatures, including the current value of

TEMPLOG, as follows:

Program File HOURLYAVG = MAXIMUM (TMP801, TMP802, TEMPLOG)

In this instance, TEMPLOG is interpreted as the current value of TEMPLOG.

Alias MAX

Products Supported


Modes Available



7-204

MAXITEM Function

Format Format 1: MAXITEM (numeric_list)

Format 2: MAXITEM (numeric_log) Format 3: MAXITEM (numeric_array)

Purpose Format 1: Finds the position (in a list) of the largest number. For instance,

returns 1 if the largest number is the first one in the list. Format 2: Finds the index position of the largest number in the log. Format 3: Finds the index position of the largest number in the array.


numbers, separated by commas. Replace numeric_log with any defined log that contains numbers. Replace numeric_array with any defined array that contains numbers. If any of the items in the list in Format 1 is an array or a log, the controller retrieves the first item from the array or log and treats it like any other single item in the list.

Example 1 To find the position of the largest number in a series of numbers, you enter

the series in the parentheses:

Program File TEMP1 = 60 TEMP2 = 65 TEMP 3 = 70 TEMP 4 = 67 MAXITEM (TEMP1, TEMP2, TEMP3, TEMP4)

The MAXITEM statement returns 3, because the third item in the list contains the largest number.


MAXITEM, continued

Example 2 To find the index position of the largest number in a log, you give the log

name in parentheses:

Program File MAXITEM (TEMP)

Example 3 To find the index position of the largest number in an array, you give the

array name in parentheses:

Program File MAXITEM (KW)

Example 4 You find the position of the highest of several temperatures in a list,

including the current value of TEMPLOG, as follows:

Program File HOURLYAVG = MAXITEM (TMP801, TMP802, TEMPLOG)


Products Supported


Modes Available



7-206

MessageWindow Constant

Format MESSAGEWINDOW

Purpose Refers to the message window on a CyberStation.

Remarks To have PRINT statement text appear in the message window of a

CyberStation, use MESSAGEWINDOW in a statement. All PRINT statements automatically send text to the message window unless you change the default port of a program to either a printer or the Status line (see the StatusLine keyword).

Example If you have assigned an object other than the MESSAGEWINDOW as the

default port of your program, you can still send a message to the message window using MESSAGEWINDOW in a PRINT statement:

Program File PRINT "Cannot open the file" TO THE MESSAGEWINDOW

Related Keywords

STATUSLINE

Products Supported

CyberStation

Modes Available



MicroPower System variable

Format MicroPower


ACX 781 controller. You turn off the battery power after AC power fails, so that you preserve the life of the battery and extend the length of time the controller can retain memory on battery backup.


of AC power. When you set MicroPower to OFF and AC power is not present, you shut off power to the ACX 781 controller. Leave MicroPower set to ON while AC power is up. If AC power has not failed, setting MicroPower to OFF has no affect. Instead of turning off the CPU, it resets itself back to ON at the end of the scan after it has determined that AC power is present and a shutdown has not occurred. After AC power goes down the battery power takes over. Setting MicroPower to OFF turns off battery power to the CPU at the end of the scan that was in process when the AC power failed. As a result, the controller does not operate at all until AC power returns. When AC power returns to normal, the ACX 781 controller begins the scan at the first program in the firing order list and all programs continue on the line that they were on before you turned off the battery power to the CPU. To retain memory for the longest possible time, you should turn off MicroPower as soon as possible after PowerFail becomes ON.


7-208

MicroPower, continued

Example When the AC power fails on the ACX 781, the PowerFail system variable

becomes ON. You can have PowerFail trigger the following looping program to turn off the 781 CPU if the power remains off for 2 minutes:


IF PowerFail Is On THEN Goto TimePowerDown

Else Stop

Endif

Line TimePowerDown IF TM > 2 THEN GOTO TurnOffCPU

Line TurnOffCPU IF PowerFail Is On THEN

Set MicroPower To Off

Else Stop

Endif

Notice that since the PowerFail variable triggers the program whenever the system variable changes, you must test to be sure that PowerFail is ON, not OFF, before setting MicroPower to OFF.

Products Supported

ACX 781 controller.

Modes Available



MID Function

Format MID (string, offset, number)

Purpose Returns a string number characters long extracted from string starting at

offset.


Replace offsett with the number (or a variable that contains the number) of the position where you want the controller to start extracting the string of characters.

If offset is greater than the length of the string expression, the MID returns the empty string, "".

Replace number with any number or expression. Tells how many characters you want extracted from the text string.


MIDSTR = MID("ABCDE", 2, 3)

MID returns "BCD" and the statement sets MIDSTR to "BCD".


PARTSTR = MID("ABCDE", 9, 2)

Since the offset (9) is greater than string length, the statement returns an empty string ("").

Products Supported

BACnet series (except b3885, b3887), CX series, CMX series, DCX 250, i2 series controllers (except i2885, i2887), and CyberStation.

Modes Available



7-210

MINIMUM Function

Format Format 1: MINIMUM (numeric_list)

Format 2: MINIMUM (numeric_log) Format 3: MINIMUM (numeric_array)

Purpose Format 1: Finds the minimum number in a list of numeric values.

Format 2: Finds the minimum number in a numeric log. Format 3: Finds the minimum number in a numeric array.


numbers. Replace numeric_log with any defined log that contains numbers. Replace numeric_array with any defined array that contains numbers. Items in the list must all be either numbers, numeric expressions, or variables that contains numbers. If any of the items in the list in Format 1 is an array or a log but does not indicate an element number, the controller retrieves the current value of the point and treats it like any other single item in the list.

Example 1 The MINIMUM function finds the minimum number in the following list of

variables:

Program File BOTNUMBER = MINIMUM (ZONE1, ZONE2, ZONE3, ZONE4)

The BOTNUMBER variable is assigned the minimum value found.


MINIMUM, continued

Example 2 Suppose you have a log or array called AV.TEMP that holds the average

temperature for each of the last five days. You can use the MINIMUM function to find the minimum temperature:

Program File WKLYMIN = MINIMUM (AV.TEMP)

If AV.TEMP contains 110, 114, 112, 108, 109, MINIMUM returns 108 and the program statement sets WKLYMIN to 108.

Example 3 You can find the minimum number of kilowatts in the array of variables as

follows:

Program File BOTTOM = MINIMUM (KW)

Example 4 You find the minimum of several temperatures, including the current value

of TEMPLOG, as follows:

Program File HOURLYAVG = MINIMUM (TMP801, TMP802, TEMPLOG)


Products Supported


Modes Available



7-212

MINITEM Function

Format Format 1: MINITEM (numeric_list)

Format 1: MINITEM (numeric_log) Format 1: MINITEM (numeric_array)

Purpose Format 1: Finds the position (in a list) of the smallest number. For instance,

returns 1 if the smallest number is the first one in the list. Format 2: Finds the index position of the smallest number in the log. Format 3: Finds the index position of the smallest number in the array.

Remarks Replace numberic_list with one or more numbers or names that stand for

numbers, separated by commas. Replace numeric_log with any defined log that contains numbers. Replace numeric_array with any defined array that contains numbers. If any of the items in the list in Format 1 is an array or a log, the controller retrieves the first item from the array or log and treats it like any other single item in the list.

Example 1 To find the position of the smallest number in a series of numbers, you enter

the series in the parentheses:

Program File TEMP1 = 60 TEMP2 = 65 TEMP 3 = 70 TEMP 4 = 67 MINITEM (TEMP1, TEMP2, TEMP3, TEMP4)

The MINITEM statement returns 1, because the first item in the list contains the smallest number.


MINITEM, continued

Example 2 To find the index position of the smallest number in a log, you give the log

name in parentheses:

Program File BOTNUMBER = MINITEM (TEMP)

Example 3 To find the index position of the smallest number in an array, you give the

array name in parentheses:

Program File BOTNUMBER = MINITEM (KW)

Example 4 You find the position of the lowest of several temperatures in a list,


Program File HOURLYAVG = MINITEM (TMP801, TMP802, TEMPLOG)


Products Supported


Modes Available



7-214

MINUS Operator

Format number MINUS number

Purpose Subtracts number from number.



KWH.PM = KWH.DAY MINUS KWH.AM


KWH.PM = KWH.DAY - KWH.AM

Alias - (minus sign)

Products Supported


Modes Available



MINUTE System variable

Format MINUTE

Purpose Gives the exact minute of the current hour, from 0 to 59.

Remarks The minute is the minute on the system clock, so if the time is 5:23:02, the

minute is 23. You cannot change the MINUTE. The current device (the Infinity controller, the Infinet controller or the CyberStation) automatically updates it.

Example Suppose you have eight programs to run every hour. To avoid consuming

scan time by running all of the programs at once, you could run two programs in each quarter of every hour:

Program File IF MINUTE EQUALS 15 THEN

RUN THE SYSTEM.CHECK

RUN THE POWER.USAGE

ENDIF

IF MINUTE EQUALS 30 THEN RUN THE TEMP.CHECK RUN THE TEMP.REPT ENDIF

IF MINUTE EQUALS 45 THEN RUN THE FAN.CHECK RUN THE DAMPER.CHECK ENDIF

IF MINUTE EQUALS 0 THEN RUN THE HEATER.CHECK RUN THE CO.CHECK ENDIF

The SYSTEM.CHECK and POWER.USAGE programs now run at 15 minutes after the hour every hour of every day.


7-216

MINUTE, continued

Example continued

The TEMP.CHECK and TEMP.REPT programs now run at 30 minutes after the hour every hour of every day, 24 hours a day and 365 days a year. The FAN.CHECK and DAMPER.CHECK programs now run at 45 minutes after the hour every hour of every day, 24 hours a day and 365 days a year. The HEATER.CHECK and CO.CHECK programs now run on the hour every hour of every day, 24 hours a day and 365 days a year.

Related Keywords

HOD HOUR SECOND TOD

Alias MIN

Products Supported


Modes Available



MOD Operator

Format number MOD number

Purpose Returns the remainder of one number divided by another.

Remarks Each number must be a number or expression.


EXTRA = 5 MOD 2

The equation divides 5 by 2 and gives a remainder of 1, so EXTRA is set to 1.

Alias REMAINDER

Products Supported


Modes Available



7-218

ModemPower System variable (programmable)

Format ModemPower


modem inside the door of the CX series controller. You turn off the modem when AC power fails. This way you preserve the life of the battery and extend the length of time the controller can operate on battery backup.


of AC power. Leave MODEMPOWER set to ON while AC power is up. If AC power has not failed, setting MODEMPOWER to OFF has no immediate affect as long as the modem is operating on AC power, not DC. However, once AC power goes down and battery power takes over, MODEMPOWER turns off power to the modem without warning. You can turn the modem on and off with the MODEMPOWER keyword as long as AC power is off.

Example When the AC power fails, the PowerFail system variable becomes ON. You

can have PowerFail trigger the following looping program to turn off the modem if the power remains off for 10 minutes.


IF PowerFail Is On THEN GOTO TimePowerDown

Else Stop

Endif

Line TimePowerDown IF TM > 10 THEN GOTO TurnOffModem


ModemPower, continued

Example continued

Line TurnOffModem IF PowerFail Is On THEN

Turn ModemPower To Off

Else Stop

Endif

Notice that since the PowerFail variable triggers the program whenever the system variable changes, you must test to be sure that PowerFail is ON, not OFF, before setting ModemPower to OFF.

Related Keywords

PowerFail CPUPower DCXPower MicroPower

Products Supported

CX series, and CMX series controllers.

Modes Available



7-220

MONTH System variable

Format MONTH

Purpose Gives you the current month of year, from January to December.

Remarks You cannot change the MONTH. The system automatically updates it.

When printed, the month is spelled out as January, February, and March, and so on through December. You may, however, compare the MONTH to: • The numbers (1 through 12). • The abbreviated three-letter names (first three letters). • The entirely spelled out month All values for MONTH are listed below: Constant Short Name Long Name

1 JAN January 2 FEB February 3 MAR March 4 APR April 5 MAY May 6 JUN June 7 JUL July 8 AUG August 9 SEP September 10 OCT October 11 NOV November 12 DEC December

Example 1 You can use the spelled out (long) names for printing or for comparing to an

actual month:

Program File IF MONTH Is December THEN Print MONTH

Output December


MONTH, continued

Example 2 You can use the short names for comparing the month:

Program File IF MONTH Is Either JUN, JUL, AUG, OR SEP THEN….

Example 3 You can use the constants 1 through 12 for comparing the month:

Program File IF MONTH Is 2 THEN….

Alias MTH

Related Keywords

DAYOFMONTH DAYOFYEAR YEAR

Products Supported


Modes Available



7-222

MOVE Statement

Format Format 1: MOVE output_point_list TO number

Format 2: MOVE output_point_list TO number %

Purpose Set the point or points in output_point_list to number.

Remarks Replace output_point_list with one or more output point names or variables

with commas between them. Top and bottom of scale must be set for each point. Replace number with any number or expression, including a date and time or name that stand for one. MOVE converts engineering units to electrical units to control the output point, using the top and bottom of scale for that point. The percent sign is optional.

Example 1 If Valve2 has engineering units of 0 to 90 degrees, and the corresponding

electrical units are 0 to 20 mA, when you move the setting of Valve2 to 45, it sets to 10 mA. To have the engineering units automatically converted to electrical units, you use MOVE as follows:

Program File MOVE Valve2 To 45

Example 2 For this valve, assume engineering units of 0 to 1 where 0 is closed and 1 is

open and corresponding electrical units of 0 to 20 mA. Moving the setting of Valve2 to 50% gives .5. At .5, the valve is set to the corresponding value of 10 mA.

Program File MOVE Valve2 To 50%


MOVE, continued

Related Keywords

SET

Alias MODULATE

Products Supported


Modes Available



7-224

NewAlarmCount System variable

Format NewAlarmCount

Purpose Variable the controller maintains that indicates the number of new alarms on

a CX series controller and all of its Infinet controllers since the last time the alarms were sent to the workstation.

Remarks The controller automatically updates NewAlarmCount and you cannot set it.

Even when the NewAlarmCount is disabled, the controller updates it. The number increments (increases by one) each time a new alarm occurs. After the alarms are sent to a workstation, subtracts the number delivered from the NewAlarmCount. If the controller fails to deliver the alarms to the workstation, and the controller has subtracted them from the NewAlarmCount, it adds them to the total once again. NewAlarmCount exists only on CX series and CMX series controllers and counts all alarms that occur on them and on any of its Infinet controllers. The controller also adjusts NewAlarmCount when you take any of the following actions: • Delete the point an alarm is associated with • Delete an alarm (that has been counted) from the workstation • Change a point (via the workstation) so it no longer associates with

the alarm

NewAlarmCount retains the number of undelivered alarms even when the controller goes off-line or the network is down.

Example 1 You can also use the NewAlarmCount in a program to see how many alarms

have not been sent to the workstation and take appropriate action:

Program File IF NewAlarmCount > 0 THEN…


NewAlarmCount, continued

Products Supported

CX series, CMX series controllers.

Modes Available



7-226

NOFILL Constant

Format NOFILL

Purpose Sets the graphics on the DCX 250 Display Unit screen to lines rather than

filled solids when you use it with SETDISPLAY.

Remarks The graphics on the 250 screen may be filled (FILL) or not filled (NOFILL).

Example You set the graphics on the 250 screen to lines, as follows:

Program File SetDisplay (NOFILL)

Related Keywords

FILL SETDISPLAY

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs


NOT Operator

Format NOT number

Purpose Logically negates or inverts a number or expression, changing 0 (FALSE or

OFF) to 1 (TRUE or ON) or vice versa.

Remarks The number is any number or expression. However, the number is

interpreted as zero or nonzero, where zero is OFF or FALSE and nonzero is ON or TRUE. If you prefer, you may use parentheses around the number.

Example In the statement below, suppose OCCUPIED can be ON or OFF. When

OCCUPIED is ON, placing NOT in front of it tests for the opposite condition, OFF.

Program File IF NOT OCCUPIED THEN…

Products Supported


Modes Available



7-228

NUMERIC Statement

Format NUMERIC namelist [array_size_number]

Purpose Creates and defines one or more names as local numeric variables. You

define the variables inside a program for use only in that particular program. Each variable may be a single variable or an array. You specify an array by including the array_size_number when you define it.

Remarks Replace namelist with the name of the numeric variable you are defining, or

a series of numeric variables separated by commas. Replace array_size_number with a number up to 32,767 that tells the controller how many positions are in the array. You must define all local numeric variables at the top of your program.

Example 1 Suppose that you are averaging the values of ten temperatures. The points

that take the outside air temperature have been defined using menus and windows, but you define the variable that contains the average using NUMERIC:

Program File NUMERIC Avg.Temp

Avg.Temp = Average (Temp1, Temp2, …., Temp10)

Print Avg.Temp

Example 2 You can define a series of numeric variables in a single statement:

Program File NUMERIC Ave.Oat, Ave.Temp, Fan.Sp


NUMERIC, continued

Example 3 You can define an array of numeric variables in a single statement:

Program File NUMERIC Fan.Sp [20]

Example 4 You can define several arrays of numeric variables and several single

variables in a single statement:

Program File NUMERIC Fan.Sp [20], Pump.Sp, Ahu.Sp [10], Heat.Sp

Related Keywords

DATETIME STRING

Alias NUMBER

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs


7-230

NUMTOSTR Function

Format NUMTOSTR( number )

Purpose Converts a number in a numeric variable or other numeric form to a string

variable so it can be used in string operations. Returns the converted string value.


Once a number is in a string variable, it can be used in string operations.

Example The following program translates the number 240 into a string:

Program File STRING Trans

Trans = NUMTOSTR(240)

Print Trans 'prints string 240.

Related Keywords

STRTONUM

Products Supported

BACnet series (except b3885, b3887) , CX series, CMX series, DCX 250, i2 series controllers (except i2885, i2887), and CyberStation.

Modes Available



Section 6 Keywords O through R

OBJECT Statement

Format OBJECT var_namelist

Purpose Creates and defines one or more local variables that can each hold the name

of an item (also called an "object"). An object is any defined item on a controller or workstation. You define the local variables inside a program for use only in that particular program.

Remarks The local OBJECT variable is somewhat like a numeric, string, or datetime

local variable—only it stands for any item (also called an object) in a workstation, network controller or Infinet controller. The local OBJECT variable name can be up to 16 alphabetic and numeric characters, as long as it begins with a letter of the alphabet. You use OBJECT with OPENLIST, GETOBJECT, and CLOSELIST. See these related keywords for extensive examples.

Example 1 You use OBJECT to assign a local OBJECT variable name to a single class

of items in a controller:

Program File OBJECT VAVPOINT

You can later open a series of points with OPENLIST.


OBJECT, continued

Example 2 You use OBJECT to assign local OBJECT variable names to many classes

of items in a controller:

Program File OBJECT CHILLERPOINT, CHILLERPROG, CHILLERDATA

You can later open each list of items with OPENLIST

Example 3 You can set an object variable to any object and then read or set any

attributes of that object:

Program File OBJECT X

X = FLOOR4\TEMP1

PRINT x VALUE

Prints the value of TEMP1

Related Keywords

CLOSELIST GETOBJECT OPENLIST

Products Supported

BACnet Series, CMX series, CX series, i2 series controllers, and CyberStation.

Modes Available

Programs

Plain English Language Reference 7 - 233

OFF Constant

Format OFF

Purpose Used in expressions to indicate an item is OFF or set to bottom of scale

Remarks OFF is always numeric, so it can be compared to input, output, and numeric

points or variables in a comparison expression.


Turn the Lobby_Light OFF


IF the Lobby_Light is OFF THEN Turn Off the Heat

Products Supported


Modes Available



ON Constant

Format ON

Purpose Used in expressions to indicate an item is ON or set to top of scale.

Remarks ON is always numeric, so it can be compared to input, output, and numeric



Turn ON the Lobby_Light


IF the Lobby_Light is ON THEN Turn On the Heat

Products Supported


Modes Available



-ON Constant

Format -ON

Purpose Used in expressions to indicate a tristate point is set to -ON.

Remarks -ON is always numeric, so it can be compared to input, output, and numeric



IF the Flow is greater than Setpoint THEN set the Damper to -ON

Products Supported


Modes Available



OPEN Function (comm port)

Format OPEN (comm_port)

Purpose Lets you direct information to or from a comm port, rather than

automatically sending that information to the terminal screen or Message Window. You can open a port to call on a modem or to receive a call. Returns SUCCESS if the comm port opens without a problem. Returns FAILURE if the comm port does not open. Once OPEN executes, the controller automatically moves to the next labeled line. You never need GOTO after OPEN.

Remarks The comm_port names the comm port that you wish to use can also be the

path to a comm port. You may use OPEN as a function only on comm ports. Verify that the mode of the comm port you open is set to RAW mode. OPEN must always be the last statement on a labeled line or on a line by itself. The line immediately following the OPEN line must test for SUCCESS or FAILURE; otherwise, the control system software considers it an OPEN error. Once you open a comm port with OPEN, after you complete communications on that port, you must close the port with CLOSE.

Example You can open the connection to a comm port and check to see if it was

successful, then either read or write data to the port with a CALL function you create:

Program File NUMERIC RESULT

LINE OPENING RESULT = OPEN (COMM1)

LINE SENDING IF RESULT = SUCCESS THEN ‘ Read up to 80 characters into the variable RCV_STRING

READ (COMM1,80,RCV_STRING) ELSE

PRINT "OPEN COMMPORT FAILED" TO TERMINAL1 ENDIF


OPEN, continued

Example continued

In the situation shown in this example, you can check to be sure OPEN was successful before performing Commport operations.

Related Keywords

CLOSE PRINT READ

Products Supported

CX series controllers.

Modes Available

Programs


OpenFile Function

Format OpenFile (file, mode, file_variable_name)

Purpose Opens a text file so that you can retrieve (read) text from it, put text into

(write to) it, or both read from it and write into it.

Remarks Replace an file with the name of any text file. If the file does not already

exist, the control system software creates it

mode must be either READONLY, WRITEONLY, or READWRITE.

READONLY means you can only retrieve (read) text from the file, not put (write) any text into it.

WRITEONLY means you can only add (write) text into the file, not retrieve (read) it.

READWRITE means you can both retrieve (read) text from the file and put (write) text into the file.

file_variable_name must be a control system software FILE variable name you created earlier with FILE to correspond to a text file name.

Once you use FILE to create a FILE variable, you can then open a text file to act on under that name with OpenFile.

OpenFile returns either SUCCESS or FAILURE.

Example 1 First you create a FILE variable name with FILE. You can then open a text file

under that name with OpenFile, as shown in this example.

Program File File ZoneData Numeric Chars, OK String 80 Dataline

Line Opening IF OpenFile ("c:\text\zone.txt", WRITEONLY, ZoneData) = Failure THEN


OpenFile, continued

Example 1 continued

Print "File Open Failed" GOTO Closing

Else GOTO Writing

Endif

Line Writing

.

. LINE Closing

IF CloseFile (ZoneData) = Failure THEN Print "File Close Failed"

The control system software takes the text file name in the string ("c:\text\zone.txt") and assigns it to the ZoneData variable.

Notice that because OpenFile returns SUCCESS or FAILURE, you can place it inside an IF..THEN statement. Once you have opened the file and taken action on it, you must close the file with CloseFile using the name you created with FILE.

Example 2 Once you have defined the array of FILE variables, you can open multiple

text files. The following example shows opening \zone1.txt, \zone2.txt, and \zone3.txt in a FOR..NEXT loop. The loop uses the index variable (FILENUM) when forming the string for the text file name. If OpenFile fails for any of the files, the control system software breaks out of the loop (using the BREAK keyword) and carries out the rest of the statements in the line. Both breaking out of the loop and successfully completing the loop send the control system software to the next statement. In that statement, if the result of OpenFile is SUCCESS, then the control system software goes to the READING line and does not execute any more statements under OPENING. If the result is FAILURE, the control system software skips the GOTO READING instruction and goes to the next statement, where it prints a message, sets FILESOPEN to the number of files successfully opened (so it knows how many to close), then goes to the CLOSING line.


OpenFile, continued

Example 2 continued

Program File FILE ZONEDATA [3] NUMERIC OK, FileNum, Index, FilesOpen

LINE OPENING FOR FileNum = 1 TO 3

OK=OpenFile ("c:\zone";FileNum;".txt", WriteOnly, ZONEDATA[FileNum]) IF OK = FAILURE THEN BREAK

NEXT FileNum IF OK = SUCCESS THEN GOTO READING PRINT "File Open Failed for ZONEDATA";FileNum SET FilesOpen = FileNum – 1 GOTO CLOSING

LINE READING SET FilesOpen to FileNum

.

.

LINE CLOSING FOR Index = 1 TO FilesOpen

SET OK to CLOSEFILE (ZONEDATA[Index]) IF OK = FAILURE THEN PRINT "File Close Failed for ZONEDATA";Index

NEXT Index

IF OK = SUCCESS THEN PRINT "File Processing Completed Successfully"

Related Keywords

CLOSEFILE FILE POSITIONFILE READFILE WRITEFILE FAILURE SUCCESS

Products Supported

CyberStation.

Modes Available

Programs


OpenList Function

Format OpenList ( class, object_var, controller_or_site )

Purpose Opens a list of all the objects in the class you give on the controller you

indicate. The list is always of the particular class of objects you give.

Remarks Replace class with the name of the class (type) of objects you want in the list

or string variable that contains the name. If you give the actual class, it must be in quotation marks. The class name must be spelled correctly (see list given on the next page). Replace object_var with a local OBJECT variable you defined earlier with the OBJECT statement. The variable cannot stand for an already opened list. Replace controller_or_site with a name or path to a particular controller or workstation on the EnergyNet or Infinet or a local OBJECT variable that stands for one. If you do not give a name or path, the control system software assumes you mean the workstation or controller you are connected to. Or, if you give the Network, Device or Folder class and no controller, the control system software assumes you mean the root level. Returns SUCCESS or FAILURE.


OpenList, continued

Remarks continued

The classes are each spelled a particualr way and are listed below.

AccessEvent DigitalInput Group MultistateOutput

ActivityEvent DigitalOutput GroupMember MultistateValue

ACXList DistributionBatch ImExportRef Network

AlarmEnrollment DistributionObject InfinityController NetworkDialup

AlarmEvent Door InfinityDateTime Numeric

AlarmInfo DoorList InfinityFunction ParamInfo

AnalogInput ElevatorInfo InfinityInfinetCtlr Personnel

AnalogOutput ErrorEvent InfinityInput Program

Area EventEnrollment InfinityNumeric RootClass

AreaLink EventLogControl InfinityOutput Schedule

BinaryValue EventNotification InfinityProgram SecurityLevel

ClassName EventView InfinityString SecurityLink

CommPort Filter InfinitySystemVariable ShortCut

ControllerUser Folder IOUModule String

DateTime Function ListView TemplateInfo

Device Graphics MultistateInput User

Controller” refers to CX series controllers and the b4920, whereas

“InfinityInfinetCtlr” refers to Infinet I and i2 series controllers. Also, be sure that you do not inadvertently pluralize the class you name; for instance “Point" not “Points” and “Group” not “Groups.”

For a program in a controller, omit the “Infinity” prefix from the class name.

Once you have set the controller or path within the OpenList statement, the control system software stays on the list for that controller or path until you give it another controller or path. Because the control system software remembers the location of the list you last opened, while it is still open, you can give the name of another controller or path under the one you just opened.

For example, once you open a CX or b4920 controller path, you can then open an Infinet controller under it by using only the Infinet controller name rather than the path to it. (See Example 5.)

To open a list of networks or alarms you can give the corresponding class and not follow it with a path name. The control system software assumes you want the list of objects from under the root of the current workstation.


OpenList, continued

Example 1 After you have defined a local OBJECT variable called VAVPOINT, you

can then open the list of outputs with OpenList, as in the following program.

Program File OBJECT VAVPOINT NUMERIC OK

LINE OPENPOINTS OK = OpenList ("InfinityOutput", VAVPOINT, FLOOR1 ROOM2VAV) IF OK = SUCCESS THEN

GOTO GETPOINTS ELSE

PRINT "Cannot Open List" STOP

ENDIF

LINE GETPOINTS IF GetObject (VAVPOINT) IS NOT SUCCESS THEN GOTO~ CLOSEPOINTS IF VAVPOINT STATE IS DISABLED THEN PRINT VAVPOINT~ NAME

LINE CLOSEPOINTS OK = CloseList (VAVPOINT) IF OK = FAILURE THEN PRINT "Cannot Close List" STOP

Notice that the class (InfinityOutput) is in quotation marks. Once the list is open, the program then gets each point on the FLOOR1 ROOM2VAV controller with GETOBJECT (see GETOBJECT keyword for more detail). Notice that because the program is looping, you use the STOP keyword to prevent it from repeating the actions on the CLOSEPOINTS line.

Example 2 You can print a list of disabled programs on a controller and vary the

controller by using a local OBJECT variable to contain the controller name. Once you have defined the OBJECT variable, you can use that variable with OpenList.


OpenList, continued

Example 2 continued

Program File OBJECT PROG, CXFLOOR NUMERIC OK

LINE OPENPROG SET CXFLOOR = FLOOR2 OK = OpenList ("InfinityProgram", PROG, CXFLOOR) IF OK = SUCCESS THEN

GOTO GETPROGS ELSE


ENDIF

LINE GETPROGS IF GetObject (PROG) IS NOT SUCCESS THEN GOTO~ CLOSEPROG IF PROG STATE IS DISABLED THEN PRINT PROG NAME

GOTO GETPROGS

LINE CLOSEPROG OK = CloseList (PROG) IF OK = FAILURE THEN PRINT "Cannot Close List"

STOP

This fallthru program checks the state of each program it retrieves from FLOOR2. If the program is disabled, the control system software prints the program name. When the control system software has finished getting all the programs, you have a list of the disabled programs.

The resulting list includes only programs on FLOOR2, not on any other controller. You can also get a list of programs from a workstation by setting the CXFLOOR local OBJECT variable to the name of a workstation. If you do not give a controller or workstation name, the control system software gives the programs from the controller you are connected to or workstation you are operating.


OpenList, continued

Example 3 You can open a list of the Infinet controllers on the CX controller. (In this

example, the program is looping.)

You do not have to give the name of the controller if it is the one the program is running on. If it is another controller, however, you must give the full path to the controller.

Program File OBJECT infController NUMERIC COUNT, OK

LINE OPENController OK = OpenList ("InfinityInfinetCtlr", InfController) IF OK = SUCCESS then

GOTO GETController ELSE


ENDIF

LINE GETController IF GetObject (InfController) IS NOT SUCCESS THEN GOTO~ CLOSEController IF InfController COMMSTATUS IS OFFLINE THEN

PRINT InfController NAME COUNT = COUNT + 1

ENDIF

LINE CLOSEController OK = CloseList (InfController) IF OK = FAILURE THEN PRINT "Cannot Close List" PR COUNT

STOP

Notice that the class name for an Infinet controller is “InfinetCtlr,” spelled exactly that way.

This program checks the COMMSTATUS of each Infinet controller on the EnergyNet controller. If the controller is off-line, the control system software prints the controller name and adds 1 to the COUNT numeric variable. When the control system software has finished checking all the controllers, you have a list of the Infinet controllers that are off-line and a total of the number of controllers that are off-line.


OpenList, continued

Example 4 You can retrieve both input and output points by having a string that you can

set to either class. In this case, you use an array variable called IOPOINTS with two entries; entry 1 is "Output" class, and entry 2 is "Input" class. You then get the points from first one class, then the other by using the array variable in the OpenList statement:

Program File OBJECT CurrentPoint STRING IOPoints[2] NUMERIC Index

Starting: IOPoints[1] = "InfinityOutput" IOPoints[2] = "InfinityInput" Index = 1

GOTO OpenPoints

OpenPoints: OK = OpenList (IOPoints[Index], CurrentPoint, Building1 Floor1~ Room2) IF OK = SUCCESS THEN

GOTO CheckPoints ELSE


ENDIF

CheckPoints: IF GetObject (CurrentPoint) IS NOT SUCCESS THEN GOTO~ ClosePoints PR CurrentPoint

ClosePoints: OK = CloseList (CurrentPoint) IF OK = SUCCESS THEN

Index = Index + 1 ELSE

PRINT "Cannot Close List" STOP

ENDIF


OpenList, continued

Example 4 continued

IF Index <= 2 THEN GOTO OpenPoints ELSE GOTO Done

Done: PRINT "End of Input/Output Point List" STOP

Once the program closes the first list, it adds 1 to the value of INDEX. As long as the INDEX value is less than or equal to the number of entries (2), the program goes to OPENPOINTS and opens the list of the class of objects stored in the next entry of the IOPOINTS array. You could have an array with more entries and call it CLASSGRP. By changing the INDEX value you can then open lists of as many classes as you need in the same program.

Example 5 You can retrieve the name of every disabled program on every Infinet

controller on every CX controller. You do this by using a local OBJECT variable for the controller called ENETCTLR, another for the Infinet controller called INETCTLR, and another for the program called CURRENTPROG.

The way the sample looping program works is similar to how nested IFs work in a fall thru program. The arrows indicate the opening and closing statements “nested” within the program on the next page.

The first OpenList statement opens the list of CX controllers, the next the list of Infinet controllers, and the last the programs. (They do not appear indented as nested IFs do.)

The CloseList statements appear in the opposite order. Once you have retrieved all the programs, you close the program list; then you close the Infinet controller list, and finally you close the CX controller list.

Notice that the first OpenList statement does not give a path. That is because this sample program is on a CX controller, and the current controller is the path to other controllers.

It is important to note that if you put the same program on an CyberStation, the program would not give the same results. Why? Because on a CyberStation, it would give all the CX controllers and CyberStations under the current site.


OpenList, continued

Example 5 continued

If you wanted all controllers and workstations on all sites, you would have to open the site list first.

Program File

OBJECT EnetCtlr, InetCtlr, CurrentProg NUMERIC Count

OpenEnergyNet: IF OpenList("InfinityController", EnetCtlr) = success THEN

GOTO GetEnergyNet

ELSE Print "Cannot Open EnergyNet List" Stop

ENDIF

GetEnergyNet:

IF GetObject(EnetCtlr) = SUCCESS Then GOTO OpenInfinet GOTO CloseEnergyNet

OpenInfinet:

IF OpenList("InfinityInfinetCtlr", InetCtlr, EnetCtlr) = success THEN GOTO GetInfinet

ELSE Print "Cannot Open Infinet List: ", EnetCtlr NAME GOTO GetEnergyNet

ENDIF

GetInfinet:

IF GetObject(InetCtlr) = SUCCESS THEN

GOTO OpenProg

ELSE GOTO CloseInfinet

ENDIF

OpenProg:

IFOpenList("InfinityProgram", CurrentProg, InetCtlr) = success~ THEN Count = 0 GOTO CheckProg

ELSE Print "Cannot Open Program List: ", EnetCtlr NAME, InetCtlr NAME GOTO GetInfinet

ENDIF


OpenList, continued

Example 5 continued

CheckProg:

IF GetObject (CurrentProg) IS NOT SUCCESS THEN GOTO~ CloseProg

IF CurrentProg State IS DISABLED Then Print EnetCtlr NAME, InetCtlr NAME, CurrentProg NAME Count = Count + 1

ENDIF

CloseProg:

IF CLOSELIST(CurrentProg) = SUCCESS THEN Print "Total disabled progs in |* |* is |###", EnetCtlr NAME, InetCtlr NAME, Count

ELSE Print "Cannot Close Program List"

ENDIF GOTO GetInfinet

CloseInfinet:

IF CLOSELIST(InetCtlr) IS NOT SUCCESS THEN Print "Cannot Close Infinet List: ", InetCtlr NAME

ENDIF GOTO GetEnergyNet

CloseEnergyNet:

IF CLOSELIST(EnetCtlr) IS NOT SUCCESS THEN Print "Cannot Close EnergyNet List"

ENDIF

STOP

The following is a description of exactly what the program does. A flow chart for the program is shown on Figure 8-19. The control system software opens the list of CX (Infinity) controllers on EnergyNet, then gets the first CX (EnetCtlr) controller. If the GetObject successfully retrieves the CX controller, the control system software opens the list of Infinet controllers on that CX controller. It then gets the first Infinet controller.


OpenList, continued

Example 5 continued

If the GETOBJECT successfully retrieves the Infinet controller, the control system software opens the list of programs on that controller. It then gets the first program. If the first program is disabled, the control system software prints the program name and adds 1 to the COUNT numeric variable to start adding up how many programs are disabled. The control system software then gets the next program on the Infinet controller and sees if it is disabled. The process continues for all programs on that Infinet controller. When GETOBJECT cannot find another program, the control system software proceeds to the CLOSEPROG line where it closes the list of programs and then goes to the GETINFINET line to get the next Infinet controller. Once it has the next Infinet controller, the control system software goes to the OPENPROG line and tests the state of each of those programs. This process continues for all Infinet controllers. When GETOBJECT cannot find another Infinet controller, it goes to the CLOSEINFINET line where it closes the Infinet list and then goes to the GETENERGYNET line to get the next CX controller. Once it has the next CX controller on EnergyNet, the control system software goes to the OPENINFINET line and gets the first Infinet controller on that CX controller. Then the same process occurs for each program as with the last Infinet controller. And the same process occurs for every Infinet controller that occurred for each on the last CX controller. Finally, when GETOBJECT cannot get another CX controller, the control system software proceeds to CLOSEENERGYNET, where it closes the list and stops the program.


OpenList, continued

Example 5 continued

Figure 7-19. OpenList (Example 5) Program Flow Chart

Open EnergyNetList

Close Infinet List

Open Infinet List

Close EnergyNet

Close Program List

Open Program List

STOP

Get Another

Program ?

Process Program

Get EnergyNet

Controller ?

Get Infinet

Controller ?

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

Yes


OpenList, continued

Example 6 You can retrieve a list of sites under the root by giving the Site class and an

OBJECT variable name with OpenList:

Program File OBJECT NetName NUMERIC OK

LINE OpenSites OK = OpenList ("Network", SiteName) IF OK = SUCCESS THEN

GOTO GetSites ELSE


ENDIF

LINE GetSites

IF GetObject (SiteName) IS NOT SUCCESS THEN GOTO CloseSites PRINT SiteName NAME

LINE CloseSites OK = CloseList (SiteName) IF OK = Failure Then Print "Cannot Close List"

Stop

Related Keywords

GetObject Object CloseList

Products Supported

Format 1: BACnet series (except b3885, b3887), CMX series, CMX series, i2 series controllers (except i2885, i2887), and Cyberstation Format 2: CyberStation.

Modes Available

Programs


OR Operator

Format Format 1: number OR number

Format 2: namelist OR final_name

Purpose Format 1: Provides the logical OR between two expressions.

Format 2: When used in a list of names between the last two items, indicates the end of the series.

Remarks Replace number with any number, name that stands for a number, formula

or function that gives a number. Replace namelist with one or more names with commas between them. Replace final_name with a single name at the end of a series of names. OR with the last name is optional. The controller carries out all other operations (such as adding and subtracting) before it acts on OR (or AND). In Chapter 6 under "Order of Action" the listing compares the order the system software acts on all operators. Because OR (and AND) are acted on last, you can form logical statements without using too many parentheses. See Example 4 for how to use AND and OR together. The exclamation mark (!) is the alias for the logical OR only.

Example 1 To take an action only if one of several conditions exist, you use OR

between the numbers, so if one of them is true, the resulting action occurs:

Program File IF the Heat is On OR the Cool is On THEN…

Notice that in the above statement, you could substitute exclamation mark (!) for OR.


OR, continued

Example 2 To put a list in an IF statement, you may use an OR between the last two

names in the list:

Program File IF the Zone is Warming, Occupied OR LowTemp THEN…

You may not use the exclamation mark (!) for OR in a series. You may, however, leave out OR as follows:

IF the Zone is Warming, Occupied, LowTemp THEN...

Example 3 You can also combine the logical OR with a name list containing an OR

(with or without the comma before OR) as follows:

Program File

IF the Zone is Warm, Occupied OR Low OR Heat is Off THEN… IF the Zone is Warm, Occupied, OR Low OR Heat is Off THEN… The system software always interprets the first OR as the list OR and the second as the logical OR. If you want to reverse the order of the statement, use parentheses, as follows:

IF (Heat is Off) OR Zone is Warming, Occupied, OR LowTemp THEN...

Example 4 If OR occurs before AND, the system software interprets OR first because it

works from left to right on AND and OR. For instance, take this statement:

Program File IF WKD = Sat OR WKD = Sun AND TOD > 900 THEN…

The above statement is interpreted so that the items in parentheses below are calculated first:

IF (WKD = Sat OR WKD = Sun) AND TOD > 900 THEN…

If AND occurs before OR, the controller interprets AND first:

IF TOD > 900 AND WKD = Sat OR WKD = Sun THEN…

is interpreted as:

IF (TOD > 900 AND WKD = Sat) OR WKD = Sun THEN…


OR, continued

Related Keywords

AND IF..THEN..ELSE IS…

Products Supported


Modes Available



P Statement

Format P list

Purpose Prints the values of one or more variables, points, constants, or other

expressions representing a value, including strings of characters and datetimes, each on a separate line. The list can contain different types of items. Prints units with point values.

Remarks The list is one or more expressions with commas between them. Each

expression can be a number or text as defined under Format Conventions at the beginning of this chapter. The list can also include functions or attributes. Prints the values to the screen you are currently working on. For points, system variables, and attributes, prints the name of the point (or variable or attribute), followed by an equal sign, the value of the point, and the units. Otherwise, only the value prints. Also, can print to comm ports and string objects (including program string variables). This keyword is most useful in the command window. However, you may use it in a program.


P SupplyAir, ReturnAir, BurnerStat, CoilStatus SupplyAir = 46 degrees F ReturnAir = 68 degrees F BurnerStat = ON CoilStatus = OFF

Notice that the name of the point and the units print for each point.


P, continued


P OutsideAir, AVG (Temp), AvgSetPt, OutsideAir TYPE, TOD OutsideAir = 46 degrees F 86 AvgSetPt = 64 OutsideAir TYPE = Input TimeOfDay = 8 : 32 am

Alias PR

Products Supported

B4920, CMX series, CX series, BACnet series controllers, i2 series controllers, and CyberStation.

Modes Available


7- 258 Andover Controls Corporation

PASSED Function

Format PASSED (arg_number)

Purpose Indicates whether or not the argument with the arg_number has been passed

into the current function. Returns TRUE (numeric 1) if the argument is actually passed and FALSE (numeric 0) if it is not.

Remarks Uses the arguments ARG[1] to ARG[15].

Example You can create a function that takes an argument and check to see if the

argument is passed. The function below returns the number of the argument that has the highest value. It returns when it finds the first argument that is not passed. The function called MAXITEM, predefined in the language and described earlier in this chapter, is as follows:

Program File NUMERIC COUNT, LASTMAX LASTMAX = 1

FOR COUNT = 1 TO 15 IF NOT (PASSED(COUNT)) THEN RETURN (LASTMAX) IF ARG[COUNT] > LASTMAX THEN LASTMAX = COUNT

NEXT COUNT

Related Keywords

ARG

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs


PlayAudio Statement

Format Format 1: PlayAudio file

Format 2: PlayAudio file, playback_mode

Purpose Plays a prerecorded audio sample on the CyberStation.

Format 1: Plays a prerecorded audio sample on the CyberStation one time only. Format 2: Plays a prerecorded audio sample on the CyberStation either once or continuously, depending on the playback_mode you indicate.

Remarks The PlayAudio keyword is available only on the CyberStation.

Replace file with the name and path of any * .wav prerecorded audio sample. The file name and path must be in quotation marks. Replace playback_mode with either PlayOnce or PlayContinuous. PlayOnce plays the prerecorded audio sample one time only. The PlayAudio keyword defaults to this value, so the audio sample plays only once if you omit PlaybackMode altogether. PlayContinuous plays the prerecorded audio sample continuously until you click on the Silence menu in the Active Alarms window.

Example 1 You may want to play a prerecorded audio sample from the command line on the CyberStation. To play the audio sample in the buzzer.wav file one time only, use PlayAudio as follows:

Command Line PlayAudio "buzzer.wav"


PlayAudio, continued

Products Supported

Cyberstation

Modes Available



PLUS Operator

Format number PLUS number

Purpose Adds two expressions.



TotalKwh = KwhMonth PLUS KwhDay


TotalKwh = KwhMonth + KwhDay

Alias +

Products Supported


Modes Available



PositionFile Function

Format PositionFile (file_variable_name, offset, starting_position)

Purpose Tells READFILE or WRITEFILE where to begin reading or writing in an

text file.

Remarks Once you have opened the file with OpenFile, a new read or write process

(READFILE or WRITEFILE) automatically starts at the top of the file (FILEBEGIN) without you using PositionFile to set it. If you have been reading a file, the next read automatically begins where you last finished reading, unless you set a new starting position with PositionFile. The same applies for writing. Returns SUCCESS or FAILURE. file_variable_name must be a control system software FILE variable name you created earlier with FILE to correspond to an file name. Replace offset with the direction and number of characters from the starting_position to start reading/writing in the file. You may indicate to move forward with a plus sign (+) or backward with a minus sign (–). Starting_position tells where to begin reading or writing in the file. Must be one of the following: • FILEBEGIN • FILECURRENT (where you left off last read or write) • FILEEND.

Example 1 After you define a local FILE variable name and open the file (with

OpenFile), you can start either reading (with READFILE) or writing (with WRITEFILE) at a particular position in the file. You use PositionFile to set the starting position.

Suppose you want to read data from a file that lists controllers that had a temperature more than 2 degrees from setpoint for more than 2 minutes in the last 24 hours. The file contains three records and looks like this:


PositionFile, continued

Example 1 continued

Text File

10:12 Building2 Room8 11:26 Building1 Room6 12:35 Building2 Room3

You know that the controller name is 8 characters from the beginning of the file because the time is stored in the first 5 characters and followed by two spaces. The controllers are listed in order, so the first one in the file is the first one that deviated from setpoint.

PositionFile tells ReadFile to start reading at the eighth character from the beginning of the file, which is the first line starting with "Building2..." When ReadFile reads 16 characters, it retrieves "Building2 Room8" from the first line of the file and places it in the DATALINE string.

You could have PositionFile set the starting position from FILEBEGIN, but since ReadFile begins at the beginning anyway, you can have PositionFile set the starting position from FILECURRENT, so that when the control system software loops, it always moves to the beginning of the next record then to the eighth character.

The complete program, called ZONEREADING, follows.

Program File

FILE ZONEDATA STRING 80 DATALINE NUMERIC CHARS, OK

LINE Opening IF OpenFile ("c:\text\zone.txt", READONLY, ZONEDATA) = ~ FAILURE THEN

PRINT "File Open Failed" STOP ZONEREADING

ELSE GOTO Positioning

ENDIF

LINE Positioning IF PositionFile (ZONEDATA, 8, FILECURRENT) = FAILURE ~ THEN

PRINT "Start Positioning Failed"

PositionFile sets up ReadFile to begin reading here, at character eight.



Example 1 continued

GOTO Closing ENDIF OK = ReadFile (ZONEDATA, DATALINE, 16, CHARS) IF OK = FAILURE THEN

PRINT "File Read Failed" GOTO Closing

ENDIF IF OK = SUCCESS THEN

PRINT DATALINE TO StatusLine ELSE

GOTO Closing ENDIF

LINE Closing IF CloseFile (ZONEDATA) = FAILURE THEN

PRINT "File Close Failed" STOP

ENDIF

Example 2 To set the position to start writing to the end of the file, use PositionFile with

an offset of 0, as follows:

Program File PositionFile (ZONEDATA, 0, FILEEND)

Example 3 After writing to somewhere within the file, to reset the position to

start writing at the beginning of the file, use PositionFile with FILEBEGIN, as follows:

Program File PositionFile (ZONEDATA, 0, FILEBEGIN)



Example 4 To put a space between a series of records you are writing into a file, set the

position to start writing immediately after the last place the control system software wrote with FILECURRENT, then add an offset of 1, as follows:

Program File PositionFile (ZONEDATA, 1, FILECURRENT)

Example 5 To put a space between a series of records you are writing and adding onto

the end of a file, set the position to start writing immediately after the end of the file with FILEEND, then add an offset of 1, as follows:

Program File PositionFile (ZONEDATA, 1, FILEEND)

Related Keywords

CloseFile FILE OpenFile ReadFile WriteFile FAILURE SUCCESS

Products Supported

CyberStation.

Modes Available

Programs


PowerFail System variable

Format POWERFAIL

Purpose Indicates whether or not the AC power has failed. For CX series controllers

it will equal “ON” if power has failed, OFF if power is available. For all other controllers it is set equal to “ON” for one scan when power returns. All CX series controllers can continue to run on battery backup while power is down. The only Infinet controller that can run on battery backup is the 780.

Remarks Most often used in programs to determine whether or not AC power is down.

On CX series controllers and the 780 controller, POWERFAIL turns off as soon as AC power is restored. On all other Infinet controllers, POWERFAIL remains on until after the first scan following AC powerup, then sets to OFF.

Example You test to see if AC power is down and then turn off a programmable

system variable as follows:

Program File IF POWERFAIL IS ON THEN SET MODEMPOWER TO OFF

Related Keywords

PowerUpTime CPUPower ModemPower

Products Supported


Modles Available



PowerUpTime System variable

Format POWERUPTIME

Purpose Gives the date and time of the last warm or cold start of the AC power.

Remarks Most often used in programs to determine how long AC power has been up

since the last power failure.

Example You can find the number of hours that have passed since the AC power was

started:

Program File TIMEUP = DIFFTIME (HOUR, POWERUPTIME, DATE)

Related Keywords

POWERFAIL

Products Supported


Modes Available



PRINT Statement

Format Format 1: PRINT string

Format 2: PRINT list Format 3: PRINT string_format, list Format 4: Any of formats 1 through 3 above TO commport Format 5: Any of formats 1 through 3 above ; TO commport Format 6: Any of formats 1 through 3 above TO string_point_or_variable Format 7: Any of formats 1 through 3 above TO file_variable

Purpose Prints a series of characters (text strings, often called simply “strings”) to the

printer, string object or message window on the given communications port. You may also “print” into a string point or local variable to fill it with a string of text or numbers. In addition, on the CyberStation, you can print into an ASCII file. Format 1: Prints a string of text to the default comm port of the program or report. Format 2: Prints the values of one or more variables, points, constants, or other expressions representing a value. The list can contain different types of items. Format 3: Prints the variables, points, or other expressions in the list in the format you specify. Format 4: Prints any of formats 1 through 3 above from a controller to a command terminal or printer you specify (excluding printer queues).

Note: For a controller to print to a modem, you must first use OPEN to open the port (see OPEN keyword).


PRINT, continued

Purpose continued

Format 5: Prints any of formats 1 through 3 above, printing the next PRINT statement on the same line because semicolon means “stay on the same line.” Format 6: Prints any value or string, including messages, points, or variables, into a string point or variable (including MessageWindow and StatusLine system variables) to set the value of that string. Format 7: Prints any value or string, including messages, points, or variables, into an ASCII file associated with a local FILE variable. You must have opened the file for writing with the OpenFile keyword. Each time it prints into the file, PRINT prints on a new physical line, unless you use the semicolon at the end of the print statement.

Remarks Replace string with a series of characters in quotation marks.

Replace string_format with a known character or string of characters combined with changeable characters to form one print line. The parts are joined by a vertical bar (|). Most of the changeable characters are represented with pound signs (###), each holding a place for one character. A comma follows the string. Replace list with one or more expressions with commas between them. Each expression can be a number or text as defined under Format Conventions at the beginning of this chapter. Replace commport with the name of a printer. You do not have to include commport. The printer cannot be a printer queue. The semicolon (;) is optional. If you end a PRINT statement without the semicolon, the next line you print starts on a new line. If you want to print two strings one after the other on the same line, you must end the first with a semicolon.


PRINT, continued

Remarks continued

Replace string_point_or_variable with any defined string point or string variable.

Replace file_variable with the name of a local FILE variable. You must have opened the file for writing with the OpenFile keyword. Each time you use PRINT, it prints to a new line in the file, unless you use a semicolon.

Formatting Characters

You may choose the layout of the print line and indicate it using the following special symbols:

Symbol Description

⏐ Indicates the beginning of a series of characters strictly for formatting and not to be treated as text. When followed by a numeric constant, indicates an ASCII code follows (see below).

⏐" (A vertical bar immediately before a quotation mark.) Indicates to print the quotation mark, rather than interpreting it as the beginning or end of the string.

⏐numeric_ constant Produces the ASCII code that corresponds to the numeric constant. For example, |7 would produce a bell or beep if printed on a terminal. |13 is the carriage return character. See the ASCII code chart in Appendix A for more codes.

# Represents one character that is numeric. The series of characters prints right-justified, filling with blanks any blank characters to the left.

$### Displays either ON, -ON or OFF (as with a tristate output point). % Multiplies the point value by 100 and places a percent sign after

it (most useful with scale of 0 to 1, where 1 is 100%). * Represents an unlimited number of alphabetic or numeric

characters. - Prints a leading or trailing minus sign, if expression is a

negative number; prints a leading or trailing plus sign if expression is a positive number.

} Removes trailing zeros (extra decimal places). , Prints commas every third digit left of the decimal point. > Right justifies the number or text within the format. < Left justifies the number or text within the format. ^ Displays a numeric expression in scientific notation. @ Represents one character of any kind, alphabetic or numeric.

The series of characters prints left-justified, filling with blanks any blank characters to the right.

The format must be enclosed in quotation marks. The comma is required after the format (outside the quotation marks) if an item to insert in the format follows (see Example 3).


PRINT, continued

Examples1-21 The following examples illustrate the various PRINT formats:

No. Program File Output /Explanation 1 PRINT "WARNING-Trouble on the 4th

Floor!" WARNING-Trouble on the 4th Floor! /The string of characters prints; the quotation marks do not.

2 PRINT TEMP1, TEMP2, TEMP3, TEMP4 67 72 77 75 / The value of each variable in the list prints, with a space after it.

3 PRINT "The temperature is ⏐###.# at ⏐##:##:##", Temp4, Hour, Minute, Second

The temperature is 75.0 at 4:32:05 / The string prints with the value of the first point (or variable) in the first format and the value of the next point or variable in the next format. If there are more than two formats, the subsequent point or variable values are printed in the corresponding formats in order.

4 PRINT "⏐#######", Total_Watts 1340 / Leaves 3 leading spaces before the value of TOTAL_WATTS. The value prints on the terminal called TERMINAL.

5 PRINT WEEKDAY; PRINT " "; PRINT MONTH; PRINT " "; PRINT DAYOFMONTH

Tuesday January 2 / Prints all text and spaces on the same line because each PRINT statement ends with a semicolon (;).

6 PRINT "HEAT.SETPT" TO POINTNAME / Prints the value into the string and changes its setting. You can set a string point or variable this way.


PRINT, continued

Examples 1-21 continued

No.

Program File

Output /Explanation

7 PRINT "⏐##,###.##", TOTAL_WATTS 1,340.00 / Leaves one leading space. Adds the comma after the 1 and has two zeros after the decimal.

8 PRINT "⏐#,###.##}", TOTAL_WATTS 1,340 / Drops extra decimal places (trailing zeros).

9 PRINT "The Fan Status is ⏐$###," FANSTATUS

The Fan Status is ON / Prints ON, -ON, or OFF for a digital or tristate point, left-justifying On in the format.

10 PRINT "The Damper Setting is ⏐##.##", DAMPER

The Damper Setting is 20.00 / Prints the pulsing value of the damper in the format. Here the damper is ON for 20 seconds. For -ON, the value is negative.

11 PRINT "⏐*", Murphy FULLNAME Murphy Johnson / Outputs any number of characters of any type that are in the FULLNAME attribute. The * is particularly useful when you do not want to limit the number of characters in a variable.

12 PRINT "⏐@@@@@@@@@@@@@@", STRMSG TO BUILDING1 CONSOLE

Heater Failed! / The message inside STRMSG prints left justified in the 14 characters allowed by the @ signs.

13 PRINT "⏐>#######.##}", 21.70 21.7 / Right justifies and drops the trailing 0.

14 PRINT "⏐-##.##", 88.8 +88.8 / Prints leading minus sign if the number is negative and the leading plus sign if the number is positive. Prints all trailing zeros.


PRINT, continued

Examples 1-21 continued

No.

Program File

Output /Explanation

15 PRINT "⏐##.##-", -88.80 88.80- / Prints trailing minus sign if the number is negative and the trailing plus sign if the number is positive. Prints all trailing zeros.

16 PRINT "⏐###^## is the ⏐"TOTAL.⏐"", 897000

8,97e03+05 is the "Total." / Prints the number in scientific notation. Also prints the quotation marks around VALUE, because a vertical bar is before each quotation mark that should print.

17 PRINT "⏐###^##"", .8970 8,97e-01 / Prints in scientific notation with negative exponent.

18 PRINT "⏐-##.##^##"", 1340000 +1.340e+06 / Prints in scientific notation with a leading plus sign for a positive number.

19 PRINT "The blower's current state is ⏐@@@@@@@@.", BLOWER STATE

The blower's current state is ENABLED. / Prints the text string left justified in the format and leaves a blank for the unfilled character at the end.

20 PRINT "The value is set to ⏐%### open.", WATER_VALVE

The Valve is set to 45% open. / Prints the value in engineering units as a percentage of the scale for the point. This format works best with a scale of 0 to 1, where 0 is fully closed and 1 is fully open. So, if the value is 1, the statement prints 100%. If the value is .45, the statement prints 45%.


PRINT, continued

Examples 1- 21 continued

No.

Program File

Output /Explanation

21 PRINT "Date:", MONTH, ",DAYOFMONTH, ", ", YEAR PRINT " " PRINT "Test Report"

Date: December 4, 2001 Test Report / Prints the date. Commas must separate each group of literal text. Notice that the only place a space appears is immediately after the word Date. You must specify the blank space in quotation marks. Also prints a blank line between the date and the report title. If you use the word PRINT with one blank in quotation marks after it, then the entire line prints as a blank line (as long as you don't put a semicolon at the end).

Example 22 To put data in an ASCII file, you first open it with OpenFile (see the OpenFile

keyword), then "print" into the file with the PRINT keyword, as shown below:

Program File in CyberStation

Numeric Cnt, OK File NewData

OpeningFile: OK = OpenFile ("c:\tempdata.txt", WriteOnly, NewData) IF OK = Failure THEN GOTO Ending ELSE GOTO PrintToFile

PrintToFile: Print "KWH Usage Cost" To NewData

For Cnt = 1 to 10 Print "|######> |####.##>", KWHUsage[Cnt], Cost[Cnt] To NewData Next Cnt GOTO ClosingFile


PRINT, continued

Example 22 continued

ClosingFile: OK = CloseFile (NewData) IF OK = Failure THEN Print "Cannot close text File"

Ending: Stop

In this example, the local FILE variable called NewData represents an ASCII file. After the OpenFile keyword opens that ASCII file, PRINT can refer to the file by the local FILE variable name and put data in it. In this case, the local FILE variable is NewData, so PRINT prints the KWH usage and cost into the ASCII file.

OutPut⎯To the File

KWUsage Cost

4567 548.04

8724 1134.12

3862 463.44

4532 543.84

3217 386.04

9421 1224.73

567 56.70

856 94.16

3763 451.56

589 70.68

Since PRINT is inside a FOR..NEXT loop that counts to 10, it prints 10 KWH usage totals and their costs into the file. Each time it prints, PRINT starts a new physical line in the ASCII file.


PRINT, continued

Example 23 If you put a semicolon at the end of the PRINT statement, the next PRINT

statement's results appear on the same physical line inside the file:

Program File in CyberStation

Print "January: |####> |####.##> ", KWUsage, Cost; To NewData Print "February: |####> |####.##> ", KWUsage, Cost To NewData

The resulting output appears as follows:

OutPut—To the File

January: 4567 548.04 February: 589 70.68

Related Keywords

CHR P TAB FILE OpenFile

Products Supported

BACnet series* (except b3885, b3887), B4920, CMX series, CX series, i2 series* (except i2885, i2887), DCX 250 controllers, and Cyberstation. Format 7 only available on the CyberStation * Due to the lack of an available Comm port, BACnet and i2 series controllers support printing only to string variables. However, the i2/b3885 and i2/b3887 models of these controllers do not support the PRINT statement at all.

Modes Available



RANDOM Function

Format RANDOM (number)

Purpose Returns a random number from 0 to 32,767 using number. Used to simulate

real-life values to test programs.


You may omit number, but the parentheses are required, as with all functions.

Note: You must vary the number to generate different random sequences. If you do not vary the number, you may see a repetitious pattern of values emerging over time.

Example To simulate fluctuations of temperature between 50 and 70 degrees, you put

any number in the number. To generate a result in the range of 20 possible temperatures, you divide the random number you generate by 32767, which gives you a number between 0 and 1. Then multiply the result by 20.

Program File RANDOM (8) /32767 TIMES 20

Finally you add 50 degrees to the bottom of the range you are trying to simulate to the random number:

TEMP = (RANDOM (8) /32767 TIMES 20) + 50

Alias RND

Products Supported

BACnet series (except b3885, b3887), CMX series, CX series, i2 series (except i2885, i2887), DCX250 controllers, and Cyberstation.

Modes Available



READ Function (comm port)

Format READ(comm_port, number_chars, string_point, timeout, end_char)

Purpose Reads characters from a communications port and places them in a string.

Returns SUCCESS or FAILURE. You should test for SUCCESS or FAILURE in the line immediately following READ.

Remarks The READ function must be the last statement in a line or on a line by itself.

Once READ executes, the controller automatically goes to the next labeled line. You must use OPEN to open the port before attempting to read the input. Once the communications are complete, you must use CLOSE to close the port. You may open the comm port with OPEN in one program, then read input from the port with READ in another program. Replace comm_port with any communications port or path to one that you want to read information from. Replace number_chars with the number of characters you expect the function to read from the port. Any number or expression that gives a number, up to 132. Replace string_point with a string point that can contain the number of characters the function is reading. This string is where the characters read are stored. It can be up to 132 characters. Note: string_point must be a string point (external to the program), and not a string variable (local to the program). Replace timeout (optional) with the length of time in increments of 10 ms each that you want the controller to keep trying to read if it detects no characters. If the controller does not read any characters before the timeout period is over, it stops trying and goes to the next line. If you do not set a timeout period, it is automatically 10 minutes. Setting timeout to zero forces the controller to wait indefinitely or until it reads characters. (See also the TIMEDOUT attribute in Appendix B.)


READ (comm port), continued

Remarks continued

Replace end_char (optional) with a single character that indicates the end of the text being read. Indicated by an ASCII code (inside quotation marks to make it a string), string point, or local string variable. If you give more than one character, the control system software uses only the first character. Note: The control system software stops reading when either it has read the number of characters in number_chars, the amount of time in timeout has elapsed, or it has read the end_char. You can give all three pieces of information and whichever occurs first ends the reading process. For instance, if READ reads the end character before it reads the number of characters, it stops based on the end character.

Example 1 You can read input from a modem on COMM3 into a string called

MODEMDATA as follows (you must also close the port afterwards):

Program File OPENING: OPENRESULT = OPEN(COMM3)

TESTING: IF OPENRESULT = SUCCESS THEN

GOTO READING ELSE

GOTO FAILING ENDIF

READING: RESULT = READ(COMM3, 132, MODEMDATA, 100)

PRINTING: IF COMM3 TIMEDOUT THEN GOTO CLOSING IF RESULT = SUCCESS THEN

PRINT MODEMDATA TO INPUTFILE ELSE

GOTO CLOSING ENDIF

The timeout of 100 is 100 increments of 10 ms each, for a total of 1000 ms or 1 second.


READ (comm port), continued

Example 2 You can give a carriage return as the character that indicates the end of the

text to be read in a READ statement. You specify the carriage return using the ASCII code for it, "|13". You must place the ASCII code inside quotation marks to make it a string. (See "Formatting Characters" under the PRINT keyword for a discussion of the⏐symbol.)

Program File OPENING:

OPENRESULT = OPEN(COMM3)

TESTING: IF OPENRESULT = SUCCESS THEN

GOTO READING ELSE

GOTO FAILING ENDIF

READING: RESULT = READ(COMM3, 132, MODEMDATA, "|13")

PRINTING: IF COMM3 TIMEDOUT THEN GOTO CLOSING IF RESULT = SUCCESS THEN

PRINT MODEMDATA TO INPUTFILE ELSE

GOTO CLOSING ENDIF

Related Keywords

CLOSE OPEN

Products Supported

CMX and CX series controllers.

Modes Available

Programs


ReadFile Function

Format ReadFile (file_variable_name, string_variable_or_point,

chars_to_read, numeric_variable_or_point, end_character)

Purpose Retrieves data from (reads) a text file you opened earlier with OpenFile.

Retrieves the number of characters you indicate in the chars_to_read argument.

Remarks ReadFile automatically starts retrieving data where it last stopped unless you

specify that it must start at another position, such as the beginning or end of the file. You can also specify a particular number of characters to move away from the current position, beginning, or end of the file with PositionFile. file_variable_name must be a control system software name you created earlier with FILE to correspond to a file name. Replace string_variable_or_point with either a local string variable or a string point to store the text the control system software reads from the file.

Replace chars_to_read with the number of characters to read into the string variable or point. May be any number or expression that gives a number up to 255.

Replace numeric_variable_or_point with a numeric variable or numeric point to store the number of actual characters ReadFile has read once the reading is complete.

Replace end_character (optional) with a single character that indicates the end of the text being read (not the end of file). ReadFile reads up to, but not including, this character. Can be indicated by an ASCII code (inside quotation marks to make it a string), string in quotation marks, string point, or local string variable. If you give more than one character, the control system software uses only the first character. For example, you might have a file with lines of data that each end in a carriage return. To read up to the carriage return, give the ASCII code for a carriage return in quotation marks ("|13") as the end character in the ReadFile statement. (See "Formatting Characters" under the PRINT keyword for a discussion of the⏐symbol.)


ReadFile, continued

Remarks continued

You might, in another case, have a comma between pieces of data. You can then give the comma (in quotation marks) as the end_character (see Example 3). Once you use FILE to define a FILE variable and you open a file with OpenFile, you can then read the text file with ReadFile. If ReadFile is successful, it returns the number of characters it has read (in the numeric variable or numeric point you designate). If it is not successful, it returns FAILURE. If it has reached the end of the file, it returns EOF.

Example 1 In this example, you first create a FILE variable called ZONEDATA with

FILE and then open a file under ZONEDATA with OpenFile. You then read from that text file with ReadFile. Here, ReadFile reads the file opened under ZONEDATA and stores the text it reads in DATALINE. It reads 80 characters and stores the contents of them in the DATALINE string. After READING the file, the program prints the text from DATALINE to the screen. ReadFile also stores the actual number of characters read in the local numeric variable CHARS.

Program File FILE ZONEDATA STRING 80 DATALINE NUMERIC CHARS, OK

LINE Opening SET OK = OpenFile ("c:\text\zone.txt", READONLY, ZONEDATA)

IF OK = FAILURE THEN PRINT "File Open Failed" STOP ZONE.READING

ELSE GOTO Reading

ENDIF


ReadFile, continued

Example 1 continued

LINE Reading OK = ReadFile (ZONEDATA, DATALINE, 80, CHARS) IF OK = FAILURE THEN


ENDIF IF OK = SUCCESS THEN GOTO Printing ELSE GOTO Closing

LINE Printing PRINT DATALINE GOTO Reading

LINE Closing OK = CLOSEFILE (ZONEDATA) STOP ZONE.READING

Notice that if ReadFile returns FAILURE, the control system software goes to the CLOSING line. If it returns SUCCESS, the control system software goes to the PRINTING line; if it returns EOF, the control system software goes to the CLOSING line.

You must close the file in two situations—when ReadFile fails or when it has read the entire file.

Example 2 In this example, you first create a FILE variable called ZONEDATA with

FILE and you open a file under ZONEDATA with OpenFile. You then read from that text file with ReadFile. Here, ReadFile reads the file opened under ZONEDATA and stores the text it reads in DATALINE. It reads until it reaches the carriage return in the file (designated by the ASCII code |13 with quotation marks around it). It then stores the actual number of characters retrieved in the local numeric variable CHARS. You still must give a number of characters to read. (See "Formatting Characters" under the PRINT keyword for a discussion of the⏐symbol.) This program functions very much the way the last example did.

The control system software executes this statement when ReadFile returns EOF.


ReadFile, continued

Example 2 continued


LINE Opening SET OK = OpenFile ("c:\text\zone.txt", READONLY, ZONEDATA) IF OK = FAILURE THEN

PRINT "File Open Failed" STOP ZONE.READING

ELSE GOTO Reading

ENDIF

LINE Reading OK = ReadFile (ZONEDATA, DATALINE, 80, CHARS, "|13") IF OK = FAILURE THEN



LINE Printing PRINT DATALINE GOTO Reading


Example 3 In this example, you first create a FILE variable named ZONEDATA with

FILE and you open a file under ZONEDATA with OpenFile. You then read from that text file with ReadFile. Here, ReadFile reads the file opened under ZONEDATA and stores the text it reads in DATALINE. The file to read contains data separated by commas, as follows;

Floor1, Room1, 75, 72, Floor1, Room2, 74, 72, Floor1, Room3,


ReadFile, continued

Example 3 continues

It reads until it reaches the comma (you designate the comma with quotation marks around it). The program then stores the actual number of characters retrieved in the local numeric variable CHARS. Even though you give an ending character, you must still give a number of characters to read, in this case, 16.


LINE Opening SET OK = OpenFile ("c:\text\zone.txt", READONLY, ZONEDATA) IF OK = FAILURE THEN

PRINT "File Open Failed" STOP ZONE.READING

ELSE GOTO Reading

ENDIF

LINE Reading OK = ReadFile (ZONEDATA, DATALINE, 16, CHARS, ",") IF OK = FAILURE THEN



LINE Printing PRINT DATALINE OK = PositionFile (ZONEDATA, 2, FILECURRENT) IF OK = FAILURE THEN

PRINT "Positioning for Read Failed" GOTO Closing

ENDIF GOTO Reading



ReadFile, continued

Example 3 continued

This program functions very much the way the last example did, only each time the program goes to the PRINTING line, after the program prints what it read, it sets where to start reading in the file as two characters past where it stopped. The two characters are the comma and the space after the comma. For more on how to set where to begin reading, see the PositionFile keyword.

Related Keywords

FILE CloseFile OpenFile PositionFile WriteFile

Products Supported

CyberStation

Modes Available

Programs


ReadProperty Function

Format ReadProperty (Object_Property, Index)

Purpose To get (return) the property of a BACnet object.

Remarks Replace Object_Property with the object name, including a full path name,

followed by a property name. The object Identifier and Property Identifier are combined as one argument.

Replace Index with an array index. This is optional. It only applies to an array-type BACnet property. The index is ignored whenever it is not applicable.

The returned value is the object property value that has been read.

Example 1 Use ReadProperty to get the value of an Analog Value point.

Print ReadProperty(Net1\B4\AV1 Value)

Example 2 Use ReadProperty to get the description of an analog point and place it into a

string Point.

StringPoint = ReadProperty(Net1\B4\AV1 Description)

Example 3 Use ReadProperty to get the value of an analog point using index 3.

Numerical Value ReadProperty(BACnetDevices\B4\B3\AV1, 3)

Related Keywords

WriteProperty, Relinquish

Products Supported

BACnet series controllers and CyberStation.

Modes Available



ReaderPower System variable

Format ReaderPower

Purpose Indicates whether or not any access card reader on an ACX series controller

has lost power.

Remarks Applies only to ACX series controllers.

You cannot set ReaderPower. You can print it from the command line or use it in a program. You must connect to an ACX controller before you can print ReaderPower from the command line. Or you can access ReaderPower using the full path. ReaderPower is TRUE if a card reader on the controller has lost power, FALSE if not.

Example 1 To see if any card reader on an ACX series controller has lost power, you

first connect to the controller, then print the ReaderPower system variable from the command line as follows:

Command Line PR ReaderPower

The control system responds as follows if the reader has lost power: True

Example 2 If every time a card reader on an ACX series controller loses power you

want to take a particular action, then you would use ReaderPower in a program as follows:

Command Line IF Door4 ReaderPower is True THEN Run Door4Emergency

This example gives the path from a CX series controller to the Door4 of an ACX 781 controller.


ReaderPower, continued

Products Supported

ACX series and CX9702 controllers.

Modes Available



Relinquish Function

Format Relinquish(Object_Property, Priority)

Purpose To relinquish a command issued at an earlier time.

Returns SUCCESS or FAILURE.

Remarks A relinquish operation is similar to a WritePropery operation (see WriteProperty

keyword) with the exception that it places a NULL value in the Priority_Array that corresponds to the appropriate priority. When that occurs, the next lower priority, non-NULL position takes control of the property. If all the priority table array elements are NULL, the commandable property (refer to Chapter 14 in the Continuum CyberStation Configurator’s Guide Version 1.6, 30-3001-781) assumes the one defined in the Relinquish_Default property of the object. Object_Property is an optional argument specifying the commandable property you wish to relinquish command priority over. Object_Property is replaced with the object name, including a full path name, followed by a property name. The Object Identifier and Property Identifier are combined as one argument. Property is expected to be the BACnet commandable property (When referring to the Present_Value property of a BACnet object, the word “Value” not “Present_Value” is used in Plain English).

If no Object_Property is included, it is assumed to be Present_Value

Note: For Andover Controls systems, Present_Value is the only commandable property for the following classes:

Analog Output Multi-State Output Analog Value

Binary Output Multi-State Value Binary Value Replace Priority with the priority number, ranging from 1 (highest) to 16 (lowest). Applies only to a BACnet commandable property. If not present, the property value that matches with priority 10, if applicable, is used for controllers. For CyberStations, the priority from the BACnet Preferences is used.

Example Use Relinquish to relinquish the last command issued with priority 5

Relinquish(NET1\B4\AV, 5)

This statement places a NULL in the 5th entry.


Relinquish, continued

Related Keyworks

WriteProperty ReadProperty

Products Supported

BACnet series controllers and CyberStation

Modes Available



REPEAT..UNTIL Statement

Format REPEAT

statement statement …

UNTIL number

Purpose Carries out the statements in the loop until the number is true.

Remarks Replace statement with any complete instruction that tells the program what to do next or what action to take.

Replace number with any number or expression, including a date and time or name that stand for one.

The statements within the loop always execute at least once before the expression is evaluated.

Example If you want to print all the values in an array, you could do the following:

Program File

REPEAT Print OutsideAir[Count] Count = Count + 1

UNTIL Count = OutsideAir

Related Keyworks

Break Continue

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs

! ! CAUTION The scan action limits the number of statements that can execute


RETURN Statement

Format Format 1: RETURN

Format 2: RETURN number

Format 3: RETURN variable

Purpose Format 1: In a function file, returns program control to the calling program.

Format 2: In a function file, returns the number, and sends it to the calling program.

Format 3: In a function file, returns the contents of the variable.

Remarks The optional number is any number or expression, including a date and time

or name that stands for one.

If you expect to use the results of a calculation in more than one program, you set up a function file and put the calculation instructions in it, creating a function. When you need the function in a program, you call the function by using the file name as if it were any other keyword verb.

Later, the RETURN statement tells the function the value to return to the calling program.

If you omit the number, the function returns a numeric 0.

Example 1 You use RETURN without an expression to return to the calling program

without passing parameters. You might do that with a function that contains a series of actions to be carried out, as in the SHUTDOWN function shown below:

Function File TURN OFF THE HEAT TURN OFF THE FAN RUN PUMP, COOLING RETURN

In this case, RETURN returns you to the program that called the SHUTDOWN function, returning a numeric 0 because you supplied no arguments on the RETURN statement.


RETURN, continued

Example 1 continued

The statement that calls SHUTDOWN in the calling program looks like this:

Program File SHUTDOWN( )

Example 2 To create a function called GetArea that calculates the cross-sectional area of

a circle, name the function file AREA and enter the following in the function file:

Function File ARG[1] RADIUS

RETURN (3.14159 * (RADIUS^2))

You pass the radius into the function file from the calling statement in the main program. Here is a sample calling statement:

Program File VOL = GetArea(RADIUS) * LEG

This statement calls the AREA function, giving it the radius, which it requires to calculate the area.

Example 3 To create a function that returns the contents of the numeric variable that

calculates the circumference of a circle.

Program File ARG[1] DIAMETER

NUMERIC CIRCUMF

CIRCUMF = 3.14159 * DIAMETER

RETURN (CIRCUMF)

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs


RIGHT Function

Format RIGHT (string, integer)

Purpose Returns a string containing the rightmost characters of the string, starting

integer characters back from the end.


Replace integer with any integer or integer expression up to the length of the string that tells how many characters you want from the string. If integer is greater than the length of the string then the controller returns the entire string.


RGTVAL = RIGHT ("ABCDE"' 3)

This statement returns "CDE".

Alias LAST

Products Supported

BACnet series, CMX series, CX series, DCX 250, i2 series controllers (except i2885, i2887, i3885, i3887), and Cyberstation.

Modes Available



ROTATE Statement

Format Format 1: ROTATE linename program_list

Format 2: ROTATE program_list TO line

Purpose Executes the program or programs you specify in the program_list,

beginning at the line named by line. You may use format 1, giving the line name first, or format 2, giving the program names first.

Remarks Replace program_list with one or more program names with commas

between them. Replace linename with any line label created with the LINE statement. (See the LINE keyword.) Must be in the program you name. The label must be spelled here just as it is defined, except you may interchange upper- and lowercase. The line label may also be an integer. Note: You cannot rotate a program to line 0.

Line 0 is reserved to mean stop the program. LINE E is reserved for handling errors. A program can also rotate itself to another line. In this situation, ROTATE becomes a synonym for GOTO. (See the GOTO keyword.)

Example 1 If you have a series of programs you want to start every Monday morning,

you could put the following into a MondayStartup program:

Program File IF WKD = MONDAY THEN

ROTATE 1 BLOWER, PUMP, HEATING ROTATE LIGHTS TO BEGINNING

ENDIF


ROTATE, continued

Example 2 After the Heating program has been activated, it takes in the temperature and

rotates back to the beginning of the testing loop. To loop back you can rotate the program from within itself:

Program File ROTATE HEATING TO 1

Example 3 To rotate the Heating program to an "English-like" line label, you rotate the

program from within itself:

Program File ROTATE HEATING TO WINTER

Related Keywords

LINE RUN STOP

Alias ROT

Products Supported


Modes Available



ROUND Function

Format ROUND (number)

Purpose Rounds number to the nearest integer and returns that value.


ROUND, CEILING, FLOOR, and TRUNCATE are similar, but differ in the following ways: • ROUND rounds up if the decimal is .5 or higher and down if the

decimal is below .5. ROUND (–1.7) gives –2 (see Figure 8-20 below). • CEILING always rounds up. CEILING (–2.7) gives the closest higher

number on the number line, –2. • FLOOR always rounds down. FLOOR (–3.8) gives the closest lower

number on the number line, –4. • TRUNCATE cuts off the decimal value. TRUNCATE (–3.8) gives the

integer without the decimal, –3.

Figure 8-20. Number line showing ROUND (-1.7)

The following table illustrates how the four functions differ: Functions 4.2 4.5 -3.1 -3.7 ROUND 4 5 -3 -4

CEILING 5 5 -3 -3 FLOOR 4 4 -4 -4 TRUNCATE 4 4 -3 -3

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

0 1 2 3-4 -3 -2 -1 4

��

��

��

��Position of –1.7 on the number linePosition of

ROUND(–1.7)


ROUND, continued


TMPVAR = ROUND (-42.7)

This statement returns -43.


RNDVAL = ROUND (4.3)

This statement returns 4.

Products Supported

BACnet series, CMX series, CX series, DCX 250, i2 series controllers (except i2885, i2887, i3885, i3887), and Cyberstation.

Modes Available



RUN Statement

Format Format 1: RUN file_list

Format 2: RUN point_list

Format 3: RUN local_variable_list

Format 4: any of format 1 thru 3 TO MESSAGEWINDOW

Format 5: any of format 1 thru 3 TO STATUSLINE

Format 6: any of format 1 thru 4 TO printer

Format 7: any of format 1 thru 4 TO file

Format 8: any of format 1 thru 4 TO file WITH APPEND

Purpose Format 1: Begins executing the program, or function you specify at the first

line, even if it is already running. This statement, in a command line or a program, controls the control system software. Format 2: Sets the output or numeric point (or points) you specify to the top of the scale defined for it (or ON). You can use this statement in a program to start up a piece of equipment, or at the command line to directly turn on a piece of equipment. Usually used with output points. Format 3: Sets a local variable inside a program to ON. You use this statement only inside a program. Format 4: When running a program, function, or report, displays the results of all PRINT statements in the Message window of the workstation. Format 5: When running a program, function, or report, displays the results of all PRINT statements in the Status Line of the workstation, one statement at a time. Format 6: When running a program, function, or report, sends the results of all PRINT statements to a printer rather than displaying them on the default port for that file. Format 7: When running a program, function, or report, prints the results of all PRINT statements into an ASCII file (you can give a full path name if you would like). If the file already contains text, the statement writes over (like taping over) the old text.


RUN, continued

Purpose continued

Format 8: When running a program, function, or report, prints the results of all PRINT statements into an ASCII file and adds (appends) them onto the end if the file already contains text.

Remarks Replace file_list with any program, function, report, or list of them

(separated by commas). Replace point_list with any defined output point or list of output points. May also be input or numeric points. Replace local_variable_list with any local variable or variables defined with NUMERIC, STRING, or DATETIME for use strictly inside the program. (See the appropriate keyword for more information.) Replace printer with a printer that has been defined. You must enclose the name of the printer in quotation marks. Replace file with a file on a workstation. May have characters in its base name and a suffix, based on the conventions of file naming. The file name must be in quotation marks. If you have not already created the file, the control system software creates it when you make the RUN statement (see Example 5). With an output point (Format 2), actually starts the piece of equipment. With an input point, sets the point to the top of the scale defined for it. With a numeric point, sets the point to the highest number in the controller system. You might RUN an input to test it when the input is not actually active. With a local variable (format 3), sets the variable to ON. To display PRINT statements on another terminal or to print them on a printer, use Format 6 and give the terminal or printer name (full path if necessary). You can also display the results of PRINT statements in a workstation message window (format 4) or to the status line on a workstation (Format 5). To save the results of all PRINT statements in a file, use Format 7.


RUN, continued

Example 1 You can use RUN in an IF..THEN statement to start a program:

Program File IF TOD > 800 THEN RUN THE HEATERPROG

Example 2 You can use RUN on the command line to start one or more pieces of

equipment:

Command Line RUN THE HEATER AND THE FAN

Example 3 You can use RUN in a program to turn on a local variable:

Program File RUN THE LEADFAN

Example 4 You can use RUN to print a report on an printer named, for example,

LPT1Q:

Program File RUN DAILYREPORT TO "LPT1Q"

Example 5 You can have all PRINT statements in CHILLERPROG print in the Message

window on your workstation, as follows:

Program File RUN ChillerProg To MessageWindow

Example 6 You can have a PRINT statement inside the AVG.TEMP program print a

point value to the status line on your workstation, as follows:

Program File RUN Avg.Temp To StatusLine


RUN, continued

Example 7 You can use RUN to save the results of running the humidity report in a file

named HUMID.RPT:

Program File RUN HumidReport To "humid.Rpt"

This statement writes over any text that may already be in the HUMID.RPT file. If the HUMID.RPT file does not exist, the CyberStation automatically creates it.

Example 8 You can add the results of running the humidity report to the end of a file

named HUMID.RPT and not write over the information already in the file (such as from the previous version of the report) by adding WITH APPEND to the RUN statement:

Program File RUN HumidReport To "Humid.RPT" with Append

Related Keywords

LINE ROTATE STOP

Alias START and OPEN (for Formats 1 through 4 only)

Products Supported

B4920, CMX series, CX series, I2 series controllers, and Cyberstation.

Modes Available



Section 7 Keywords S through Z

SAVE Statement (on controller)

Format Format 1: SAVE ALL

Format 2: SAVE list

Format 3: SAVE typelist

Format 4: SAVE ENERGYNET

Format 5: SAVE INFINET

Format 6: SAVE SITE

Format 7: any of formats above -d

Format 8: any of formats above -m

Purpose Saves programs, points, or other items on the controller that you have

created. The controller saves these items in a file called a dump file on a disk connected to the computer on the network. The computer must be running a communications package with an ANSI terminal emulator. You can later reload the file to put the information into the controller. Format 1: Saves every item on the connected controller. Format 2: Saves the listed items from the connected controller. Format 3: Saves all the items on the connected controller belonging to the type or types listed. Format 4: Saves all items from all CX controllers on the entire EnergyNet, including the CX controller you are operating or are connected to. Saves them with a “dictionary” listing their names and types. Format 5: Saves all items from the CX controller you are on and all Infinet controllers connected to it. Saves them with a “dictionary” listing their names and types.


SAVE (controller), continued

Purpose continued

Format 6: Saves all items from all CX controllers and Infinet controllers on the entire EnergyNet and all Infinets. Saves them with a “dictionary”. This format combines Format 4 and Format 5. Format 7: Saves only a “dictionary” of the items you indicate, listing their names and types. Format 8: Saves the items you indicate and, while saving, sends messages to the Messages window of the CX controller.

Remarks This keyword is restricted to users with administration level access.

Replace list with one or more names of files, points, or other items on the controller to be saved. Replace typelist with one or more names of the type of file, point, or other item on the controller to be saved. The type of an item is that it is an input or output point, program or data file, or similar type. The dictionary ensures that the controller knows point or programs or other items referred to by other programs or other items. For instance, if you save all programs, the controller requires a “dictionary” of all points referred to. This keyword applies only to CX controllers. You cannot use SAVE on an CyberStation. See Appendix C for a complete description of the contents of a dump file, and how to create your own dump file.

Example 1 You can save all items on the entire controller by using ALL:

Command Window on Controller SAVE ALL



Example 1 continued

If you are saving from a CX controller terminal, within 60 seconds you type a command to receive the file from the communications package on the computer. The command is determined by the communications package used. The following is a capture command from CROSSTALK that saves the file to a disk in drive B:

Host Computer Running CROSSTALK capture B: points

Example 2 You can save particular items on the controller by specifying their names in

a list. In this example the items are points.

Command Line SAVE VAV1.FAN, ROOM1.TEMP, ROOM2.TEMP

Example 3 You can save all items of a certain type on the connected controller, such as

all program files, by entering the type or a list of types:

Command Line SAVE PROGRAM

This command line saves all files that are programs.

Command Line SAVE INPUT

This command line saves all points that are inputs.

Command Line SAVE INPUT, OUTPUT

This command line saves all points that are inputs and outputs.

Example 4 You can save all items from every controller on the entire EnergyNet

network, and store their types in a dictionary, by entering:

Command Line SAVE ENERGYNET

This command line saves all items with their types.



Example 5 You can save all items on the connected CX controller and all controllers on

Infinet, storing their types in a dictionary, by entering:

Command Line SAVE INFINET

This command line saves all items with their types.

Example 6 You can save all items on the EnergyNet and on all controllers

on Infinet, storing their types in a dictionary, by entering:

Command Line SAVE SITE

This command line saves all items on all controllers with their types.

Example 7 You can save a dictionary of all items on the connected controller and their

types by entering:

Command Line SAVE ALL -d

This command line saves a dictionary of names and types of all items on the connected controller. An example of a dictionary of a Floor1 EnergyNet controller follows: Dictionary : Floor1 : 1

’TYPE : NAME : HANDLE : DEFAULTMODE : BAUD

CommPort : Infinet1 : 6780 : Infinet : Baud19200

CommPort : LBusNet : 6781 : Lbus : Baud19200

CommPort : Term1 : 6782 : Terminal : Baud9600

TYPE : NAME : HANDLE

Input : OutsideAirTemp : 7020

Output : OutsideAirDamper : 7030

User : dave : 7001

Program : AirVolumeCtrl : 7037



Example 7 continued

ImportExport : Floor1

Floor1 OutsideAirTemp To 2, 4-6, Floor1

Floor1 Room1 NextUnOccTime To 4, 6, 8-9, Floor1, Infinet1

EndImportExport EndDictionary Refer to Appendix C for more examples of dump files.

Example 8 While you are saving all items on the connected controller, you can send

messages about any errors that occur to a message window while saving:

Command Line SAVE ALL -m

The following example saves all numeric items on the connected controller, and sends messages about errors that occur to a message window:

Command Line SAVE NUMERIC -m

Example 9 You can both save a dictionary and send messages to a message window:

Command Line SAVE INPUT, OUTPUT -d -m

Be sure not to use a comma between the -d and -m options.

Example 10 You can save a list that contains both particular items and item types:

Command Line SAVE CHILLER, FAN, INPUT, OUTPUT, NUMERIC



Example 11 You can save all of EnergyNet and send errors messages to a

message window:

Command Line SAVE ENERGYNET -m

Related Keywords

LOAD

Alias DUMP

Products Supported

B4920, CMX series, and CX series controllers.

Modes Available

Command lines


SAVE Statement on workstation

Format Format 1: SAVE object_site_or_controller TO file_string

Format 2: any of formats above -d

Format 3: any of formats above -b

Format 4: any of formats above -n

Format 5: any of formats above -o

Format 6: any of formats above -v

Purpose Format 1: Saves the object, site, controller, or Infinet controller to the

ASCII file you indicate. That file becomes a dump file. Format 2: Saves only the “dictionary” of the objects you indicate. The dictionary lists their names and their types. Format 3: Saves “branch controllers” of the object you indicate (controllers that reside under the site or under the controller) along with the object. Format 4: Saves only the site, controller, or Infinet controller you indicate, without any of its objects. Format 5: When saving objects to the database or the dump file, overwrites any already-existing objects. Format 6: When saving objects to the database or to the dump file, checks to be sure any points that are being taken in from another controller or sent out to another controller are valid.

Remarks This keyword is restricted to users with administration level access.

Replace controller with the name of the controller from which the objects are to be saved from (see Example 1). Replace site with the name of the site where the controller is located (see Example 1).


SAVE (workstation), continued Remarks continued

Replace file_string with a path to and name of the ASCII dump file to create and store the data in. When you give the name, include a .dmp extension. The file name must be in quotation marks. You can also give a string point or local string variable that contains the name of the file. The dictionary ensures that later when you load a controller, the unit knows about all objects. For instance if a program refers to a point on another controller, the program’s controller knows about that point through the dictionary. If you use multiple options, be sure that you do not separate them with commas. You can use SAVE from the command line or in a program. If you use it in a program, you must use SAVE on a line by itself. You do not have to indicate that the program should then go to the next line, because it automatically proceeds to the next line after completing the save. See Appendix C for a complete description of the contents of a dump file.

Example 1 You can create an ASCII dump file called FLOOR1.DMP that contains all

objects on a controller called FLOOR1 from a site called BUILDING1 as follows:

Command Line SAVE \Building1 Floor1 TO "c:\floor1.dmp"

You must give the disk location (c:) and the full path to the dump file.

The dump file automatically includes all objects on the FLOOR1 controller.

Example 2 To create a dump file that contains only the dictionary of the FLOOR1

controller, you would use the -d option as follows:

Command Line SAVE \Building1 Floor1 TO "c:\floor1.dmp" -d

This command line creates a file of only the dictionary.


SAVE (workstation), continued

Example 3 To create a dump file of the FLOOR1 controller and all its Infinet

controllers, you would include the –b option, as follows:

Command Line SAVE \Building1 Floor1 TO "c:\floor1.dmp" -b

This command line puts all of the data into the FLOOR1.DMP file. The dump file automatically includes all objects that exist on the controller and on its Infinet controllers.

Example 4 To create a dump file of a controller that does not include all its objects, you

would include the -n option, as follows:

Command Line SAVE \Building1 Floor1 TO "c:\floor1.dmp" -n

Example 5 To update an existing dump file for the BoilerPanel, since you want to

overwrite any old data with the new data, you would include the -o option, as follows:

Command Line SAVE \Building1 BoilerPanel TO "c:\boiler.dmp" -o

Example 6 To create a dump file of a program called HEATING and have the

CyberStation verify that any points HEATING refers to on another controller are valid, you would use the -v option, as follows:

Command Line SAVE \Building1 Floor2 Heating TO "c:\heat.dmp" -v

Example 7 To create a dump file of a report you would give the name of the report, as

follows:

Command Line SAVE \Building2 TempRept TO "c:\temps.dmp"


SAVE (workstation), continued

Example 8 To update a dump file of the FLOOR1 controller, do not include any of its

objects except its Infinet controllers, and be sure that you overwrite any existing data in the dump file, you would use several options, as follows:

Command Line SAVE \Building1 Floor1 TO "c:\floor1.dmp" -b -n -o

Be sure not to use a comma between multiple options.

Example 9 You can also use SAVE within a program to create an automatic backup of a

controller in an ASCII dump file. The following program would update the dump file for the FLOOR1 controller, including all of its Infinet controllers, every month on the first of the month at 11:00 p.m.:

Program File TestingDateTime:

IF DayOfMonth Is 1 and TimeOfDay Is > 23:00 THEN GOTO SavingCntr

SavingCntr:

SAVE \Building1 Floor1 TO "c:\floor1.dmp" -b -o

You might want to save the controller to the database before creating the dump file.

Related Keywords

LOAD

Alias DUMP

Products Supported

CyberStation.

Modes Available

Command lines


SCAN System variable

Format SCAN

Purpose Is a variable that the controller updates regularly. Indicates the length in

seconds of the last interpreter scan interval. Accuracy is +/–. 01 second on the CX series controllers and +/–. 025 second on the Infinet controllers.

Remarks You cannot change the value of this variable. The controller automatically

updates it.

Example To find the average number of seconds per scan, you would run the

following program once every scan after all other programs have been run:

Program File NUMERIC TOT.SCAN.SCS, SCAN.COUNT, SCAN.AVG

SET TOT.SCAN.SCS, SCAN.COUNT, SCAN.AVG = 0

LINE TOTALING

TOT.SCAN.SCS = TOT.SCAN.SCS + SCAN SCAN.COUNT = SCAN.COUNT + 1

IF TOD = 2359 THEN

SCAN.AVG = TOT.SCAN.SCA/SCAN.COUNT

PRINT "The average scan for ", WKD, " is ", SCAN.AVG, "sec"

SET SCAN.AVG = 0

SET SCAN.COUNT = 0

SET TOT.SCAN.SCS = 0

ENDIF

For each scan the controller adds the seconds that scan took to the total seconds for the day. Also for each scan, the controller adds 1 to the scan counter. At the end of the day (2359, or 11:59 p.m.), the controller divides the scan total by the number of scans to get the average length of the scans that day. It then prints the average for the day.


SCAN, continued

Example continued

The numeric variables used to calculate the average number of scans per day are all set to zero at the end of each day, so that they start at zero the next day.

Alias SC

Products Supported


Modes Available



SEARCH Function

Format SEARCH (string, search_string)

Purpose Returns the position of the given search_string within string or 0 if the

controller can’t find the search_string.


Replace search_string with any text (word or words) that you want to search for in the string.


NSTR = SEARCH ("ABCDE", "BC")

The search returns 2 and sets NSTR to 2, the position BC starts at in the string.


NSTR = SEARCH ("ABCDE", "CB")

The search returns 0 and sets NSTR to 0 because CB is not in the string.

Products Supported

BACnet series, CMX series, CX series, i2 series controllers (except i2885, i2887, i3885, i3887), and CyberStation.

Modes Available



SECOND System variable

Format SECOND

Purpose Gives the exact number of seconds of the current minute, from 0

to 59.

Remarks The number of seconds is as indicated by the controller clock. If the time is

10:02:12, then SECOND equals 12.

Example If you want to take action every time 50 seconds of the minute have gone by,

you enter the following program statement:

Program File IF SECOND IS GREATER THAN 50 THEN…

Related Keywords

HOD HOUR MINUTE TOD

Alias SEC

Products Supported


Modes Available



SELECT (CASE) Statement

Format Select Case Test_Expression

Case Expression_List Statement_List Case Expression_List Statement_List … Case Else Else_Statement_List EndSelect

Purpose Execution of one or more statements, depending on the value of

Test_Expression

Remarks Test_Expression: Any numeric, string or datetime expression

Expression_List: List of one or more expressions, comma separated Statement_List: One or more statements to execute if Test_Expression matches any expression in corresponding Expression_List Else_Statement_List: One or more statements to execute if Test_Expression does not match any expression in any Expression_List. If Test_Expression matches any expression in Case Expression_List, then the statements following that Case clause are executed up to the next Case clause, if any, or up to End Select. At least one Case Expression_List clause is expected.

The Case Else clause is used to execute the statements in Else_Statement_List if Test_Expression does not match any expression in any of the Case Expression_List clauses. The Case Else clause is not required, but it is a good idea to have it, to catch any unexpected Test_Expression value.

Once the statement(s) in Statement_List or Else_Statement_List have been executed, the statement right after the End Select is the one to execute next.

Expressions may be numeric, string or datetime


SELECT (CASE), continued Statement

Example 1 Select Case Weekday

Case Monday, Tuesday

Print "Run Mon_Tue Report"

Case Wednesday thru Friday

Print "Run Wed_Thu_Fri Report"

Case Else

Print "Run Weekend Report"

EndSelect

Example 2 Numeric ReportId

Select Case ReportId

Case 1

Print "Run First Report"

Case 2, 3, 5 thru 10, 15

Print "Run Special Report"

Case 20

Print "Run Final Report"

Case Else

Print "Invalid Report Id"

EndSelect

Example 3 Select Case Numeric1 Description

Case Numeric2 Description

Print "Numeric1 and Numeric2 have the same description”

Case “West Building”

Print "Numeric1 is the West Building”

Case Else

Print "Numeric1 is not the West Building”

EndSelect


SELECT (CASE), continued Statement

Related Keywords

IF..THEN..ELSE, BREAK, CONTINUE

Products Supported

CyberStation

Modes Available

Programs


SET Statement

Format Format 1: SET namelist TO number

Format 2: SET namelist = number

Purpose Assigns a value to a point or variable.

Remarks Replace namelist with any defined name or list of names. The name or

names can be any of these: • Point (any type). • Local variable, either numeric, string, or datetime. The type of name must match the type of number. Replace number with any number or expression, including a string or date and time, or a name that stands for either of those. A numeric name can accept only the results of a numeric expression. A string name can accept only text. A datetime name can accept only a date and time.

Example 1 At any time in a program, you may want to set the value of a variable or

array of variables. You use SET with the word TO:

Program File SET AREA TO HEIGHT TIMES WIDTH

You can also use ADJUST, CHANGE, or MODIFY with TO. With ADJUST and CHANGE, the TO is required:

ADJUST VALVE TO OPEN

CHANGE SPACE.SP TO 72

MODIFY SPACE.SP TO 72

You cannot use the equals sign with ADJUST or CHANGE, but you can use it with MODIFY.


SET, continued

Example 2 You can set a variable using SET and an equals sign as in the example

below:

Program File SET KWAVG = AVERAGE (KW)

Instead of SET, you can use LET with the equals sign, as follows:

LET DWAVG = AVERAGE (KW)

You cannot use the word TO with LET. Neither the word SET nor the word LET is required with the equals sign, so you can set the same variable like this:

KWAVG = AVERAGE (KW)

Example 3 You can set a string variable or point to a particular value:

Program File SET STAT.Message TO "Heat Active"

Example 4 You can set several points and variables to a particular value:

Program File SET KWAVG, OATAVG, HWAVG, CHWAVG = 0

Example 5 You can set disabled points only from the command line. (To set disabled

points in a testing function, you must run the function from the command line.) In the example below, you disable some input points, then set them to test values:

Command Line DISABLE OAT, HWT, CHWT

SET OAT = 40

SET HWT = 120

SET CHWT = 50


SET, continued

Related Keywords

MOVE

Alias ADJUST and CHANGE (Format 1 only)

LET (Format 2 only) MODIFY

Products Supported


Modes Available



SETDISPLAY Function

Format Format 1: SETDISPLAY (display_constant)

Format 2: SETDISPLAY (display_constant_list)

Purpose Sets the DCX 250 Display Unit screen to a color (blue or white) or sets the

display to draw a polygon or series of lines (polylines). Returns SUCCESS or FAILURE.

Remarks You set the display before you begin drawing. The display remains as you

set it until you set them again. You must set the display to FILL to draw a polygon rather than drawing lines with LINEPOINT. You must set it to NOFILL to draw lines with LINEPOINT. (See LINEPOINT.) The DCX 250 screen settings you can alter with SETDISPLAY are as follows: Colors: • BLUE • WHITE Drawing:

• FILL • NOFILL Replace display_constant with a single constant from: BLUE, WHITE, FILL or NOFILL. Replace display_constant_list with a list of any of the constants (given above) with commas between. You do not need parentheses if SETDISPLAY is at the beginning of a statement. Before you begin drawing a polyline, you must set the display to NOFILL to ensure you do not draw a polygon instead.


SETDISPLAY, continued

Remarks continued

Before you begin drawing a polygon, you must set the display to FILL to ensure you do not draw a polyline instead. You can draw rectangles (see DRAWRECTANGLE) and lines (see DRAWLINE) in white or blue color by setting the display_constant to WHITE or BLUE.

Example For examples of SETDISPLAY refer to "RELATED KEYWORDS".

Related Keywords

BEGINPOLYLINE DRAWRECTANGLE DRAWLINE

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs


Shell Statement

Format SHELL string_list

Purpose Runs one or more programs named by the string or strings. Or runs one or

more programs named as string expressions from the Command Line or from inside a CyberStation program.

Remarks The string_list can be any single string or a list of strings (with commas

between them) containing programs. It can also be one or more string expressions that give a program name. TheCyberStation software must be running for the program to run. The string or strings must contain programs with the .exe suffix; however, you may omit the suffix. Note: If the path to the command you are using or the program you are running is not in your config.sys file, autoexec.bat file, or current directory, you must give the full path when you give the command. The full path always includes the disk (or partition) the program is stored on.


Shell "c:\prg\dbmaint.exe"

This command runs a program called dbmaint.exe and located under the \prg directory on the C disk. If the path to this program is in your config.sys file, you do not need to give the disk or full path; instead, you give only the program name:

Shell "dbmaint.exe"


Shell, continued

Example 2 Suppose you want to run a program that is on the C disk drive of the

workstation. If the program name is stored in a string called FileNameString, you can run it as follows:

Command Line Shell "c:\";FileNameString

A program employing this command line as a statement could execute a different program on disk drive C each time it runs.


Shell "a:\";FileNameString, "c:\prog\dbsave","d:\prg\dbrestore.exe"

In this command line, the CyberStation software runs several programs one after another. Notice that you may leave out the .exe extension on the program name. (The dbsave program, for instance, is a .exe program.) Be sure you put each disk and program name in quotation marks. The only string not in quotation marks is the name of one you created in control system software.


Shell, continued

Example 4 continued

To run any Presentation Manager program followed by arguments, you can use SHELL with a string that calls the program and its arguments. For example, to edit the dbase.txt file, stored on disk drive C, enter the following:

Command Line Shell "edit c:\dbase.txt"

The system editor window opens inside the control system software as shown on Figure 8-21.

Figure 8-21. System editor window

This command works as long as the path to the edit command is in your config.sys file.

Products Supported

CyberStation

Modes Available



Show Statement

Format Format 1: SHOW objectlist

Format 2: SHOW logview_list

Purpose Displays the object or objects each in a separate window on a CyberStation

screen.

Remarks Replace objectlist with any single object or a list of objects (with commas

between them) defined in the control system software. Objects include sites, controllers, workstations, Infinet controllers, points, programs, functions, reports, data files, panels, and so on. The objects may have been defined on either a CX series controller or a CyberStation. Reports and panels both open in Run mode. All files other than reports open and display their Andover Controls Plain English statements. Sites and controllers open to the window you defined them in. (Using SHOW gives the same result as selecting File, then Open from the Menu bar.) Replace logview_list with a LogView that you have saved for the Alarm Log, Event Log, Error Log, or Activity Log. May not be more than one LogView for the same log.


Show AirHandler1

The workstation software opens the windows for the air handler.


Show AirHandler1, Room 1VAV, Room2 VAV

The workstation software opens the windows for the air handler (controller) and two VAV boxes (Infinet controllers).


Show, continued


Show DailyReport, ChillerDisplay

The DailyReport opens and displays in Run mode. The panel called ChillerDisplay opens and displays in Run mode.

You can switch to Edit mode once each is open.


Show InputsOwenEdited, Bldg4PointsInAlm

This SHOW command opens the Activity Log showing the InputsOwenEdited log view range and the Alarm Log showing the Bldg4PointInAlm log view range. You can open more than one LogView at a time, as long as they are not both for the same log; for instance, you cannot open two different LogViews of the Activity Log.

Products Supported

CyberStation.

Modes Available



SHOWREPORT Statement

Format Format 1: SHOWREPORT object

Format 2: SHOWREPORT string

Purpose Displays the result of a program as a text file in Microsoft Notepad or as an

HTML file on an HTML browser.

Remarks Replace object with the name of a program or a listview. Programs must

include the file path. Listviews must contain an associated HTML template file and an HTML browser must be installed on the CyberStation. Replace string with a text string containing the full file path of the HTML file. This also requires that an HTML browser be installed on the CyberStation. When SHOWREPORT runs an HTML report, the results are displayed in a file that has the same name as the HTML report, but with result_number appended to it. For example, with the first usage of SHOWREPORT myreport.htm

The file name myreportresult_1.hmt will appear in the HTML browser. The second time myreport.htm is used the file will change to myreportresult_2.hmt and so on. To restart the result file numbering, move or delete the old files from the directory that holds your HTML report.

Example 1 Command line

SHOWREPORT MyReport

This command displays the results of a program named MyReport in Microsoft Notepad.


SHOWREPORT “C:\Program File\Continuum\Reports\SystemChk.htm”

This command displays the specified HTML file as a web page in your HTML browser.


SHOWREPORT, continued


SHOWREPORT Floor1\NtCtlr1\ListView1

This command displays the result of an HTML report template that has been associated with the listview object named ListView1. The report displays as a web page in the HTML browser on your CyberStation.

By using special HTML tags that work with Continuum, the report template can extract attribute values from listview objects and any other Continuum object.

Products Supported

CyberStation.

Modes Available



SIN Function

Format SIN (number)

Purpose Returns the sine of the angle you specify.

Remarks The number is any number or expression. The number represents an angle

in radians. Radians = degrees TIMES (3.14159/180). Degrees = radians TIMES (180/3.14159).


RESULT = SIN (1)

Alias SINE

Products Supported

ACX series, BACnet series, CMX series, CX series, DCX 250, i2 series, LCX series, SCX series, TCX series controllers (except i2885,i2887,i3885,i3887), and CyberStation.

Modes Available



SQRT Function

Format SQRT (number)

Purpose Returns the square root of number.



MVAL = SQRT (4)

The SQRT function returns 2 and the statement sets MVAL to 2.

Products Supported


Modes Available



StandardDeviation Function

Format Format 1: StandardDeviation (numeric_list)

Format 2: StandardDeviation (numeric_array) Format 3: StandardDeviation (numeric_log)

Purpose Finds the standard deviation of a series of numbers. The standard deviation

is the result of the following steps: • Find the average of the list. • Find the differences between the average and each number. If the

average is 110 and one of the numbers is 112, that difference is 2. • Square the differences, so 2 becomes 4. • Add up the squares and find the average of them. • Take the square root of the average. Format 1: Returns the standard deviation of the listed items. Format 2: Returns the standard deviation of the items in the array. Format 3: Returns the standard deviation of the items in the log.


numbers, separated by commas. Replace numeric_array with any defined array that contains numbers. Replace numeric_log with any defined log that contains numbers. Items in the list must all be either numbers or variables that contains numbers. If any of the items in the list in Format 1 is an array or a log but does not indicate an element number, the controller retrieves the current value of the point and treats it like any other single item in the list.


StandardDeviation, continued

Example 1 To find the standard deviation of several temperatures, you place them

directly in the STANDARDDEVIATION statement. You list them in parentheses as follows:

Program File TEMPDEV = StandardDeviation (70, 72, 74)

The standard deviation returned is 1.63299.

Example 2 Since you know a certain temperature varies, you have been storing readings

in an array called VARTMP. You then use the STANDARDDEVIATION function on that array, as follows:

Program File VARIATION = StandardDeviation (VARTMP)

Example 3 You have been logging temperatures in a log for several hours. You can find

the standard deviation of them as follows:

Program File DEVIANCE = StandardDeviation (TEMPLOG)

Example 4 You can find the standard deviation of several temperatures in a list,


Program File AVGDEV = StandardDeviation (TMP1, TMP2, TEMPLOG)



StandardDeviation, continued

Alias SD

Products Supported

BACnet series, CMX series, CX series, DCX 250, i2 series controllers (except i2885,i2887,i3885,i3887), and CyberStation.

Modes Available



STATUS# System variable (programmable)

Format STATUSnumber

Purpose Turns on the corresponding status light on the front door of the CX 9200

series controller if you set it to ON and turns it off if OFF. You label the numbered status light on the controller with the event, program, or similar item it indicates the status of.

Remarks Replace number with number or expression that gives the number of the

status light on the front door of the CX 9201 controller, up to 8. If number is greater than the highest status light number, the controller does not recognize the word. The status lights on the CX 9201 controller are numbered 1 through 8. You may not put a space between STATUS and the number. You cannot pulse a status light ON for a particular number of seconds—it must be ON or OFF. The light remains ON or OFF until you change it in a program or from the command line.

Example Suppose you labeled the fourth status light on the CX 9201 controller

“Chiller Alarm Active,” so you could set it when the alarm occurs. After the alarm occurs, to set the light, enter this statement in your program:

Program File IF CHILLERALARM4 IS ON THEN SET STATUS4 TO ON

Products Supported

CX 9200 series controller only.

Modes Available



STOP Statement

Format Format 1: STOP program_list

Format 2: STOP point_list

Purpose Format 1: At the command line level, halts the executing program or

programs you specify at current line. Format 2: Sets the point (or points) to bottom of the scale that has been defined for it. It then turns the equipment off, controlling the equipment through the point. You can use this statement in a program to turn off a piece of equipment, or at the command line to directly turn off a piece of equipment.

Remarks Replace program_list with any program or list of programs.

Replace point_list with any defined output point or list of points. The statement is not designed for other types of points, but you can stop an input or numeric point. With an output point, actually stops the piece of equipment. With an input point, sets the point to the bottom of the scale defined for it. With a numeric point, sets the point to the lowest number in the controller system. You might STOP an input after you RUN it to test it when the input is not actually active.

Example 1 You can STOP a program from inside a program in response to a certain set

of conditions. For instance, to halt the HEAT.PROG after 8 p.m.:

Program File IF TOD > 2000 THEN STOP THE HEAT.PROG

If you do not name a program after STOP, the controller assumes you mean the current program.


STOP, continued

Example 2 You can use STOP on the command line to stop one or more pieces of

equipment:

Command Line STOP THE HEATER AND THE FAN

Related Keywords

ROTATE RUN

Alias CLOSE

SHUT

Products Supported


Modes Available



STRING Statement

Format STRING string_length namelist [array_size_number]

Purpose Creates and defines one or more names as local string variables. You define

the variables inside a program for use only in that particular program. You can specify the length of the string of characters with the string_length. Each variable may be a single variable or an array. You specify an array by including the array_size_number when you define it. Note: STRING also defines fields inside a data file. See the STRING data file statement for format and usage of STRING in data files.

Remarks Replace string_length (optional) with a number up to 132 for a controller or

254 for Cyberstation, that tells the controller how many characters are in the string. Replace namelist with the name of the string (text) variable you are defining, or a series of string variables separated by commas. Replace array_size_number (optional) with any number up to 32,767 that tells the controller how many positions are in the array. You must define all local string variables at the top of your program. Used to store textual information in the current program. If you do not give a string_length, the string is given the default length, which are 16 characters.

Example 1 To set a string variable, you must first define it using STRING. To define a

single string variable of the default length, you enter this program line:

Program File STRING FILENAME


STRING, continued

Example 2 To have a program read information from a file containing text, you would

create a series of string variables like those below to contain each piece of text information. You can create them all in the same program line:

Program File STRING 20 LNAME, LOGON, PWORD, ROOM, TERMINAL

The length of each string is 20. To give them different lengths, you must define (declare) each one separately.

Example 3 To create a string array of variables, you must first define the array. The

string called PUMP below is an eight-character string with 20 variables in the array (PUMP [1], PUMP [2], PUMP [3], and so on).

Program File STRING 8 PUMP[20]

PUMP[6] = "HEATPUMP"

Example 4 You can create several arrays of string variables and single string variables

all in one program line:

Program File STRING PUMP[6], BLOWER[8], HEATERNM, FANNAME

Related Keywords

DATETIME NUMERIC STRINGFILL

Products Supported

ACX series, BACnet series (except b3885, b3887), CX series, DCX 250, i2 series (except i2885, i2887) controllers, and CyberStation.

Modes Available

Programs


STRINGFILL Function

Format STRINGFILL(number, charactercode)

Purpose Returns a string of number length containing a particular character that you

specify with the ASCII character code named by charactercode.

Remarks Replace number with any number or expression. Gives the length of the

string. Replace charactercode with the ASCII character code of the character you want to fill the string. See Appendix A for a list of ASCII codes.

Example 1 Suppose you want to print a series of 60 asterisks across the top of a report.

You would use STRINGFILL to print them by giving it the number 60 for the number of asterisks, and the number 42 which is the ASCII code for the asterisk, as follows:

Program File PRINT STRINGFILL (60, 42)

Example 2 You can draw dashed horizontal lines in a report using STRINGFILL by

giving it the number of spaces you want the line to print across (60) and the ASCII code for a dash (45):

Program File PRINT STRINGFILL (60, 45)

Example 3 Suppose you want to design a graph to show the peak kilowatt demand for

each day in the last week. You can create a bar graph by filling the appropriate number of spaces with, for instance, asterisks. The following program sets up such a graph.


STRINGFILL, continued

Example 3 continued

Program File Numeric DayX

PRINT "Peak KW Demand for Week"

PRINT " "

FOR DayX = 1 TO 7

PRINT ST( DayX);" + "; STRINGFILL(KWD[DayX] /100, 42)

NEXT DayX

PRINT " +----+----+----+----+----+"

PRINT " 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 "

After the program prints the title, it proceeds to a FOR..NEXT loop. Inside the FOR..NEXT loop, the program first prints the short name of the weekday, based on the number for the day (1 for SUN) using a customized function called ST. Next, the program prints a plus sign after the name. STRINGFILL then uses two values to print the kilowatt demand for that day:

• Kilowatt demand for the day from the KWD array (KWD [1] = Sunday's kilowatt demand, KWD [2] = Monday's kilowatt demand, and KWD [3] = Tuesday's kilowatt demand, and so on.

• ASCII code for the asterisk (42).

To see how STRINGFILL uses these two values, take a look at Sunday in the graph the program produces, shown below.

Program File Output Peak KW Demand for Week

SUN + * * * * * *

MON + * * * * * * * * * *

TUE + * * * * * * * *

WED + * * * * * * * * *

THU + * * * * * * *

FRI + * * * * * * * *

SAT + * * *


STRINGFILL, continued

Example 3 continued +----+----+----+----+----+

0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 First the program retrieves Sunday's kilowatt demand from the KWD array. Sunday's kilowatt demand is 600 Kw. The program divides the demand by 100, giving 6. So STRINGFILL prints six asterisks for Sunday. The program then retrieves Monday's kilowatt demand from the KWD array. Monday's kilowatt demand is 1000 Kw. The program divides the demand by 100, giving 10. So STRINGFILL prints 10 asterisks for Monday. The program continues to carry out the same process for each day of the week. When it finishes printing Saturday's kilowatt demand, it prints the scale for the graph, displaying 0 to 2500 Kw.

Related Keywords

STRING

Products Supported


Modes Available



STRTODATE Function

Format STRTODATE(date_time)

Purpose Returns a date and time that corresponds to the particular date and time you

specify in the date_time. The controller has a unique number for each moment in time it can understand. The system uses this date_time to process information about the date and time. If you print a variable that is equal to a STRTODATE, you receive the date_time.

Remarks The date_time is any actual date and time in a string (surrounded by

quotation marks) or the name of a string that has been set to a valid date/time string.

To receive the date and time from STRTODATE, you must enter both the date and the time in one continuous input line. You may position the time before the date on that line, if you prefer.

You may set up the date in any reasonably interpretable format—using all numbers or spelling the month as either the full word or the three-letter abbreviation. You can separate the month, day, and year with spaces, slashes, dashes, periods, commas, or any combination of these punctuation characters.

If you prefer to put the day first, you can, as long as the day is obviously a day. Two ways that a day cannot be misinterpreted as a month are: • Spell the month as a word so that the day is the only other number so

low. • Use numbers for both month and day only if the day is greater than 12,

since any day between 1 and 12 could be interpreted as a month.

The month can be: JAN[UARY] JUL[Y] FEB[RUARY] AUG[UST] MAR[CH] SEP[TEMBER] APR[IL] OCT[OBER] MAY NOV[EMBER] JUN[E] DEC[EMBER]


STRTODATE, continued

Remarks continued

YEAR

You may enter the year as a two- or four-digit year after 1988. WEEKDAY

Since the controller already knows the day of the week that corresponds to each date, you don't need the day. You can, however, place the day of the week after the date; it must be either the three-letter abbreviation or the completely spelled-out name of the day. The weekday can be: MON[DAY] TUE[SDAY] WED[NESDAY] THU[RSDAY] FRI[DAY] SAT[URDAY] SUN[DAY] TIME

You enter the time as the one- or two-digit hour and one- or two-digit minute separated by a colon. You can type another colon and follow it with seconds if you would like. You can enter the time in 24-hour time or use regular time with AM or PM after it. The controller translates that time into the 24-hour clock. For instance, you can enter 3:00 PM and the controller automatically translates it to 15:00:00. The following are the acceptable time formats: hh:mm:ss [AM/PM] hh:mm [AM/PM] Where AM and PM (upper- or lowercase) are optional and: hh is hours (00 - 23) and 00 - 11 is AM and hh > 11 is PM if AM/PM isn't specified mm is minutes (00 - 59) ss is seconds (00 - 59)


STRTODATE, continued


CONV.DATE = STRTODATE ("SEPTEMBER-21-20001 11:00 pm")

Alias STRTOTIME

Products Supported


Modes Available



STRTONUM Function

Format STRTONUM(string)

Purpose Converts a string that contains a number in a string variable or other string

form to a numeric variable so it can be used in mathematical operations. Returns the converted numeric value.

Remarks The string is any number in ASCII form (in quotation marks) or string

expression that stands for a number in text form. If string is not a valid numeral or series of numerals, STRTONUM fails. If STRTONUM fails, the program either goes to LINE E (see LINE keyword) or disables.

Once a number is in a numeric variable, it can be used in mathematical expressions and operations.

Example If you receive string input from the keyboard, but you want it to be numeric

so you can add it to another number, you use STRTONUM. The following program adds the string (in quotation marks) that contains 78.5 to the number 92.8:

Program File NUMERIC TRANS TRANS = STRTONUM("78.5") + 92.8 PRINT TRANS

Output 171.3

Alias VAL

Products Supported


Modes Available



SUCCESS Constant

Format SUCCESS

Purpose Used in expressions to indicate a process or function has completed

successfully.

Remarks SUCCESS is always numeric and equal to zero.


IF OpenFile (C:\text\zoe.txt, ReadOnly, ZONEDATA) = SUCCESS THEN

PRINT "OPEN SUCCESSFUL"

GOTO NEXTPROG

ENDIF

Related Keywords

FAILURE

Products Supported

CMX series, CX series, DCX 250 controllers, and CyberStation

Modes Available



SUM Function

Format Format 1: SUM (numeric_list)

Format 2: SUM (numeric_array) Format 3: SUM (numeric_log)

Purpose Format 1: Returns the sum of the listed items.

Format 2: Returns the sum of the items in the array you name. Format 3: Returns the sum of the items in the log you name.


numbers, separated by commas. Replace numeric_array with any defined array that contains numbers. Replace numeric_log with any defined log that contains numbers. Replace number with any number or expression. Items in the list must all be either numbers or variables that contains numbers. If any of the items in the list in Format 1 is an array or a log, the controller retrieves the first item from the array or log and treats it like any other single item in the list.

Example 1 To sum several timers, you place them directly in the SUM function

statement. You list them in parentheses after SUM, as follows:

Program File TOTAL.TIMERS = SUM (TIMER1, TIMER2, TIMER3, TIMER4)


SUM, continued

Example 2 You have been storing calculated values in an array called PARTTME. You

then use the sum on that array, as follows:

Program File TOTAL TIME = SUM (PARTTIME)

Example 3 You have been logging temperatures in a log for several hours. To find the

sum of them, you find the sum of that log, as follows:

Program File HOURLYTOT = SUM (TEMPLOG)

Example 4 You find the sum of several temperatures in a list, including the current

value of TEMPLOG, as follows:

Program File HOURLYAVG = SUM (TMP801, TMP802, TEMPLOG)


Products Supported

ACX series, BACnet series, CMX series,CX series, DCX 250, i2 series, LCX series, SCX series, TCX series controllers, and CyberStation.

Modes Available



SystemStatus System variable

Format SystemStatus

Purpose Indicates the current access control mode of the ACX and CX series

controllers.

Remarks Applies only to ACX and CX series controllers.

You cannot set the SystemStatus. The control system software sets it for you automatically. You can print SystemStatus from the command line or use it in a program. You must connect to the access controller before you can print or use the SystemStatus. Or you can access SystemStatus using the full path to it. The three values the SystemStatus can have are as follows: • Normal—The 700 series controller is working normally. • NoComm—Communication between the access server and the 700

series controller has failed. • NoDatabase—Access server or the access controller has been reset or

has otherwise lost the database to check access card numbers and personal identification numbers (PINs) against.

Example 1 If you want to see whether or not communication is occurring between the

access server and the Door1 access controller, you can type the following on the command line:

Command Line PR Door1 SystemStatus

The system responds as follows if no communication is occurring:

Door1 SystemStatus = NoComm


SystemStatus, continued

Example 2 If you want to take a particular action each time the Door1 700 series

controller has lost communication with the database, you can type the following in a program:

Command Line IF Door1 SystemStatus = NoComm or Door1 SystemStatus = NoDataBase THEN

Run InterimProcedure Endif

Products Supported

ACX and CX series controllers.

Modes Available



TAB Function

Format TAB(number)

Purpose Returns a series of continuous blank spaces. The number of blank spaces is

number.

Remarks The number is any number or expression. The number represents the

number of spaces you want to push the printed text to the right, as on a typewriter. Must be less than 132.


PRINT TAB(10); "This is a Title"

Output This is a Title

Notice that the text is moved ten spaces to the right

Related Keywords

PRINT

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs


TAN Function

Format TAN (number)

Purpose Returns the tangent of number.

Remarks The number is any number or expression. The number represents an angle

measured in radians. Radians = degrees TIMES (3.14159/180). Degrees = radians TIMES (180/3.14159).


POSITION = TAN (3.14159/4)

Alias TANGENT

Products Supported


Modes Available



TD Local variable

Format TD

Purpose Contains the number of days (Time in Days) that have elapsed since the

program has been on the current line. The total is stored as an IEEE floating point number.

Remarks TD stands for Time in Days.

Example To have a lead pump run for 3 days, then turn on the lag pump, you would

check to see if the pump has been running for 3 days after you activate it:

Program File LINE FIRSTPUMP

TURN ON LEADPUMP IF TD = 3 THEN GOTO SWITCHPUMP

LINE SWITCHPUMP

IF LEADPUMP = PUMP1 THEN SET LEADPUMP = PUMP2

ELSE SET LEADPUMP = PUMP1

ENDIF

The controller measures 3 days starting the instant that the program is on the line making the request for elapsed time.

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs


TH Local variable

Format TH

Purpose Contains the number of hours (Time in Hours) that have elapsed since the

program has been on the current line. The total is stored as an IEEE floating point number.

Remarks TH stands for Time in Hours.

Example To have the lead fan run 1 hour then run the lag fan, you would check to see

if the fan has been running for 1 hour after you activate it:

Program File LINE FIRSTFAN

TURN ON LEADFAN IF TH = 1 THEN GOTO SWITCHFAN

LINE SWITCHFAN IF LEADFAN = FAN1 THEN

SET LEADFAN = FAN2 ELSE

SET LEADFAN = FAN1 ENDIF

The controller measures 1 hour starting the instant that the program is on the line making the request for elapsed time.

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs


THE Statement

Format THE name

Purpose Performs no function, but enhances readability.

Remarks The name is any point, piece of equipment, terminal, computer, or printer.

THE can precede a name only. It cannot precede a keyword that designates an action (verb).


TURN ON THE FAN

Products Supported


Modes Available



TIMEPIECE Function

Format TIMEPIECE (datetime_system_variable , datetime_name)

Purpose Retrieves the piece of time (hour, minute, second) or the piece of the date

(weekday, month, day of the month, year, day of the year) from a variable or point.

Remarks Replace datetime_system_variable with one of the date or time system

variables: HOUR, MINUTE, SECOND, HOD, TOD, WEEKDAY, MONTH, DAYOFMONTH, YEAR, DAYOFYEAR Replace datetime_name with any variable, date and time, including datetime variables and points and the DATE system variable.


DATETIME DATE1 NUMERIC CURRENTMIN DATE1 = STRTODATE ("5-25-01 11:13:23") CURRENTMIN = TIMEPIECE (MINUTE, DATE1)

In this program, the TIMEPIECE function retrieves the minute from DATE1 and returns 13.


NUMERIC TODAYMONTH TODAYMONTH = TIMEPIECE (MONTH, DATE)

In this program, the TIMEPIECE function retrieves the month from the DATE system variable. If the date is June 20, 1992, TODAYMONTH is set to JUNE.


TIMEPIECE, continued

Related Keywords

DATE DATETIME HOUR MINUTE SECOND HOD TOD MONTH YEAR DAYOFMONTH DAYOFYEAR

Products Supported


Modes Available



TIMES Operator

Format number TIMES number

Purpose Multiplies two numbers.



ENERGYCOST = BUILDING1 KW TIMES 1.78


ENERGYCOST = BUILDING1 KW * 1.78

Alias MULTIPLIED BY

MULT *

Products Supported


Modes Available



TM Local variable

Format TM

Purpose Contains the number of minutes (Time in Minutes) that have elapsed since

the program has been on the current line. The total is stored as an IEEE floating point number.

Remarks TM stands for Time in Minutes.

Example To have a 5-minute warmup of a fan before turning on the pump, you would

check to see if the fan has been running for 5 minutes after you activate it:

Program File LINE WARMUP

TURN ON FAN IF TM = 5 THEN GOTO RUNNING

LINE RUNNING TURN ON PUMP

The controller measures 5 minutes starting the instant that the program is on the line making the request for elapsed time.

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs


TOD System variable

Format TOD

Purpose Gives the time of the day, from 12:00 a.m. (midnight) to 11:59 p.m. Also

allows you to compare the time of day to 0 (midnight) to 2359, where 2359 is the equivalent of 23:59 on the 24-hour clock.

Remarks The time of day is the time from the controller clock. You cannot change

TOD. The controller automatically updates it.

Example 1 To check to see if the time of day is past 5:00 a.m., you enter one of the

following:

Program File IF TOD IS GREATER THAN 5:00 am THEN…

If you do not give a.m. or p.m., the controller assumes you mean a.m. You must include the colon with “am” or “pm.” Never use periods after the A or M, or P or M.

Example 2 When you print out TOD, as in the following example, you always receive

the 12-hour time followed by a.m. or p.m.:

Program File PRINT TOD

The time appears as follows:

8:00:00 pm

Related Keywords

HOD HOUR MINUTE


TOD, continued

Alias TIMEOFDAY

Products Supported


Modes Available



TOUCHEDCELL System variable

Format TOUCHEDCELL

Purpose Gives the number from 1 to 64 of the first block (cell) that an operator

touched on the DCX 250 Display Unit screen during the last scan. If the operator touches more than one cell, the lowest (top leftmost) cell number is the value.

Remarks The cells on the 250 screen are as shown on Figure 8-22.

Figure 8-22. The DCX 250 Display Unit screen touch cells

The operator must press the cell for at least 100 ms. If the operator presses the cell continuously, the TOUCHEDCELL value updates every second. You can reset TOUCHEDCELL to zero with CLEARSCREEN.

�

�

��

��

��

��

�

�

��

�

�

��

�

�

��

��

��

��

�

�

��

� ��

� ��

� ��

� ��

� ��

� ��

� ��

��

��

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64


TOUCHEDCELL, continued

Example 1 You determine whether or not an operator has pressed a particular button on

the screen, by comparing the value of TOUCHEDCELL (the last touched cell) to the cell that button appears on. For instance, on the graphic shown in Figure 8-23, the first button is on CELL 19, the second on CELL 35, and the third on CELL 51.

Figure 8-23. Touch Cell grid behind buttons

You write the program as follows:

Program File IF TOUCHEDCELL = 19 THEN GOTO ROOM1FAN.DCX

IF TOUCHEDCELL = 35 THEN GOTO ROOM2FAN.DCX

IF TOUCHEDCELL = 51 THEN GOTO ROOM3FAN.DCX

When you draw buttons, be sure each overlays a particular cell.

��

��

��

�

�

��

�

�

��

�

�

��

�

�

��

��

��

��

�

�

��

� ��

� ��

� ��

� ��

� ��

� ��

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Room2 FanStatus

Room3 FanStatus

��

��

��

Room1 FanStatus

ROOM FAN STATUSES


TOUCHEDCELL, continued

Example 2 You determine whether or not an operator has pressed any button by

determining that TOUCHEDCELL has any value other than zero.

Program File IF TOUCHEDCELL THEN RUN GRAPHDISPLAY

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs


TRUNCATE Function

Format TRUNCATE (number)

Purpose Drops the fractional part of number and returns the integer..

Remarks The number is any number or expression. See the ROUND keyword for a

comparison of all rounding functions


CHP = TRUNCATE (4.5)

TRUNCATE returns 4 and the program statement sets CHP to 4.


VAL.C = TRUNCATE (-1.7)

TRUNCATE returns -1 and the program statement sets VAL.C to -1.

Alias TRUNC

Products Supported


Modes Available



TS Local variable

Format TS

Purpose Contain the number of seconds (Time in Seconds) that have elapsed since

the program has been on the current line. The total is stored as an IEEE floating point number.

Remarks TS stands for Time in Seconds.

Example To allow for a 90-second valve stroke time, see if 90 seconds have elapsed

since you opened the valve:

Program File LINE WaitForValve

TURN ON Valve IF TS >= 90 THEN GOTO StartHWPump

LINE StartHWPump Turn on HWPump

The controller measures 90 seconds starting the instant that the program is on the line making the request for elapsed time.

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs


TURN Statement

Format Format 1: TURN ON point_list

TURN OFF point_list Format 2: TURN point_list ON TURN point_list OFF

Purpose Sets the name or names to the top of the defined range for the point if ON

and to bottom of the range if OFF.

Remarks The point_list is one or more defined output or numeric points; the statement

is not designed for other types of points. All output points used with TURN must have a range with its top and bottom defined.

Example 1 Suppose you want to turn on the fan and the pump. You can turn both on in

one program statement:

Program File TURN ON THE FAN AND THE PUMP

Example 2 You can place the word ON or OFF after the name of the point:

Program File TURN THE PUMP OFF

Example 3 You can also place ON or OFF before the name of the point:

Program File TURN OFF THE PUMP


TURN, continued

Related Keywords

SET

Products Supported


Modes Available



UniquePIN System variable

Format UniquePin

Purpose Indicates whether or not each person who has access must have a unique

personal identification number (PIN).

Remarks You cannot set the UniquePIN system variable, but you can print or

access it from the command line or use it in a program. Its value is always TRUE or FALSE.

You must connect to the applicable controller before you can access UniquePIN from the command line. Or you can access UniquePIN using the full path.

Example 1 To find out whether or not the personal identification numbers (PINs) on the

CX controller are each unique, you can print UniquePIN from the command line as follows:

Command Line PR AccessController UniquePIN

The response will be either TRUE or FALSE.

Example 2 To take a particular action based on whether or not the personal

identification numbers (PINs) on a controller are each unique, you can type the following program statement into the CX controller:

Command Line IF DoorController UniquePIN is TRUE THEN…

Products Supported

ACX series controllers, CX series controllers (except 9500), and CMX series controllers.

Modes Available



CAUTION Update momentarily changes the port to RAW mode, while it is dialing. However, while the port is in Raw mode, you cannot sent it READ or PRINT statements. READ and PRINT both return FAILURE and they drop any characters you are attempting to send down the port.

! !

UPDATE Function

Format UpDate (user, phone_number, comport, timeout)

Purpose From a controller, if a phone number is provided, dials the phone number to

contact a workstation and pushes alarms and events to the workstation. If the phone number is an empty string, Update assumes that a PE program has already opened the port and established a connection. After update, the controller sends Alarm Event Update packet to the workstation which then polls for alarms and events. You indicate the port where the Infinity modem is connected on the controller.

Remarks UpDate applies only on an Infinity controller with a modem. UpDate always

pushes alarms and events to the workstation. You can use UpDate in a program, but not on the Command line. When you use UpDate from a program, you must use it on a labeled line by itself. After it executes, UpDate automatically moves the program to the next labeled line. The next labeled line should then test for the returned results of UpDate. If a valid phone number string is provided, UpDate turns on DTR (Data Terminal Ready) for the controller’s port. Otherwise, UpDate assumes that a PE program has opened the port and established a connection. Update automatically dials the call to the modem if you provide a valid phone number string, so you do not use it with the dial keyword. The phone number string can be a simple telephone number such as ”978-470-0555”.


UPDATE, continued

Remarks continued

If the first character in the phone number string is not an ‘A’ or ‘a’ then the update command will issue the standard “ATDT” Command to the modem and then the phone number to be dialed. The phone number string can also contain valid AT Commands such as “ATD,T,, 978-470-0555”. If the first character in the phone number is an ‘A’ or ‘a’, the UpDate keyword assumes that the phone number string contains valid AT commands prior to the phone number to command the modem to dial. This feature is useful for 3rd party modems or Cellular Modems that require something other than “ATDT” to command dialing. UpDate automatically checks to see if the workstation acknowledges the update request. If it does: • UpDate starts a PPP session. • PPP Alarm & Event Msg is sent to the workstation. If no response is received, the controller drops the connection after timeout. Otherwise, the controller waits until the workstation finishes polling for Alarms and Events and then terminates the connection.

Replace timeout with the number of minutes that the system waits before it starts the PPP session. If you do not give a timeout, it is automatically set to 0. The maximum you can set the timeout to is 255 seconds. If you set it to a greater number of seconds, UpDate automatically sets the timeout to 225. Can also be a numeric point or local numeric variable set to the number of seconds. UpDate can return any of the following results:


UPDATE, continued

Returned When Success Controller has established connection with the workstation

Failure One of the following situations exists: • Comm port is not in the correct mode. • Default port is not defined. • Phone number contains an incorrect expression or is otherwise

incorrect. • Controller does not receive an ACK from the workstation. • Workstation does not establish a PPP connection with the

controller within 30 seconds plus the timeout you supply.

DialNoCarrier Controller does not detect a carrier on the communications line.

DialNoAnswer Controller detects a continuous ringback signal on the line for longer than the modem expiration timer allows. The expiration timer is the S-7 register, which is automatically set to 50 seconds if you do not change it. To change it, refer to the modem manual.

DialBusyTone Controller detects a busy signal on the line. DialNotDialTone Modem is waiting for a dial tone before dialing and has not

received one.


Example You can use UpDate to update alarms and events. The following program is an example of using UpDate to update alarms and events at an interval. It uses a FallThru program to force the controller to "Push" it's updates after a given time interval.

'Program triggered by minute system variable to update alarms and events every 15 minutes

Numeric FailedAttempt, UpdateStatus

Initialize: FailedAttempt = 0 If (Minute Mod 15) = 0 Then GoTo PushUpdates Else

GoTo EndProg Endif PushUpdates:

UpdateStatus = UPDATE ("acc:acc", "122"', comm3, 4)

‘ Using alternate AT Command ‘ Issue the ATD command, then pause, issue the T command and ‘ pause again… ‘UpdateStatus = UPDATE ("acc:acc", "ATD,T,, 122"', comm3, 4) ‘ Assuming PE has already opened the port and ‘ established a connection ‘UpdateStatus = UPDATE ("acc:acc",""', comm3, 4)

CheckUpdate:

If UpdateStatus = Success Then GoTo Endprog FailedAttempt = FailedAttempt + 1

AltUpdate:

UpdateStatus = UPDATE ("acc:acc", "236", comm3, 4) ‘ Using alternate AT Command ‘ Issue the ATD command, then pause, issue the T command and ‘ pause again… ‘UpdateStatus = UPDATE ("acc:acc", "ATD,T,, 236"', comm3, 4)

CheckAltUpdate: If UpdateStatus = Success Then GoTo EndProg FailedAttempt = FailedAttempt + 1 If FailedAttempt < 4 Then GoTo PushUdates

EndProg: Stop


UPDATE, continued

Example continued

For example, if the controller calls the workstation and the workstation is off line (busy), then the controller waits 4 minutes until the line is dropped. If the workstation comes on-line within the 4 minutes, then the UdDate will take effect.

Related Keywords

InitModem

Products Supported

Available only on CX series controllers.

Modes Available



UpdateExtLog Function

Format UpdateExtLog (object, datetime)

Purpose Begins updating an extended log for the point, group of points, or controller

you give it. If you are not sure what an extended log is, refer to the Continuum CyberStation Configurator'sGuide for further information. Note: You must use this statement on an CyberStation. It is not available on controllers.

Remarks Replace object with the name or full path and name of a point that is set up

as an extended log, a group (where some group members are extended logs), or a controller (with some points that are extended logs). When you give a controller, you must give the full path to the controller. Can also be a local OBJECT variable. Replace datetime (optional) with the datetime point or local variable that the software automatically sets to the next time the extended log needs to be updated. This point or variable gets its information from the extended log setup information of the point, group, or controller. If you do not provide a datetime point or variable, UpdateExtLog does not return the next date and time to update the extended log. You must use the UpdateExtLog statement on a line by itself. After executing a statement formed with UpdateExtLog, the program automatically proceeds to the next labeled line. UpdateExtLog returns SUCCESS or FAILURE. When do you update the extended log? When you expect the log is full and ready to store values long-term, in the extended log. Since you do not know this information for every log you have set up, you can let the software retrieve the information from the database. As soon as the software sees the UpdateExtLog statement in a program, it understands the purpose of the datetime variable you defined and retrieves the correct value for it from the database.


UpdateExtLog, continued

Remarks continued

(You can, however, set the value of the datetime variable yourself, if you prefer.)

You can run UpdateExtLog on only one extended log at a time per workstation. If you attempt to update more than one extended log at a time, the software considers it an error and displays that error in the Error Log of the database.

What is the maximum number of entries you can have in an extended log? It is the number of entries you would have if you logged the point value every half-hour for one year—up to 17,520 entries. This number remains the same, regardless of the interval. So, if you log the point every 15 minutes (twice as often), you can store up to 6 month’s (half as long a period) of extended log entries for that point.

Example 1 Suppose you want to update an extended log called TEMP1 on the FLOOR1

controller. You would use the UpdateExtLog statement as shown in the following program:

Program File Numeric Result Datetime UpdateTimer

Updating: Result = UpdateExtLog (Building3 Floor1 Temp1, UpdateTimer)

Checking: If Result = Success Then

Goto WaitUntilLogTime Else

Print "Could not update extended log for Floor1 Temp1" Stop

Endif

WaitUntilLogTime: If Time > = UpdateTimer then

Goto Updating Else

Goto WaitUntilLogTime Endif



Example 1 continued

This statement tells the software to update the TEMP1. First, the statement retrieves the correct UpdateTimer value from the extended log setup information. Then, when the current time is 60 seconds greater than the UpdateTimer, the software retrieves values from the regular log and stores them in the extended log on the workstation. This way, old values are stored. The statement updates the log once, and sets the UpdateTimer local DATETIME variable to the next time the log should update. The way it is written here, the program remains on the WaitUntilLogTime until the next update time. If you would like, you could have the program stop after the ELSE in the WaitUntilLogTime line and run this program manually

Example 2 Suppose you want to update a group of extended logs that are all members of

a group called TempPoints. You would use the UpdateExtLog statement as shown in the following example:

Program File Datetime UpdateTimer

Updating: Result = UpdateExtLog (TempPoints, UpdateTimer)



Print "Could not update extended logs in TempPoints group" Stop

Endif


Goto Updating Else

Goto WaitUntilLogTime Endif This statement tells the software to update all of the extended logs in the TempPoints group. First, the statement retrieves the correct



Example 2 continued

UpdateTimer value from the extended log setup information. Then, when the current time is 60 seconds greater than the UpdateTimer, the software retrieves values from the regular log and stores them in the extended log on the workstation. This way, the software stores the old log values. The statement updates each log once, and sets the UpdateTimer local DATETIME variable to the next time the group of extended logs should update. In this case, the group is under the root; however, if the group is not under the root, you must give the full path to the group

Example 3 Suppose you want to update all of the extended logs on the Floor4 controller.

You would use the UpdateExtLog statement as shown in the following example:

Program File Datetime UpdateTimer

Updating: Result = UpdateExtLog (Building3 Floor4, UpdateTimer)



Print "Could not update extended logs in TempPoints group" Stop

Endif


Goto Updating Else

Goto WaitUntilLogTime Endif

This statement tells the software to update all of the extended logs in the Floor4 controller at the Building3 site. Remember that you must give the full path to the controller.



Example 3 continued

First, the statement retrieves the correct UpdateTimer value from the extended log setup information. Then, when the current time is 60 seconds greater than the UpdateTimer, the software retrieves values from the regular log and stores them in the extended log on the workstation. This way, the software stores the old log values. The statement updates each log once, and sets the UpdateTimer local DATETIME variable to the next time the extended logs on the controller should update.

Example 4 If you want to update a single extended log from the Command line, you can

enter a simplified UpdateExtLog statement, with no datetime, as follows:

Command Line UpdateExtLog (Building3 Floor4 Temp1)

Example 5 If you want to update a group of extended logs from the Command line, you

can enter a simplified UpdateExtLog statement, with no datetime, as follows:

Command Line UpdateExtLog (Building3 TempsGroup)

Example 6 If you want to update all the extended logs on a single controller from the

Command line, you can enter a simplified UpdateExtLog statement, with no datetime, as follows:

Command Line UpdateExtLog (Building3 Floor4)

Example 7 To update only the input points on a controller, you can open a list of input

points using OpenList (see OpenList keyword) and then get each point in the list. By testing the ExtLogSize attribute of each point, you can determine whether or not the point is an extended log. If it is an extended log, you can then update it as you did in the earlier examples. Below is a fallthru program that opens a list of points on the Floor4 controller and updates each extended log in the list. In this case, you should not use a datetime point or variable with the UpdateExtLog statement:



Example 7 continued

Program File Object AnExtLog Numeric OK, Result

OpeningLogs: OK = OpenList ("Input", AnExtLog, Building3 Floor4)

Testing: If OK = Success Then Goto GettingLog Else Goto ClosingLogs

GettingLog: If GetObject (AnExtLog) is Not Success Then

Goto ClosingLogs Else

If AnExtLog ExtLogSize > 0 Then Goto Updating

Else Goto GettingLog

Endif Endif

Updating: Result = UpdateExtLog (Building3 Floor4)


goto GettingLog Else

Print "Could not update extended logs" Goto ClosingLogs

Endif

ClosingLogs: OK = CloseList (AnExtLog) Goto Ending

Ending: If Ok = Failure Then Print "Cannot Close List" Stop



Example 7 continued

This statement tells the software to update all of the extended logs in the Floor4 controller at the Building3 site. Remember, you must give the full path to the controller. For further information on getting point with GetObject, see the OBJECT, OpenList, GetObject, and CloseList keywords.

Related Keywords

DeleteExtLog

Products Supported

CyberStation

Modes Available



VERSION System variable

Format VERSION

Purpose Gives current version of the software running on the CX series controllers or

Infinet controllers.

Remarks You cannot change the value of VERSION. The control system software

updates it automatically when you update your control system software.

Example If you contact Andover Controls Technical Support for assistance, you may

be asked the version of control system software you are running. To determine the version, type the following on the command line:

Command Line PR VERSION

The controller responds with the following message: Version = 1.3

Products Supported


Modes Available



WEEKDAY System variable

Format WEEKDAY

Purpose Gives current day of week, from SUNDAY through SATURDAY.

Remarks When printed, the weekday is spelled out as Sunday, Monday, Tuesday,

Wednesday, and so on through Saturday. You may, however, compare the WEEKDAY to: • The numbers 1 through 7 (1 equal to Sunday). • The abbreviated three-letter names (first three letters). • The entirely spelled out weekday.

All values of the weekday are as follows:

Constant Short Name Long Name 1 SUN SUNDAY

2 MON MONDAY

3 TUE TUESDAY

4 WED WEDNESDAY

5 THU THURSDAY

6 FRI FRIDAY

7 SAT SATURDAY

Example 1 You can spell out names for printing or for comparing to an actual day:

Program File IF WEEKDAY IS SATURDAY THEN PRINT WEEKDAY

Output Saturday


WEEKDAY, continued

Example 2 You can use the short name or the constants 1 through 7 for comparing the

weekday in an IF statement:

Program File IF WEEKDAY IS > SUN OR WEEKDAY < 7 THEN…

Alias WKD

Products Supported


Modes Available



WHILE Statement

Format WHILE number

statement

statement

...

ENDWHILE

Purpose Carries out the instructions in the statements within the loop over and over

again as long as the given number is true.

Remarks Replace statement with any complete instruction that tells the program what

to do next or what action to take. Replace number with any number or expression, including a date and time or name that stand for one. If the number is TRUE (non zero) the while loop is executed. If it is FALSE (zero) , the while loop is not executed. If the number is a variable it can be changed inside the while loop to cause the loop to terminate. One event within the loop must occur to satisfy the number.


SET COUNTER TO 0 WHILE COUNTER < 10

COUNTER = COUNTER + 1

ENDWHILE

CAUTION The scan action limits the number of statements that can execute on one line to 5000. Be careful of exceeding the limit when using WHILE.

! !


WHILE, continued

Related Keywords

IS… BREAK CONTINUE

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs


WHITE Constant

Format WHITE

Purpose Sets the graphics on the DCX 250 Display Unit screen to white when you

use it with SETDISPLAY.

Remarks The graphics on the 250 screen may be blue or white.

Example You set the color of the graphics on the DCX 250 Display Unit, as follows:

Program File SET DISPLAY (WHITE)

Related Keywords

BLUE SETDISPLAY

Products Supported


Modes Available

Programs


WriteFile Function

Format WriteFile (file_variable_name, string, number, numeric_var_or_point)

Purpose Puts data into (writes to) a text file you opened earlier with OPENFILE.

Remarks WRITEFILE automatically starts writing data where it last stopped unless

you specify that it must start at another position, such as the beginning or end of the file. You can also specify a particular number of characters to move away from the current position, beginning, or end of the file with POSITIONFILE file_variable_name must be a control system software FILE variable name you created earlier with FILE to correspond to a text file name. Replace string with any string of characters in quotation marks or expression that gives a string that contains the text the control system software should place (write) in the file. Can also be a local string variable or a string point. Replace number with the number of characters to write into the file from the string. May be any number or expression that gives a number up to 129. Replace numeric_var_or_point with a numeric variable or numeric point to store the number of actual characters WRITEFILE has put in the file (written) once the writing is complete. This value should be the same as number above; if it is not, then an error has occurred. After you created a FILE variable name and you open a file with OPENFILE, you can then write into the text file with WRITEFILE. If WRITEFILE is successful, it returns the number of characters it has written (in the numeric variable or numeric point you designate) and it returns SUCCESS. If it is not successful, it returns FAILURE.

Example 1 Suppose you want to write a record to a text file. After you define the FILE

variable name and open the file, you can write to it with WRITEFILE.


WriteFile, continued

Example 1 continued

In the example below, the WRITEFILE statement gives the FILE variable name, the name of the string that contains the record (RECORDLINE), and the number of characters in the string (80), and a numeric variable to receive the actual number of characters written (CHARS). If the entire process (OPENFILE, WRITEFILE, and CLOSEFILE) is successful, the program stops at the end of the CLOSING line. If any failures occur, the control system software runs the FAILING line. Once you have opened the file and taken action on it, you must close the file with CLOSEFILE using the name you created with FILE

Program File FILE ZONEDATA STRING 80 RECORDLINE NUMERIC CHARS, OK

LINE Opening SET OK = OpenFile ("c:\text\zone.txt", WRITEONLY, ZONEDATA) IF OK = FAILURE THEN GOTO FAILING ELSE GOTO Writing

LINE Writing OK = WriteFile (ZONEDATA, RECORDLINE, 80, CHARS) GOTO Closing

LINE Closing OK = CloseFile (ZONEDATA) IF OK = FAILURE THEN PRINT "A File Function Has Failed"

Example 2 To read multiple records from one text file and write them to another, you

would use READFILE, then WRITEFILE. Because you have two files, you would create two FILE variable names. You call the file that the control system software should retrieve data from ZONEDATA and the one it should put data into SETPTFILE. You would then want the control system software to read records until it reaches the end of the file, so you would test for READFILE = EOF. The



Example 2 continued

control system software should read 16 characters or until a carriage return indicates the end of the record. (You could also use POSITIONFILE to set the position to begin the action⎯ first for reading, then for writing.) For each record (16 characters long), you would want WRITEFILE to put the record in the new file, called SETPTFILE, as follows:

Program File WRITEFILE (SETPTFILE, RECORDLINE, 16, CHARSWRITTEN)

Below is a complete program that copies the text from one file to another:

Program File FILE ZONEDATA, SETPTFILE STRING 80 DATALINE, RECORDLINE, RESULT NUMERIC CHARSREAD, CHARSWRITTEN, OK

LINE Opening CHARSREAD = 0 If OpenFile ("c:\text\zone.txt", READONLY, ZONEDATA) = Failure Then

RESULT = "Could not open zone.txt file" GOTO FAILING

Endif If OpenFile("c:\text\stpt.txt", WRITEONLY, SETPTFILE) = Failure Then

RESULT = "Could not open stpt.txt file" GOTO FAILING ELSE GOTO Copying

ENDIF GOTO Copying

LINE Copying OK = ReadFile (ZONEDATA, DATALINE, 16, CHARSREAD, "|13") IF OK = FAILURE THEN

RESULT = "Could not read file" GOTO FAILING

ELSE IF OK = EOF THEN

RESULT = "Could not read file" GOTO Closing

ENDIF ENDIF



Example 2 continued

OK = WriteFile (SETPTFILE, RECORDLINE, CHARSREAD, CHARSWRITTEN) IF OK = FAILURE THEN

RESULT = "Could not write file" GOTO FAILING

ENDIF

LINE Failing PRINT RESULT GOTO CLOSING

LINE Closing IF CloseFile (ZONEDATA) IS FAILURE THEN RESULT = "Could not close file" IF CloseFile (SETPTFILE) IS FAILURE THEN RESULT = "Could not close file" PRINT RESULT

Related Keywords

FILE CLOSEFILE OPENFILE READFILE POSITIONFILE FAILURE SUCCESS

Products Supported

CyberStation

Modes Available

Programs


WriteProperty Function

Format WriteProperty(Object_Property, Value, Priority, Index)

Purpose To set a property of a BACnet object.

Returns SUCCESS or FAILURE

Remarks Replace Object_property with the object name, including a full path name,

followed by a property name. The object Identifier and Property Identifier are combined as one argument. Replace Value with the actual value to set the property to. This is optional. If it is not present, then the next argument, Priority, must be present to perform a Relinquish command (see Relinquish key word). Replace Priority with the priority number, ranging form 1 (highest) to 16 (lowest). This is optional. Applies only to a BACnet commandable property (refer to Chapter 14 in the Continuum CyberStation Configurator’s Guide Version 1.6, 30-3001-781). If not present, the property value that matches with priority 10, if applicable, is used for controllers. For CyberStations, the priority from the BACnet Preferences is used.

Replace Index with an array index. This is optional. It only applies to an array-type property. The index is ignored whenever it is not applicable.

Example 1 Use WriteProperty to set the Value property of an object to 100.

‘Value property is assumed

WriteProperty(BacnetDevices\B4\B3\BV1, 100)

Or

‘Value property is explicitly mentioned.

WriteProperty(BacnetDevices\B4\B3\BV1 Value, 100)


WriteProperty, continued

Example 2 Use WriteProperty to set the Present_Value property of an object to 100,

using priority 5.

WriteProperty(BacnetDevices\B4\AV1 Value, 100, 5)

Example 3 Use WriteProperty to set a point log entry to 100, using index 2.

WriteProperty(NET1\CX1\AV1, 100, , 2) ‘Note that the priority ‘argument is not passed.

Example 4 Use WriteProperty to relinquish a command using priority 5.

WriteProperty(BACnetDevices\B4\AV1, 100, , 5) ‘Value is not passed

‘this is equivalent to a Relinquish

Related Keywords

ReadProperty Relinquish

Products Supported

BACnet series controllers and CyberStation.

Modes Available



YEAR System variable

Format YEAR

Purpose Gives the current year from 1989 through 2088.

Remarks You cannot change the YEAR. The controller automatically updates it.

When printed, the four-digit year is given.

Example To take an action in the distant future, such as sending a reminder message

to check certain pieces of equipment, you use the YEAR system variable to test the year:

Program File IF YEAR IS 2000 THEN PRINT "Welcome to the Twenty First Century."

Related Keywords

DAYOFMONTH DAYOFYEAR YEAR

Alias YR

Products Supported


Modes Available


Plain English Language Reference A-1

Appendix A

ASCII Codes

General Information

Introduction Most keyboards have a limited set of characters. There are no characters to

control such actions as feeding the paper, turning on a beep, scrolling the screen, and so on. For these actions, you use a set of codes called the American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII). You use these codes in a PRINT statement to control your printer or screen.

Examples You might use the ASCII code for a character in the STRINGFILL function.

You must give STRINGFILL the code for the character you want to fill the string with.

For example to create a bar in a chart, you might fill a string with asterisks using STRINGFILL and the ASCII code for asterisk, 42, as follows:

STRINGFILL (KILOWATTS, 42)

You could make a similar bar in a chart using pound signs:

STRINGFILL (PRESSURE, 35)

For example, to make a printer beep, you send the beep code to it in a PRINT statement, like this:

PRINT "|7" TO PRINTER1 You can also make a terminal beep, as follows:

PRINT "|7" To feed the paper forward one form feed:

PRINT "|12" TO PRINTER1 To send an ESCAPE to the printer:

PRINT "|27" TO PRINTER1

More printer control statements may be possible for your printer. See the manufacturer's documentation.

A-2 Andover Controls Corporation

ASCII Codes

ASCII Code Table

The ASCII Codes are listed in the following table:

��

��

��

Code (in Decimal) Character or Action� ��

��13

��Carriage Return.

��

��

��

��10

��Line Feed.��

��11

��Vertical TAB.

��12

��Form Feed.

��14

��SO

��15

��SI��

��16��DLE��

��17��DC1

��1

��SOH��

��2��STX��

��3

��ETX

��4

��EOT��

��5��ENQ��

��6

��ACK

��7

��Beep.��

��8

��Backspace.��

��9

��TAB Forward.

��0

��NUL


ASCII Codes

ASCII Code Table continued

��

��

��


��21

��NAK

��

��

��

��18

��DC2��

��19

��DC3

��20

��DC4

��22

��SYN��

��23

��ETB

��24

��CAN

��27

��ESC

��32

��Space.

��38

��&��

��39

��’ (apostrophe)��

��40��(

��42

��*��

��43��+

��41

��)

��33

��!

��25

��EM

��26

��SUB

��28

��FS

��29

��GS��

��30��RS��

��31

��US

��36

��$

��37

��%

��34

��"��

��35��#

��44

��, (comma)


ASCII Codes


��

��

��


��48

��0

�

�

��

��45

��–��

��46

��. (period)

��47

��/

��49

��1��

��50

��2

��51

��3

��54

��6

��59

��;

��66

��B

��67

��C��

��68

��D

��60

��F��

��71

��G

��69

��E

��60

��<

��52

��4��

��53

��5

��55

��7��

��56

��8��

��57��9��

��58

��:

��63

��?

��64

��@

��61

��=��

��62��>

��65

��A


ASCII Codes


��

��

��


��74

��J

��

��

��

��72

��H��

��73��I

��75

��K��

��76��L��

��77

��M

��80

��P

��85

��U

��91

��[��

��92��\��

��93

��]

��95

��-

��96

��‘

��94

��^

��86

��V

��78

��N��

��79��O

��81

��Q��

��82��R

��83

��S��

��84��T

��89

��Y��

��90

��Z

��87

��W

��88

��X

��97

��a��

��98

��b


ASCII Codes


��

��

��


��102

��f

�

�

��

��99

��c��

��100��d��

��101

��e

��103

��g��

��104

��h

��105

��i

��108

��l

��113

��q

��120

��x

��121

��y��

��122��z

��124

��|��

��125

��}

��123

��{

��114

��r

��106

��j��

��107

��k

��109

��m��

��110

��n

��111

��o��

��112

��p

��117

��u

��118

��v

��115

��s��

��116��t

��119

��w


ASCII Codes


��

��

��


�

��

��126

��~��

��127

��DEL

Plain English Language Reference B-1

Appendix B

Reserved Words

Overview

What Are They?

Reserved words are those words used as system constants, keywords, system functions, and system variables that are reserved as part of Andover’s Plain English programming language. Being familiar with these words helps avoid naming errors.

What’s in this Appendix

This appendix lists all Andover Controls reserved words. A tabular listing of Continuum system constants begins on the next page. Following this table is a second table containing an alphabetical listing of all other reserved words including Plain English keywords, system functions, and system variables. Make sure you do not use any of these words as a line label or program variable in any of your Plain English programs. Note: Before you import older programs to your Continuum system, check to see if they contain any of these reserved words used as line labels or program variables. Remove or replace any that do with appropriate substitute words.

B-2 Andover Controls Corporation

System Constants

Table of System Constants

Continuum system constants are listed in alphabetical order, as follows.

ABA1 AckAndRTN

ABA2 Acked

AC256P AcknowledgeAlarm

AC4P4 AcknowledgeAlarms

AC8P AckOnly

ACC_Airflow AckOnlyThisOne

ACCBackingUp AckOrRTN

ACCBackupDisabld Acks

ACCBackupDone AckUntilTime

ACCBackupEnable AC_Output

ACCBackupInactve ACP

ACCBackupNeeded AC4plus432

ACCBackupNow Active

ACCCoolStartOnly ActivityEvent

AccessEvent ActUnack

AccessModeNoCommunication ACXDatabaseFault

AccessModeNoDatabase ACXDatabaseFaultCleared

AccessModeNormal ADAExitRequestTrouble

ACCExpression ADAExitRequestTroubleCleared

ACCFlashEmpty ADAInputTrouble

ACCFlashFailure ADAInputTroubleCleared

ACCFlashValid AddListElement

ACC_Keypad Admin

ACC_InputCurrent Administrate

ACC_Pneumatic Alarm

ACC_Pressure AlarmEnrollment

ACCTemp(DEGC) AlarmEvent

ACCTemp(DEGF) Allowed

ACCWarmStartOnly AllPaths

ACCWarmToCool Alm0

AC_Flag Alm1

ACFloatType Alm2

Ack Alm3

AckAfterRTN Alm4

Ack_Alarms Alm5 AckAll Alm6


System Constants, continued

Table of System Constants, continued

Alm7 b3853

Alm8 b3865

AlmNotification b3866

Amperes b3867

AnalogInput b3885

AnalogOutput b3886

AnalogValue b3887

Apr b3920

April B4920

Area Bars

AreaBased Baud300

Armed Baud1200

ASCIIDump Baud2400 ASCIIReload Baud4800

AtomicReadFile Baud9600

AtomicWriteFile Baud19200

AudioDatatype Baud19-2K

AudioOnToFault BeepOnToFault

AudioOnToNormal BeepOnToNormal

AudioOnToOffNormal BeepOnToOffNormal

Aug Binary

August BinaryInput

Authenticate BinaryOutput

AuthenticationFailed BinaryValue

Automatic Bit

AutomaticLifeSafety Bitstring

AutoSet BlinkOnAlarm

Available Blue

A_Variable BondSensorTrouble

Average BondSensorTroubleCleared

b3608 BondSensorViolation

b3616 BondSensorViolationCleared

b3624 BooleanType

b3800 Btus

b3804 BtusPerHour

b3810 BtusPerPoundDryAir

b3814 BufferOverflow

b3850

b3851




CabinetTamperDoorClosed Counter

CabinetTamperDoorOpen CounterClockwise Calendar CreateObject

CannotDelete CriticalEquipmentControl

CannotRename CriticalEquipmentMessage CardMode CubicFeet

CentimetersOfMercury CubicFeetPerMinute

CentimetersOfWater CubicMeters ChangeOfBitstring CubicMetersPerHour

ChangeOfFailure CubicMetersPerSecond

ChangeOfState Currency1

ChangeOfValue Currency2 ChangeValues Currency3

Char Currency4

CharacterSetNotSupported Currency5 CharType Currency6

CK34 Currency7

ClassDefault Currency8

ClearDisplay Currency9 Clockwise Currency10

Closed Current

Coldstart CustomCard COM1 CustomMagStripe

COM2 CustomWiegand

COM3 CX9000 Command CyclesPerHour

Commport CyclesPerMinute

Config ConfigurationInProgress Configure ConfirmedCOVNotification ConfirmedEventNotification ConfirmedPrivateTransfer ConfirmedTextMessage Connected Connecting Constant Container ControllerUser Data

Copy DatabaseSynchronization CopyFromTemplate DataBits5




DataBits6 DistributeAreaMembersToAllACXS

DataBits7 DistributeAttributeSet

DataBits8 DistributeEnableDisableAreaLink

DateAndTimeType DistributeOnePersonToACX DateDataType DistributeOnePersonToAllACXS DateTime DistributePersonDeleteToAllACXS

Days DistributePersonsToACX Dec DistributeResetPreload

December Done

DefaultTime Door DegreeDaysCelsius Door_Ajar

DegreeDaysFahrenheit DoorAjarCleared

DegreesAngular DoorChannelOverrideAndDoorLocked

DegreesCelsius DoorChannelOverrideAndDoorUnlocked DegreesCelsiusPerHour DoorChannelOverrideCleared

DegreesCelsiusPerMinute DoorExitRequestTrouble

DegreesFahrenheit DoorExitRequestTroubleCleared DegreesFahrenheitPerHour DoorLockedBySchedule

DegreesFahrenheitPerMinute DoorSwitchTrouble

DegreesKelvin DoorSwitchTroubleCleared

DegreesPhase DoorUnlockedBySchedule Delete Double

DeleteObject DoubleType

Denied DownloadInProgress Dereferenced DownloadRequired

Device DynamicArray

DeviceAndBelow DynamicCreationNotSupported DeviceBusy Email

DeviceCommunicationControl EmailAck

DeviceOnly EmailOnOffNormal

Digital EmailToFault Disabled EmailToNormal

Disconnected Enabled

Disconnecting EnableDisable DisplayAlarmView EntryKeypadTamper

DisplayPanel EntryReaderFault

DistNotUsed EntryReaderFaultCleared

DistributeAddAreasToPersonnel Enumeration DistributeAreaDeleteToAllACXS Eof

DistributeAreaMemberDeleteToAllACXS Equal




ErrorEvent i2608

Ethernet802_2 i2616

Ethernet802_3 i2624

EthernetII i2800 EthernetSNAP i2804

Even i2810

EventEnrollment i2814

EventNotification i2850 EventView i2851

EvtNotification i2853

ExitKeypadTamper i2865 ExitReaderFault i2866

ExitReaderFaultCleared i2867

ExpressionAlarm i2885

Failed i2886 Failure i2887

FallThru i2920

False IAm Fault Idle

Feb IHave

February Image Feet ImperialGallons

FeetPerHour ImperialGallonsPerMinute

FeetPerSecond Inactive

Female InAlarm File Inches

FileAccessDenied InchesOfMercury

FileBegin InchesOfWater FileCurrent IncompatibleSecurityLevels

FileDatatype Incomplete

FileEnd InconsistentParameters

Fill InconsistentSelectionCriterion FixedArray Infinet

FloatingLimit Infinity_37

FloatType InfinityController InfinityData




InfinityDateTime Jul

InfinityFunction July InfinityInfinetCtlr Jun

InfinityInput June

InfinityNumeric KeyGenerationError InfinityOutput Kilograms

InfinityProgram KilogramsPerHour

InfinityString KilogramsPerMinute InfinitySystemVariable KilogramsPerSecond

InheritFromTemplate Kilohertz

InProgress Kilohms

Instantaneous Kilojoules Int KilojoulesPerKilogram

Internal KilometersPerHour

InvalidAPDUInThisState Kilopascals InvalidArrayIndex KilovoltAmperes

Invalid_Attempt KilovoltAmperesReactive

InvalidAttemptAntiPassbackViolation Kilovolts

InvalidDataType Kilowatts InvalidFileAccessMethod KilowattHours

InvalidFileStartPosition KilowattHoursPerSquareFoot

InvalidOperatorName KilowattHoursPerSquareMeter InvalidParameterDataType LAN

InvalidTag LastMonth

InvalidTimeStamp Last15min IOBidirectional Last30min

IOInput LastWeek

IOOutput LastYear

IOUModule Lbus Jan LessThan

January LessThanOrEqual

Joules LifeSafetyMessage JoulesPerDegreeKelvin Lighting

JoulesPerKilogramDegreeKelvin List JoulesPerKilogramDryAir ListView




Liters MegajoulesPerSquareFoot

LitersPerHour MegajoulesPerSquareMeter LitersPerMinute MegavoltAmperes

LitersPerSecond MegavoltAmperesReactive

Load Megavolts LoadFailed Megawatts

Loading Megohms

LocalScope Meters Locked MetersPerSecond

Log MilesPerHour

LogAverage Milliamperes

LogInstantaneous Millibars LogMaximum Millimeters

LogMinimum MillimetersOfMercury

LogView Millivolts LON Milliwatts

LongIntType Minimum

Loop MinimumOnOff

Looping Minutes LowAlarm MissingRequiredParameter

LowLimit Momentary_Unlock

LowLimitenable MomentaryUnlocked Lumens Mon

Luxes Monday

Male Months Manual MonthToDate

ManualAreaAssign MonthToNow

ManualLifeSafety Move

ManualOperator Multiple Mar MultistateInput

March MultistateOutput

Maximum MultistateValue May NCParallel

Megahertz NCSeries

Megajoules NCSerPar




NetBeui NotSet

NetBios NoUnits

NETWARE Nov

Network November

NETWORK_CMDLINE NoVTSessionsAvailable

NetworkDialup Object

NetworkWide ObjectClass

New ObjectDeletionNotPermitted

NoAccess ObjectId

NoComm ObjectIdentifierAlreadyExists

NoDataBase ObjectReference

NoFaultDetected Oct

Nofill October

NoFlowControl Odd

NonCollection Off

None OffLine

NonOperational OffNormal

NoObjectsOfSpecifiedType Ohms

NoOutput On

NoPad -On

NOParallel OneMonthToDate

Normal OneMonthToNow

NormalMessage OneWeekToDate

NoSegmentation OneWeekToNow

NoSensor OneYearToDate

NOSeries OneYearToNow

NOSerPar OnLine

NoShortcuts Opened

NoSpaceForObject OpenLoop

NoSpaceToAddListElement Operational

NoSpaceToWriteProperty OperationalProblem

NotAcked OperationalReadOnly

NotConfigured Other

NotEqual OutOfRange

NotificationClass Out_Of_Services




OverRange PrimaryEMail

Overridden PrimaryForward

PageAck PrimaryLog

Paging PrimaryPaging

PageToFault PrimaryPrint

PageToNormal PrintAck

PageToOffNormal Printer

Panel PrintReport

PanelMeter PrintToFault

ParameterOutOfRange PrintToNormal

PartsPerBillion PrintToOffNormal

PartsPerMillion Priority3

Pascals Priority4

PasswordFailure Priority7

Pending Priority9

PendingReload Priority10

PendingRetry Priority11

Percent Priority12

PercentPerSecond Priority13

PercentRelativeHumidity Priority14

PerHour Priority15

Permanent_Unlock Priority16

Permanent_UnlockCleared ProcessError

PerMinute Program

PerSecond ProgrammingLevel

Personnel Prompt

PinChange Property

PINMode PropertyIsNotAList

PINOnly PsiPerDegreeFahrenheit

PlayContinuous PTP

PlayOnce PTPConnecting

Port_OutOfServices PTPDisconnected

PoundsForcePerSquareInch Radians

PoundsMass Raw

PoundsMassPerHour ReadAccessDenied

PoundsMassPerMinute ReaderDoor

PowerFactor ReadOnly

PreemptedByHigherPriorityTask ReadProperty




ReadPropertyConditional Schedule

ReadPropertyMultiple ScheduleDownload

ReadWrite ScheduleMode

Ready Seconds

Real Security

RefreshDatabase SecurityLevel

ReinitializeDevice SecurityNotSupported

RemoteScope SegmentationNotSupported

RemoveFromStatusWhenAcked SegmentedBoth

RemoveListElement SegmentedReceive

RepeatEmail SegmentedTransmit

RepeatLog Sep

RepeatPaging September

RepeatPrint ServiceRequestDenied

RequestKey Services

RequestToExit ShortcutCreate

RequiresCommission ShortcutsAsShortcuts

Resources ShortedLoop

Restart ShortIntType

ReturnToNormal ShowDisplayValue

Reverse ShowMessage

RevolutionsPerMinute ShowSpaceTempt

RTD1000TempC ShowTimeValue

RTD1000TempC2W Singular

RTD1000TempF SiteConfiguration

RTD1000TempF2W SiteMode

RTDTemp(DEGC) Smallint

RTDTemp(DEGF) SoftAck

RTNOnly SpecifiedByRules

RtnUnack SpecifiedByUser

Run SpecifiedElapsedTime

Running SpecifiedTime

Sat SQLDateTime

Saturday StopBit1

Save StopBit1.5




StopBit2 Therms

String Thu

StringDataType Thursday

Structure TimeDataType

SubscribeCOV Timeout

Success TimeStampType

Sun TimeSynchronization

Sunday Tinyint

Supervised Today

SvFloat ToFault

SX8000 TonHours

Table ToNormal

TankProbe Tons

TankNet TonsRefrigeration

TCPIP ToOffNormal

TCP_IP TooManyArguments

Temperature TriState

TemplateCreate Trouble

TemplateRefresh True

TermoCoupBTempC Tue

Text Tuesday

TextType UnArmed

ThermoCoupBTempF UnauthorizedOpenDoor

ThermoCoupETempC UnauthorizedOpenDoorCleared

ThermoCoupETempF Unavailable

ThermoCoupJTempC Unassigned

ThermoCoupJTempF UnconfirmedCOVNotification

ThermoCoupKTempC UncomfirmedEventNotification

ThermoCoupKTempF UncomfirmedPrivateTransfer

ThermoCoupRTempC UncomfirmedTextMessage

ThermoCoupRTempF UndefinedEnumeration

ThermoCoupSTempC UnderRange

ThermoCoupSTempF Union

ThermoCoupTTempC Unknown

ThermoCoupTTempF UnknownDevice




UnknownObject VT220

UnknownProperty VtClose

UnknownVTClass VtData

UnknownVTSession VtOpen

Unload VTSessionAlreadyClosed

Unloaded VTSessionTerminationFailure

Unlocked V_Variable

UnrecognizedService Waiting

UnreliableOther Warmstart

UnsignedCharType WattHours

UnsignedLongType Watts

UnsignedShortType WattsPerSquareFoot

UnsupportedObjectType WattsPerSquareMeter

Urgent WattsPerSquareMeterDegreeKelvin

UrgentMessage Wed

UsGallons Wednesday

UsGallonsPerMinute Weekly

Valid_Access Weeks

ValidAccessAntiPassbackViolation WeekToDate

ValidAccessDuress WeekToNow

ValidAccessNoEntry Wiegand26

ValidAccessTimedAntiPassbackViolation WhenFinished

ValueOutOfRange White

ValueRepeat WhoHas

Varbinary WhoIs

Varchar Window

Vertical WithinController

VideoDatatype WriteAccessDenied

View WriteOnly

ViewOnly WriteProperty

Voltage WritePropertyMultiple

Voltamperes Wyse

VoltAmperesReactive Xdriver

Volts XdrvInstalled

VT100 XdrvNotInstalled




XdrvRemove

XdrvRemoved

XdrvRun

XdrvRunning

XdrvStop

XdrvStopped

XdrvTransition

XonXoff

XonXoffCtsRts

X_Variable

Yearly

Years

YearToDate

YearToNow

Yesterday

ZoneNumberBased


Additional Reserved Words

Table of Additional Reserved Words

The following table lists additional Plain English reserved words consisting of system variables, system functions and keywords listed in alphabetical order.

Note: As a programmer, you may not use any of these words as a line label or program variable.

Above Breakpoint Disable Exp Len

Abs By Disconnect Exponential Length

AckAlarm Case Div Fact Less

Acos Cd Divided Factorial Let

Adjust Ceiling Does First Like

Advise Change Dom Floor Line

Alarms Chr Doy For LinePoint

All ClearScreen DrawEllipse Freemem Ln

Am Close DrawLine From Load

And CloseFile DrawRectangle GetExtLog Locate

Append CloseList Dt GetName Log

Arcsine CloseWindow Dump GetObject Logoff

Arctangent Cls E Go Logout

Arctangent2 Connect Either Goto Lookup

Arg Continue Else Greater Max

Asc Control En HangUp Maximum

Asin Cos Enable Hod Maxitem

Ask Cosine Encrypt Hour MessageWindow

Atan CurUser Encrypted HourOfDay Mid

Atan2 Curvefit End Hr Min

Average CurWorkstation EndIf If Minimum

Avg Date EndPolyLine ImportFile Minitem

Basedon DateTime EndSelect In Minus

Beep DayOfMonth EndWhen Include Minute

BeginPolyLine DayOfYear EndWhile Initiate Mod

Below Dde EnergyNet InitModem Modify

Between Del Equal Input Modulate

Bitand Delete Equals Inputs Month

Bitnot DeleteExtLog Erase Is Move

Bitor Dial Errors Kill Mth

Bitxor DiffTime Execute Last Mult

Break Dis Exists Left Multiplied


Additional Reserved Words, continued

Table of Additional Reserved Words, continued

Neither Rotate Than

Next Round The

Not Run Then

Number Save Through

Numeric Sc Thru

NumToStr Scan Time

Object Sd TimeOfDay

Open Search Timepiece

OpenFile Sec Times

OpenList Second To

Or Select Tod

Output SendCommand Trace

Outputs SendFile Trunc

P Set Truncate

Param SetACValue Turn

Passed SetDisplay Unadvise

Pid Shell Until

PlayAudio Show Update

Plus ShowReport UpdateAlarms

Pm Shut UpdateEvents

Poke Sin UpdateExtLog

PollACValue Sine Val

PopAlarm Site Version

PositionFile Sqrt Weekday

Pr StandardDeviation Where

PreParse Start While

Print StatusLine With

Prompt Step Wkd

Random Stop Write

Read String WriteFile

ReadFile Stringfill Year

ReceiveFile StrToDate Yr

Reload StrToNum

Report StrToTime

Request Sum

Return Tab

Right Tan

Rnd Tangent

Rot Terminate

Plain English Language Reference C-1

Appendix C

Objects and Attributes*

General Information

Introduction The table below lists all of the objects available in the Plain English language

for the controllers and CyberStation workstations. Starting on the next page, the attributes for each of these class objects are listed in tabular form.

* BACnet controller properties vs. Plain English names are covered in Appendix E

Continuum Objects for the Plain English Language

The following table shows you a listing of the objects in Plain English.

• AccessEvent • ElevatorInfo • InfinitySystemVariable

• ActivityEvent • ErrorEvent • IOUModule

• ACXList • EventEnrollment • ListView

• AlarmEnrollment • EventLogControl • MultistateInput

• AlarmEvent • EventNotification • MultistateOutput

• AlarmInfo • EventView • MultistateValue

• AnalogInput • Filter • Network

• AnalogOutput • Folder • NetworkDialup

• Area • Function • Numeric

• AreaLink • Graphics • ParamInfo

• BinaryValue • Group • Personnel

• ClassName • GroupMember • Program

• CommPort • ImExportRef • RootClass

• ControllerUser • InfinityController • Schedule

• DateTime • InfinityDateTime • SecurityLevel

• Device • InfinityFunction • SecurityLink

• BinaryInput • InfinityInfinetCtlr • ShortCut

• BinaryOutput • InfinityInput • String

• DistributionBatch • InfinityNumeric • TemplateInfo

• DistributionObject • InfinityOutput • User

• Door • InfinityProgram • DoorList • InfinityString

Andover Controls Corporation C-2

AccessEvent Attributes

AccessEvent Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an AccessEvent object.

Attribute Description

AreaID Area involved in access event

CardNumber Card Number

CardType Card Type

Description Description of Object

DeviceID Net Controller reporting the event

DoorID Door reporting the event

EventMessage Either the mode of operation for valid access or the reason for invalid access

EventType Type of event - valid access, etc.

ID SQL Object ID - Not meaningful to the user

LoggingWorkstaID Workstation that received the event

NonABACardNumber Non ABA Card number

PersonID Person involved in the event

SiteCode Site code of the card in the event

TimeOfLog Time that workstation logged event to database

TimeStamp Time that event took place

ZoneCode Zone code of the card involved in the event


ActivityEvent Attributes

ActivityEvent Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an ActivityEvent object.


ActionCode System used number to refer to activity type

Caller Code Not meaningful to the user


EventObjectID The object asscociated with the activity

EventObjectName The object asscociated with the activity


NodeName The name of the device from which the activity took place

Operator Text The text entered by the person signing off on the activity

OTUser The user name of the person signing off on the activity

TimeStamp The time the activity took place

UserID The full path to the user

UserName The name of the user


ACXList Attributes

ACXList Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an ACXList object.


AreaID Not meaningful to the user

AreaUsage Not meaningful to the user

DeviceID Not meaningful to the user

NetworkID Not meaningful to the user


AlarmEnrollment Attributes

ALarmEnrollment Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an AlarmEnrollment object.


AckTranstoFault Binary bitmap that corresponds to the alarm number that has made a transition from normal to Fault

AckTranstoNorm Binary bitmap that corresponds to the alarm number that has made a transition back to Normal

AckTranstoOffNorm Binary bitmap that corresponds to the alarm number that has made a transition from normal to Alarm

Alarm1…Alarm8 Equals "on" if alarm attached in this position is in alarm else equals "off"

Alarmenable Binary bitmap that corresponds to which of the eight alarm positions are enabled

AlarmFaults Reflect fault status of any alarm link attached - not currently implemented

AlarmFlags Bitmap of which alarms are active (as with alarmvalue) - not currently implemented

Alarmgraphicpage Not currently implemented

AlarmInfo Indicates if alarms (advanced only on ws) are attached

AlarmType Not meaningful to the user

Alias Alias of the Object

AudioFileFault Path and name of wav file to play on fault

AudioFileNormal Path and name of wav file to play on RTN

AudioFileOffNormal Path and name of wav file to play on Alarm

BaseLink Meaningless to the user

CreatedBy Name of user who created object

CreateTime Time of object creation

Description Description of object

DeviceID Name of the device owning the object

DeviceModel Not Currently Implemented

DistPending Indicates that distribution is pending for this object

EditLock Indicates if object has been locked to additional Edits

EventNotificationID Lists Event Notification associated with Basic Alarms (WS points only)

EventType Type of alarm - out of range, high limit, expression, etc.

FollowUpRule Not meaningful to the user

Graphics Not meaningful to the user


AlarmEnrollment Attributes, continued

ALarmEnrollment Attributes Table, continued


IconID Not meaningful to the user

ID SQL Object ID - Not Meaningful to the User

IncludeObject Not meaningful to the user

LastChangeBy Name of the user making the last change

LockedBy Not Currently Implemented

LockingWorkstation Not Currently Implemented

MsgTextFault Message delivered on fault

MsgTextNormal Message delivered on RTN

MsgTextOffNormal Message delivered on Alarm

Name Name of the object

NetworkNumber Not meaningful to the user

NotifyType Type of notification to be used

Owner Owner of object

Properties Not meaningful to the user

ReferenceCount Not meaningful to the user

ReferencePoint1… ReferencePoint4

Alarm Referenece Point

RefObjectType Not meaningful to user

RefTemplate Name and path of template from which object was created

ReportID Not meaningful to the user

ScheduleEvents Not viewable by user

SecurityLevel Name and path of any security level attached to the object

Template True if object is a template

TemplateAlias Alias that will be used when creating objects from this template object - meaningful only for templates

TemplateCreateRule Not meaningful to the user

TemplateName Name that will be used when creating objects from this template object - meaningful only for templates

TimeLocked The time the object was last opened

Type The type of the object

Virtual Flag Not meaningful to the user


AlarmEvent Attributes

ALarmEvent Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an AlarmEvent object.


AckbyUser User who acknowledges the alarm

AckbyWorkstation Workstation from which alarm was acknowledged

Active Set to true if the alarm has not satisfied all of its return criteria


EventObjectID Object that went into alarm

EventObjectValue Value of object

EventType Alarm Type

FromState The previous state of the alarm event (Alarm, Return To Normal)

ID SQL Object ID - Not meaningful to the Uuer

InitDeviceID Name of the device owning the object

LoggingWkstaID The name of the workstation that logs the alarm to the database

MasterAlmID Name of the alarm enrollment

MessageText Text message for alarm

OperatorActions Actions typed in manually by the operator

OPeratorText Text that is typed in by the person acknowledging the alarm, if that option is in place

SilencedbyUser Use who silenced the alarm

SilencedbyWorkstation Workstation from which the alarm was silenced

Silenced Time Time at which the alarm was silenced

TimeofAck Time at which the alarm was acknowledged

TimeofLog Time at which the alarm was logged to the database

TimeStamp Time at which the alarm took place

ToState Current state of the alarm event


AlarmInfo Attributes

AlarmInfo Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an AlarmInfo object.






AlarmEnable Binary bitmap that corresponds to which of the eight alarm positions are enabled




AlarmLink1…AlarmLink8 Not meaningful to user

ParentObject The full path to the object





AnalogInput Attributes

AnalogInput Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an AnalogInput object.


AckedTransitions Not meaningful to the user - currently not supported










Alias Alias of the object

BaseLink Not meaningful to the user

Channel Terminal number into which this object is wired

ClassSortID Not meaningful to the user

Conversion Equation with which the elec. value should be converted into engineering units



DeadBand Amount that the value must differ from low or hi limit in Basic Alarm (WS points only)




DeviceType Not meaningful to the user

DigitalFilter Allows for digital filtering to be applied automatically to the input



ElecScaleBot The bottom electrical value that corresponds to the bottom value in Engineering Units


AnalogInput Attributes, continued

AnalogInput Attributes Table, continued


ElecScaleTop The top electrical value that corresponds to the top value in Engineering Units

ElecType Object's electrical type (voltage, current, digital, etc.)

ElecValue Object's actual electrical value

EngScaleBot The bottom value in Engineering Units that corresponds to the bottom electrical value

EngScaleTop The top value in Engineering Units that corresponds to the top electrical value

EventEnable Lists which of the 3 basic alarms are enabled - Alarm, RTN, Fault (WS points only)


EventState Lists current basic alarm State - Alarm, RTN, Fault (WS points only)


Format Format to be used in displaying object value


HighLimit High Limit to be used in Basic Alarm (WS points only)

IconID Not meaningful to user



IOU IOU number of object

IsShortcut Not meaningful to the user


LCDSettable Capable of being set from the LCD

LimitEnable Not meaningful to the user



LogIntervalSecs Number of seconds between entries in an automatic log

LogType Type of automatic log - instantaneous, average, etc.

LowLimit Low limit to be used in Basic Alarms (WS points only)




OutOfService Service state of an object (similar to enable/disable - WS points only)




AnalogInput Attributes, continued

AnalogInput Attributes Table, continued





Reliability Statement of the reliability of the obect's value - not currently implemented


Resolution Not meaningful to the user



Size Number of elements in an object's manual array or automatic log

StatusFlags Not meaningful to the user

Template When true, indicates that object was made from a template


TemplateCreateRule Not meaningful to the user


Threshold The amount, in engineering units, that the value must change before it will update

TimeDelay The time delay used in evaluating Basic Alarms (WS points only)


TriggerThreshold The amount, in engineering units, that the value must change before it will update


Units The engineering units to be used for this object

UpdateInterval The update interval to be used for this object (WS points only)

Value The value of this object after any conversions that may be required


AnalogOutput Attributes

AnalogOutput Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an AnalogOutput object.


AckedTransitions Not meaningful to the user - Currently not supported




Alarmgraphicpage Not Currently Implemented
















DeviceType Not meaningful to the user

DigitalFilter Allows for digital filtering to be applied automatically to the output





AnalogOutput Attributes, continued

AnalogOutput Attributes Table, continued





















LimitEnable Not meaningful to the user










OverrideValue The actual valus of the output that is overridden




AnalogOutput Attributes, continued

AnalogOutput Attributes Table, continued







Resolution Not Currently Implemented




StatusFlags Not meaningful to the user



TemplateCreateRule Not meaningful to user







UpdateInterval The update interval to be used for this object (WS points only)



Area Attributes

Area Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an Area object.












BaseLink Not meaningful to the user



DeletePending Indicates if there is a delete action pending for this area




DistPending Not meaningful to the user




IconID Not Meaningful to the User



KnownOccupCount Number of occupants currently in an area - not currently implemented




Area Attributes, continued

Area Attributes Table, continued













State Indicates if an object has been enabled or disabled








AreaLink Attributes

AreaLink Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an AreaLink object.


AreaID Name and path of the area

DeletePending Indicates if there is a delete action pending for this link

DistPending Indicates there is a distribution pending for this object

DistTime Time of last successful distribution

ID Not meaningful to the user

PersonID Name of the person involved in this link

PreLoad Determines if link is to be loaded to the controller or if validation is to take place at the server level

SchedID Name of schedule associated with this link


TimeEntered Time of last entry into the area


BinaryValue Attributes

BinaryValue Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for a BinaryValue object.


AckedTransitions Not meaningful to user - Currently not supported




ActiveText Text to be displayed when object is in active state.









ChangeofStateCount Number of times discrete object has changed state.

ChangeofStateTime Time of last change of state.





DeviceModel Not meaningful to user



ElapsedActiveTime Amount of time point has been in the active state





BinaryValue Attributes, continued

BinaryValue Attributes Table, continued






InactiveText Text to be displayed when object is in inactive state.



LockedBy Not currently implemented

LockingWorkstation Not currently implemented



MinimumOffTime Point will be latched at inactive value for this time

MinimumOnTime Point will be latched at active value for this time















StatusFlags Not Meaningful to the User






BinaryValue Attributes, continued

BinaryValue Attributes Table, continued




TimeofActiveTimeReset Time stamp of most recent time that the active state was reset

TimeofStateCountReset Time stamp of most recent time that the state counter was reset




ClassName Attributes

ClassName Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for a ClassName object.


ObjectTypeID Not meaningful to the user

ObjectTypeName Not meaningful to the user


CommPort Attributes

CommPort Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for a CommPort object.











CommStatus Not Meaningful to the user for this object - always reads online



CTS Clear To Send

CurrCommDir Not Meaningful to the User

CurrentUser When configured as a user port, indictates the current user of that port

CXD Carrier Detect

DataLength Length in bits that data will be sent and received

DefaultBaud Default baud rate

DefaultMode The mode that the port will revert to when closed.




DialPrefix String to be sent to the built - in Continuum modem before dialing the number on a dial command

DialSuffix String to be sent to the built - in Continuum modem after dialing the number on a dial command

DirectConnect Indicates that the port will be hard wired to a terminal device



CommPort Attributes, continued

CommPort Attributes Table, continued


DSR Data Send Ready

DTR Data Terminal Ready


FlowControl Type of flow control that will be used by the port

FollowUpRule Not Meaningful to the User

Graphics Not Meaningful to the User

HangUpCmd String to be sent to the built-in Continuum modem when a hangup command is issued



IncludeObject Not Meaningful to the User


Learn Set to true when the user attempts to gather information on all Infinet devices attached to a port configured as Infinet



MaxPrintCols

MaxPrintRows

MenuBar

Messages Indicates if there are currently messages in the message window corresponding to the comm port

Mode Current operating mode of the comm port

ModemInit String to be sent to built-in Continuum modem on power-up.


NetworkNumber Not Meaningful to the User

NotChangeable Not Meaningful to the User

Owner Not Meaningful to the User

ParamLabels XDriver configuration value

Parity Parity setting of the port

PortNum SVC number corresponding to the port

PrintDone Indicates that the previous print instruction to the port is complete

ProgramAttached Not Meaningful to the User

Properties Not Meaningful to the User

Reconfigs Indicates the number of bus reconfigurations that have occurred - Meaningful only for Infinet ports




CommPort Attributes, continued

CommPort Attributes Table, continued



ReportID Not Meaningful to the USer

RequestedMode Not Meaningful to the User

Resume Not Meaningful to the User

RI Ring Indicator

RTS Ready to Send



StartCharacter Character that will cause a window response when port is set to autoset


StatusBar The bar at the bottom of the screen when the port is configured as autoset

StopBits Number of stop bit for port





TerminalType The type of terminal emulation to be used when port is set to autoset

TimedOut Indicates that the port has timed out of its previous instruction


TimeOutValue Value to be assumed after the time out

TrackCXD Disconnect port and revert to default mode upon loss of carrier

TransmitCount Number of transmissions


Windows

XDriverErrCount Number of errors encountered in communication via an Xdriver to a third party device

XdriverError Type of error encountered in communication via an Xdriver to a third party device

XdriverErrTime Time of error encountered in communication via an Xdriver to a third party device

XdriverFile File to be used when reloading to install Xdriver

XdriverStatus Status of Xdriver communication


ControllerUser Attributes

ControllerUser Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for a ControllerUser object.












BaseLink Not meaningful to user

ClassSortID Not meaningful to user








FullName Full Name of User









ControllerUser Attributes, continued

ControllerUser Attributes Table, continued


LoginProgram InfinityProgram to be run at controller when user logs in

LogOutProgram InfinityProgram to be run at controller when user logs out



Owner Not Meaningful to the User

Preemption Not Meaningful to the User














VirtualFlag Not Meaningful to the User


DateTime Attributes

DateTime Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for a DateTime object.















DateValue Date portion of the date time object













DateTime Attributes, continued

DateTime Attributes Table, continued








LogIntervalSecs Not Currently Implemented

LogValue Not Currently Implemented







Properties Not meaningful to user















TimeValue Time portion of the date time object




Device Attributes

Device Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for a Device object.


AccessEventViewerMaxEntries

Maximum number of entries allowed in the access viewer for this workstation

AcknowledgeEmail FormatFile

Default location of this type of format file

AcknowledgePager FormatFile


AcknowledgePrinterFormatFile






AlarmCount Number of alarms currently in alarm viewer

AlarmEmailFormat File







AlarmPagerFormat File


AlarmPrinterFormat File


AlarmPrinterPath Full path to the printer for alarm printing

AlarmViewerMax Entries

Maximum number of entries allowed in the alarm viewer for this workstation


APDUSegTimeout Time in milliseconds between retransmission of an APDU (Application Protocol Data Unit) segment


Device Attributes, continued

Device Attributes Table, continued


APDUTimeout Time in milliseconds between retransmission of an APDU segment that requires ack but that has not been received.

ApplSoftwareVer Application software version

BasdgeFormatFile Location



CommandlinePrompt Prompt to be used on the command line

CommStatus Communication status of device



DaylightSavings Status

States if device is currently under DST

DefaultBadgeFormat Format file to be used when printing badges

DefaultFolder Folder into which all new objects will be placed when created.

DefaultImageCropping True/False as to the use of the default image cropping

DefaultReportViewer Program to use for the viewing of report files

DefaultRouter IP address of the default router






FirmwareRev Not meaningful to user

FolderType Not Meaningful to the User.



IAMBroadcastIntvl Not Currently Implemented

IAMBroadcastScope Not Currently Implemented

IAMRemoteNetwork Not Currently Implemented




IncrementReportFile If true subsequent reports by the same name will be appended to existing report file

IPAddress IP address of the device






LocalDate Date at the device

LocalTime Time at the device

Location A string that can be used to specify the physical location of the device



MainMenuFile Name and path to the file that is displayed upon startup

MaxAPDUAccepted Number of octets that may be contained in a single APDU

MaxResponseTime Amount of time the controller will wait for a response to a request before timing out. Not PE settable.

ModelName Continuum CyberStation


NetworkFlag Not Meaningful to the User


NumberAPDURetries Maximum number of tries for an APDU to be retransmitted

OperatorTextAlarmAck Indicates if the operator is required to enter text on alarm acknowledgement (requires CFR setting)

Owner Owner of this device

PrimaryAccessServer Indicates if the device should carry on the functions of primary access server

ProbeTime Frequency in seconds that the device will confirm the communication status of other devices


ProtocolConfClass A number that indicates which specific set of standardized protocol services and object classes are supported

ProtocolObjectTypes Support

Object classes that are supported

ProtocolServicesSupport Services that are supported

ProtocolVersion Version of BACNet protocol supported - Not implemented at this time





ScheduleADL Indicates if device is set to autodownload schedules


SecondaryAccessServer Indicates if it device will satisfy requirements of the secondary access server






SegmentationSupport Indicates if this device supports segmentation of messages and, if so, if it supports transmission, reception or both.


SubnetMask Subnet mask of device

SystemStatus Indicates ONLINE, OFFLINE and OUT OF SERVICE








UTCOffset Universal Time Coordinate offset in minutes

VendorIdentifier Number that corresponds to the BACNet vendor of this device

VendorName Name of the BACNet vendor of this device


BinaryInput Attributes

BinaryInput Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for a BinaryInput object.
















ChangeOfStateTime Time of last change of state.






DeviceType Not Meaningful to the User



ElapsedActiveTime Amount of time discrete point has been in active state





BinaryInput Attributes, continued

BinaryInput Attributes Table, continued





















Polarity Polarity (NO vs NC)















BinaryInput Attributes, continued

BinaryInput Attributes Table, continued





TimeofActiveTime Reset

Time stamp of most recent time that the active state was reset

TimeofStateCount Reset

Time stamp of most recent time that the state counter was reset




BinaryOutput Attributes

BinaryOutput Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for a BinaryOutput object.



























ElapsedActiveTime Amount of time descrete poin t has been in the active state



BinaryOutput Attributes, continued

BinaryOutput Attributes Table, continued


















MinimumOffTime Point will be latched at inactive value for this time

MinimumOnTime Point will be latched at active value for this time





OverrideValue Actual value of output as set by person overriding it

Owner Owner of the object

Polarity Polarity (NO vs NC)






RelinquishDefault The priority value the BinaryOuput is set to when all command priorities have been relinquished.



BinaryOutput Attributes, continued

BinaryOutput Attributes Table, continued












TimeofActiveTimeReset Time stamp of most recent time that the active state was reset

TimeofStateCountReset Time stamp of most recent time that the state counter was reset




DistributionBatch Attributes

DistributionBatch Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for a DistributionBatch object.


DelayOffset Not Meaningful to the User

DelayTime Not Meaningful to the User

DelayType Not Meaningful to the User

ID Not Meaningful to the User

ReferenceCount Not Meaningful to the User

StartTime Not Meaningful to the User

UserID Not Meaningful to the User

WrkStatID Not Meaningful to the User


DistributionObject Attributes

DistributionObject Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for a DistributionObject object.


BatchID Not Meaningful to the User

ClassFilter Not Meaningful to the User

CreateTime Time that the distribution activity was created

DistOpts Distribution Options

DistTime Time for next scheduled distribution of this object

EditTime Time of last editing of distribution "job"

EditUser The user who invoked the distribution

ExtraData1 Not Meaningful to the User

ExtraData2 Not Meaningful to the User

ExtraID1 Not Meaningful to the User

ExtraID2 Not Meaningful to the User


NotifyOpts Byte Code - Not Meaningful to the User

Operation Type of distribution (schedule download, etc.)

OperationOpts Not Meaningful to the User

SourceID Object requiring distribution

Status Status of the distribution (pending, failed, etc.)

StringParam XDriver configuration value

TargetID Not Meaningful to the User

UserID User intitiating distribution

WrkStatID Workstation accomplishing distribution


Door Object Attributes

Door Object Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for a Door object.





ADAChannel Terminal number into which this object is wired

ADADoorAjarTime Time required for door to be considered ajar

ADAOutputTime Time duration of relay activation on door open command


AlarmChannel Terminal number into which this object is wired







ArmCode Not Implemented at this time

ArmMode Not Implemented at this time


BondChannel Terminal number into which this object is wired

BondFailure true/false depending on status of bond sensor supervised input

BondSensor Value of bond sensor input

BondType Wiring type - NOSeries, etc.

CardFormats Format of the access cards to be used








Door Attributes, continued

Door Attributes Table, continued


DoorAjar Indicates that the door has been left open too long

DoorAjarTime Time required for door to be considered ajar

DoorChannel Terminal number into which this object is wired

DoorFault True/false depending on status of supervised input

DoorSchedule Name of the schedule attached to this door

DoorStrikeTime Time duration of relay activation on door open command

DoorSwitch Indicates if a door switch input is used

DoorSwitchChan Terminal number into which this object is wired

DoorSwitchType Wiring type - NOSeries, etc.

Duress Indicates if duress notification is to be used


EntEgrViol Indicates if there is an entry/egress violation

EntryNormMode Indicates if entry took place in normal mode

EntryNotReentry Indicates if entry took place with no reentry permitted

EntryPinDuress Indicates if entry via pin was duress

EntryRvrsCrdDur Indicates if entry via reverse card was duress

EntrySchedule Schedule attached to the entry reader

EntryZone Zone entered through entry reader

ExitAntiPassTime Time required for passback through this door to be permitted

ExitArea Area entered from exit reader

ExitChannel Terminal number into which this object is wired

ExitCount Number of people who have exited

ExitEntEgr

ExitEntrAntiPass

ExitEntrEntEgr

ExitEntrRvrsCrd Allow entry through exit door on reverse card

ExitIOU IOU number of object

ExitKyPdChan Terminal number into which this object is wired

ExitLastCard Last card number have valid access through exit reader

ExitLastSite Site code of last card number have valid access through exit reader

ExitMode Mode of Exit reader

ExitNoCommMode Exit reader in nocomm mode

ExitNoDataMode Exit reader in no data mode - no communication with access server

ExitNoRentry Indicates if exit took place with no reentry





ExitNormMode Indicates exit in normal mode

ExitPinDuress Indicates exit with pin duress

ExitRequest Indicates the presence of PIR or some form exit request sensor

ExitRequestChan Terminal number into which this object is wired

ExitRequestType Wiring type - NOSeries, etc.

ExitRvrsCrdDur Indicates exit via a reverse card duress signal

ExitSchedule Schedule attached to the exit reader

ExitZone Zone entered when going through the exit reader

Export Indicates that the object value has been tagged for export.


ForcedEntry Indicates that the door has been forced open

GeneralCode




ExitEntrRvrsCrd Allow entry through exit door on reverse card


InvalidAttempt Indicates an invalid card was used

InvalidEntryTime Indicates an attempt to enter before proper antipassback time has elapsed

InvalidExitTime Indicates an attempt to exit before proper antipassback time has elapsed

Invert Revers Polarity


LastDepEtrdPnt

LastDepExitdPnt

LastInvalidEntry Last invalid card swiped at entry reader

LastInvalidExit Last invalid card swiped at exit reader

LastPersonEntrd Last cardholder entering door

LastPersonEntrdDep Department number of last person entered

LastPersonExitd Last person with valid swipe at the exit reader

LastPersonExitdDep Department number of the last person with valid swipe at the exit reader










OpenOnExitRequest Indicates that door to be opened upon sensing exit request on exit request input

OperatingMode Current operating mode of the door

Override Indicates if the door has been overridden in the field

OverrideValue Indicates the true value of the door when it has been overridden in the field

Owner Object that owns this door object

Param1…Param6 XDriver configuration value

Port Comm port associated with Xdriver


RecordDrAjarHist Keep access event history for door ajar

RecordExitRqHist Keep access event history for exit requests

RecordForcedHist Keep access event history for forced entries

RecordInvalHist Keep access event history for invalid attempts



Refresh Rebroadcasts current value of point


RelockOnClose Relock as soon as sensor indicates closed, do not wait for strike time to elapse




Site1…Site4 Site code that can be used by readers






TimeEntered Last time a swip occurred on exit reader

TimeExited Last time a swip occurred on entry reader







UnlockSchedule Schedule attached to unlock door

ValidAccess Indicates a valid access through door



DoorList Attributes

DoorList Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for a DoorList object.


AreaID Name and path of area

DeviceID name and path of controller

DoorID Name and path of door


NetworkID Name of Network


ElevatorInfo Attributes

ElevatorInfo Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for a ElevatorInfo object.


AreaID Not Implemented at this time

DoorID Not Implemented at this time

ID Not Implemented at this time

InputChannel Not Implemented at this time

InputIOU Not Implemented at this time

OutputChannel Not Implemented at this time

OutputIOU Not Implemented at this time

State Not Implemented at this time


ErrorEvent Attributes

ErrorEvent Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for a ErrorEvent object.



ErrorCode Code to correspond to error - Not meaningful to User

EventObjectID Name of object involved in error condition


TimeStamp Time of error

UserID User initiating error

WrkStatID Workstation from which error condition occurred.


EventEnrollment Attributes

EventEnrollment Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for a EventEnrollment object.












AlarmReference Alarm name

AlarmType Type of alarm
















EventEnrollment Attributes, continued

EventEnrollment Attributes Table, continued


IssueConfirmedNotification Not Currently Implemented







OldRefBitString Not Meaningful to the User

OldRefValue Not Meaningful to the User


Priority Not Meaningful to the User

ProcessIdentifier Not Meaningful to the User















EventLogControl Attributes

EventLogControl Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for a EventLogControl object.


ArchiveFrequency Not Meaningful to the User

ArchiveName Not Meaningful to the User

ArchivePath Not Meaningful to the User

ArchiveStartTime Not Meaningful to the User

ArchiveStatus Not Meaningful to the User


LastArchived Not Meaningful to the User

LogClassID Not Meaningful to the User

MaxAge Not Meaningful to the User

MaxRecords Not Meaningful to the User

PrimaryArchiver Not Meaningful to the User

SecondaryArchiver Not Meaningful to the User

TruncateOnly Not Meaningful to the User


EventNotification Attributes

EventNotification Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for a EventNotification object.


AcknowledgementRules

Determines if acknowledgement is for all instances or only selected

AckRequired Not currently implemented








AlarmFont Font to be used when displaying alarm message



AlarmOptions Various items that are to be done when alarm occurs


AudioFileFault Path and name of wav file to play on fault

AudioFileNormal Path and name of wav file to play on RTN

AudioFileOffNormal Path and name of wav file to play on Alarm

BackGroundCOlor Background color to be used when displaying the alarm message




DeactivateCriteria Determination of what makes the alarm removed from the alarm viewer






EventNotification Attributes, continued

EventNotification Attributes Table, continued



EventNotificationID SQL Object ID - Not Meaningful to the User






InPlaceAlarm Not currently implemented










ReportID Not Meaningful to the User



SendToAll Not currently implemented





TextColor Color to be used on displaying the text of the alarm message


ToFaultBGColor Background color to use when transitioning to a condition of fault

ToFaultFGColor Foreground color to use when transitioning to a condition of fault

ToFaultFont Font to use when transitioning to a condition of fault

ToRTNBGColor Background color to use when transitioning to a return

ToRTNFGColor Foreground color to use when transitioning to a return

ToRTNFont Fontr to use when transitioning to a return



EventView Attributes

EventView Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for a EventView object.




















EventMaximum Maximum number of events permitted in view











EventView Attributes, continued

EventView Attributes Table, continued




PrimarySortDirection Sort order - ascending or descending

PrimarySortKey Item on which to sort






Reserved1… Reserved4 Not Currently Implemented


SecondarySortDirection Sort order - ascending or descending






TernarySortDirection Sort order - ascending or descending

TernarySortKey Item on which to sort




Filter Attributes

Filter Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for a Filter object.



















Duration Meaningless to the user


EndDateTime Meaningless to the user

EndTime Meaningless to the user









Filter Attributes, continued

FilterAttributes Table, continued






PreCreatedFlags Indicates that the filter is a system created filter





Relative Time Not Meaningful to the USer



SecurityLevel Name of any security level attached to object







WeekdaysArray Not Meaningful to the User


Folder Attributes

Folder Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for a Folder object.













ContainerCreateRule Not currently implemented



DefaultDevice Default device on which to create any object that is created in this folder














Folder Attributes, continued

Folder Attributes Table, continued






























Function Attributes

Function Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for a Function object.












ArgumentList Not viewable by user

BaseLink Not Meaningful to the User

ByteCode Not readable by user

CommandLine Indicates if function can be called from the command line



CurrentObject Not viewable by user

DbgStatus Not Meaningful to the User


DescriptionOfHalt Not Meaningful to the User





ErrorCode Type of error that occurred

FileAccess Not Meaningful to the User

FileSize Number of bytes in function



Function Attributes, continued

Function Attributes Table, continued







InstanceOf Not Meaningful to the User


LocalVarData Not Meaningful to the User

LocalVarList Not Meaningful to the User





OutOfService Service state of a object (similar to enable/disable-WS points only)


ProgEntry Not Meaningful to the User

ProgInfo Not Meaningful to the User

ProgOffset Not Meaningful to the User


ReasonForHalt Information on runtime errors
















Graphics Attributes

Graphics Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for a Graphics object.


Not Meaningful to the User

Binary bitmap that corresponds to the alarm number that has made a transition from normal to Fault




















GraphicsFileName Name of graphic (PIN) file









Graphics Attributes, continued

Graphics Attributes Table, continued




ObjectList List of objects that are animated on the graphic







ScheduleEvents Not currently implemented

ScreenHeight Height of the graphic screen to be displayed

ScreenWidth Width of the graphic screem to be displayed







WindowHeight Not meaningful to user

WindowState Not meaningful to user

WindowWidth Not meaningful to user

WindowXPos Not meaningful to user

WindowXScrollPos Not meaningful to user

WindowYPos Not meaningful to user

WindowYScrollPos Not meaningful to user


Group Attributes

Group Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an Group object.















DefaultView View to be presented when group firs opened - member list, history or graph









GroupFlags Not Meaningful to the User

HistoryInterval Time between rows in history view

HistoryPage Not Meaningful to the User




Group Attributes, continued

Group Attributes Table continued









PadType Method used to interpolate values between actual data




RefreshRate Time period after which to get live data on the objects in the member list



ScaleStep Steps between ticks in graphical view - Not yet implemented

ScaleType Type of scaling to be used - Not yet implemented




TemplateAlias Alias that will be used when creating objects from this template object – meaningful only for templates




TimeView Default time range for graph view




GroupMember Attributes

GroupMember Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an GroupMember object.


ClassID Not Meaningful to the User

GroupMemberBos Bottom Scale for the member

GroupMemberColor Color of Pen for the member

GroupMemberController Not Meaningful to the User

GroupMemberFlag Not Meaningful to the User

GroupMemberOwned Name and path of the member

GroupMemberOwner Name and path of the owning group

GroupMemberSite Not Meaningful to the User

GroupMemberTos Top of Scale for the member

HistoryInterval Time interval between entries in history view


PadType Type of interpolation to be used

ScalesStep Number of steps in scale

ClassID Not Meaningful to the User


ImExportRef Attributes

ImExportRef Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an ImExportRef object.


AlarmFlag Not Meaningful to the User

ExportMast1… ExportMast8 Not Meaningful to the User

Handle Not Meaningful to the User


ImportFlag Not Meaningful to the User

InfExportMast Not Meaningful to the User

NetAddress Not Meaningful to the User

Site Not Meaningful to the User


InfinityController Attributes

InfinityController Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an InfinityController object.













CommStatus Communication status of controller


ControllerOptions Read only listing of options available in controller




DefaultRouter IP address of default router






EthernetID MAC address of controller






InfinityController Attributes, continued

InfinityController Attributes Table continued




IOU1Model… IOU8Model

IOU model that is installed - meaningful only forAEclipse controllers (CX9400)

IPAddress IP address of controller


Location String that can be entered to indicate physical location



MaxResponseTime Maximum time that can pass before a response is tobe received and after which a retransmission will occur

Model Model of controller


NetworkID BACNet network number - Not currently implemented



PPPIPAddress PPP IP address

PPPSubnetMask PPP Subnet setting

ProbeTime Frequency in seconds for requesting communication status of other devices on the controller's network






ScheduleEvents Not viewable by the user


SerialNum Serial number of the controller

SubnetMask Subnet mask setting







VersionNum Software version number


InfinityDateTime Attributes

InfinityDateTimeAttributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an InfinityDateTime object.






















ExtLogInterval Log Interval to be used with extended logs.

ExtLogSize Number of elements to be stored in the extended log for this object.






IODirection Directional configuration for specific IO module points.


InfinityDateTime Attributes, continued

InfinityDateTimeAttributes Table continued




LastExtLogTime Time stamp of the most recent entry in an object's extended log

LastLogTime Time stamp of an object's last entry in the local automatic array.

LCDState Where applicable, indicates whether or not a point can be displayed on the local display.







Owner Owner of the Object.

Param1… Param6

XDriver configuration value

Port Xdriver comm port









Setpoint Indicates if point is to be used as a setpoint. Allows its value and manual array to be restored at reload.












InfinityFunction Attributes

InfinityFunctionAttributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an InfinityFunction object.













ByteCode Byte code of function - Not viewable by user

CommandLine Indicates if function can be called from command line









FileSize Bytes in file






InfinityFunction Attributes, continued

InfinityFunctionAttributes Table continued

























InfinityInfinetCtrl Attributes

InfinityInfinetCtrl Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an InfinityInfinetCtrl object.

























Handle Numerical identifier




InfinetError Type of error occuring on Infinet device


InfinityInfinetCtrl Attributes, continued

InfinityInfinetCtrl Attributes Table continued


InfinetErrorCount Number of errors since the last clearing

InfinetErrTime Time of the last error

InfinetID ID number of Infinet device


Location String that can be entered to show the physical location of the device



Model Model number of the controller


NetworkID The ACCNetID of the parent CX controller



Port Comm port that "owns" this infinet controller

PortNum The numerical svc corresponding to the Comm port that "owns" this infinet controller








SerialNum Serial number of the infinet controller







VersionNum Software version


InfinityInput Attribute

InfinityInput Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an InfinityInnput object.











AlarmVlaue Binary bitmap that corresponds to the alarms that may be active on this point



Button1…Button6 References the buttons on a smart sensor - Attribute is only meaningful for smart sensor inputs








DigitalFilter Indicates if automatic digital filtering will be implemented

DisplayMsg Used in the programming of the smart sensor input

DisplaySelect Used in the programming of the smart sensor input

DisplayValue Used in the programming of the smart sensor input




InfinityInput Attribute, continued

InfinityInput Attributes Table continued
















Invert Revers polarity (NO vs NC)










LowerFluidLevel Float reading when input is configured as tank monitoring probe





Port Comm port used for Xdriver



InfinityInput Attribute, continued

InfinityInput Attributes Table continued







ResistorType Wiring type when input is configured as supervised

RTD1…RTD6 RTD reading when input is configured as tank monitoring probe















InfinityNumeric Attribute

InfinityNumericAttributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an InfinityNumeric object.































InfinityNumeric Attribute, continued

InfinityNumericAttributes Table continued

















Port Comm port used by Xdriver





















InfinityOutput Attribute

InfinityOutput Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an InfinityOutput object.




























InfinityOutput Attribute, continued

InfinityOutput Attributes Table continued













Invert Reverse Polarity (NO vs NC)












Override Indicates if the output has placed in manual control in the field

OverrideValue Actual state of the output when it has been placed on manual control in the field



Port Comm port used by the Xdriver







InfinityOutput Attribute, continued

InfinityOutput Attributes Table continued
















InfinityProgram Attribute

InfinityProgram Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an InfinityProgram object.












AutoStart Indicates that the program will start immediately upon compiling to the controller


CommandLine Indicates that the program can be started directly from the command line



CurrentLine Holds the name of the line that is currently being processed

DefaultPort The port to which any communication or print instructions will be issued unless a different port is explicitly declared






ErrorCode Numerical representation of a runtime error

ExecTimeOut Not Meaningful to the User


FileSize Size of the file in bytes


InfinityProgram Attribute, continued

InfinityProgram Attributes Table continued


FlowType Specify program flow to be either looping of fall through



CurrentLine Holds the name of the line that is currently being processed





LineStartTime Initial time of processing of current line






ProgPending Not Meaningful to the User









TD Amount of time that program has been processing the currentline in days





TH Amount of time that program has been processing the currentline in hours


TM Amount of time that program has been processing the currentline in minutes

TS Amount of time that program has been processing the currentline in seconds



InfinityString Attribute

InfinityString Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an InfinityString object.































InfinityString Attribute, continued

InfinityString Attributes Table continued










Port Comm port used by Xdriver












StringSize Number of characters in string









InfinitySystemVariable Attribute

InfinitySystem Variable Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an InfinitySystemVariable object.































InfinitySystemVariable Attribute, continued

InfinitySystem Variable Attributes Table continued





















SVType Data type - Not meaningful to user









IOUModule Attribute

IOUModule Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an IOUModule object.













CommStatus Communication status of module















Learn This is a command that invokes a learn. No data is stored. NOT PE settable



IOUModule Attribute, continued

IOUModule Attributes Table continued



ModelName Module type

ModuleID Module identiying number




ProgramID Version of IO firmware














Wink Test communication status , causes LED to flash on module


ListView Attribute

ListView Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an ListView object.















DBQualifier Database qualifying condition to limit entries in view






Filter Time range by which to filter view



HighlightBKColor Background color of highlighted rows

HighlightFGColor Foreground color of highlighted rows

HighlightQualifier Reason to highlight row





ListView Attribute, continued

ListView Attributes Table continued



ListClass Class from which to select list

ListTemplate Template of a list

LiveDataonDemand Force list to go out to the field to gather live data when the list is first viewed

LiveDataRefreshRate Frequency with which to updat the live values in the list

LiveQualifier Live condition criteria by which to restrict the list






PathType Path designation upon which list is to be run

PromptFlag Not Meaningful to the User






ReportTemplate Template within which report should be built when list is printed



Shortcuts Not Meaningful to the User

ShowGridLines Determines if lines should be drawn around list fields when list is printed








MultiStateInput Attribute

MultiStateInput Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an MultiStateInput object.





















DigitalFilter Indicate if digital filtering is to be used.








MultiStateInput Attribute, continued

MultiStateInput Attributes Table continued


















NumberofStates Determines how many different states a multistate IO point can have

















MultiStateInput Attribute, continued

MultiStateInput Attributes Table continued









MultiStateOutput Attribute

MultiStateOutput Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an MultiStateOutput object.





















DigitalFilter Indicate if digital filtering is to be used.








MultiStateOutput Attribute, continued

MultiStateOutput Attributes Table continued


















NumberofStates Determines how many different states a multistate IO point can have








RelinquishDefault









MultiStateOutput Attribute, continued

MultiStateOutput Attributes Table continued










MultiStateValue Attribute

MultiStateValue Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an MultiStateValue object.





























MultiStateValue Attribute, continued

MultiStateValue Attributes Table continued


































Network Attribute

Network Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an Network object.











AlarmReferencePointforUpdates

If remote site, this point will be examined for change (when connected) and alarm updates occur when point changes

AlarmUpdateIntvl Set period of time after which a remote site will have its alarms updated



CarrierWait Number of seconds to wait for a carrier indication

CommID Not meaningful to user

ConnectScript Script to be processed when connection is required

ConnectWaitTime Amount of time to wait, in seconds, before connection is established







DialWait Number of seconds to wait before a dial instruction is to be processed

DisableUpdate Indicates if automatic updating has been halted by the user


Network Attribute, continued

Network Attributes Table continued


DisconnectScript Script to be processed when a disconnect is requested

DisconnectWaitTime Amount of time to wait before a disconnect is to be complete



EventRefPoint If remote site, this point will be examined for change (when connected) and event updates occur when point changes

EventUpdatInterval Set period of time after which a remote site will have its events updated



GraceInterval Not Meaningful to the User





LastALarmUpdate Time of last alarm update


LastEventUpdate Time of last event update



MaxResponseTime Maximum time that can pass before a response is tobe received and after which a retransmission will occur



NetworkProtocol Protocol used by Network

NetworkType Not meaningful to user

NetworkUTCOffset Universal Time Constant offset to be used by entire network


PhoneNumber Phone number to be dialed for connection to remote network

PortNum Not meaningful to user





RemovePersonSynch Distribute to all networks on person deletion



Network Attribute, continued

Network Attributes Table continued


SafetyInterval Amount of time after which no activity will result in a disconnect



SendtoACX Not viewable by user

SendtoCX Not viewable by user

SynchDB Turns on database synchronizatio





TimeDifference Not meaningful to user



UniquePins Not currently implemented


NetworkDialUp Attribute

NetworkDialUp Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an NetworkDialUp object.





ActiveAlarmSync Indicates if all alarm infromation will be extracted on dial up

ActiveEventSync Indicates if all event infromation will be extracted on dial up


AlarmPollInterval Amount of time in minutes that will pass between dial ups to poll for alarms












DisconnectIdleTime The amount of time with no activity that will result in a disconnect



EventPollInterval Amount of time in minutes that will pass between dial ups to poll for events






NetworkDialUp Attribute, continued

NetworkDialUp Attributes Table continued









PhoneBookEntry Individual telphone number used to dial network

PhoneFile Text file that is used to store the telephone numbers





RemoteNetwork Indicates if network requires dial out


RouterCX Name of the CX that is to serve as a router for all communication to the remote site









Numeric Attribute

Numeric Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an Numeric object.




























Numeric Attribute, continued

Numeric Attributes Table continued







LimitEnable Not Meaningful to the User
















RelinquishDefault













Numeric Attribute, continued

Numeric Attributes Table continued







ParamInfo Attribute

ParamInfo Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an ParamInfo object.




Port Identifies the comport number that the Xdriver is on. NOT PE settable.



Personnel Attribute

Personnel Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an Personnel object.





ActivationDate Date that person's access card is to become active

ADA Using ADA configuration

Address Address







Alias Alias of object

AllowEntEntRgr Allows entry in spite of passback restrictions


Blood Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.

CardNumber Card number of access card

CardType Type of card format (Weigand, Infinity37, etc.)

City Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.

Country Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.



CustomControl1 Custom attribute



DateOfBirth Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.

DeletPending Indicates that delete action is pending for this object

Department Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.


Personnel Attribute, continued

Personnel Attributes Table continued


DepartmentCode Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.



DistFailed Most recent distribution of this person failed


Duress Last swipe indicated a duress condition


EmergencyCOntact Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.

EmergencyPhone Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.

EmpNumber Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.

EntryEgress

ExpirationDate Date after which person's card will become invalid

EyeColor Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.

FirstName Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.


FullName Full Name as built by combining last,first middle


HairColor Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.

Height Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.

HomePhone Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.



InactiveDisableDays Number of days that are card can be made to be active before automatically becoming disabled


Info1…Info6 String field that can be used for free form entry

JobTitle Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.


LastDoorEntered Last door at which this person had a valid access event

LastEvent Last event associated with this person

LastEventTime Time of last event associated with this person

LastName Last Name

LastZone Last Zone entered by this person

LicenseNumber Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.







LostCard Indicates if the person's regular card has been tagged as lost

MiddleName Middle name



NonABACardNumber Access card number for cards that are not ABA

OfficeLocation Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.


ParkingSticker Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.

PhotoFile File that contains the person's image

PIN Personal Identification Number


ReferencePoint1 ReferencePoint4




SavedActivationDate Previously recorded activation date

SavedCardNumber Previously recorded card number

SavedCardType Previously recorded card type

SavedExpirationDate Previously recorded card expiration date

SavedPIN Previously recorded PIN

SAvedSiteCode Previously recorded card site code

SavedState Previously recorded card state



Sex Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.

Signature File that contains an image of the person's signature

SiteCode Site code associated with this person's card

SocSecNo Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.

StartDate Date after which person's card will become valid


StatOfResidence Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.

Supervisor Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.









TimeEntered Time of last valid access




VehicleInfo Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.

Visitor Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.

Weight Field to be used for storage of this or any other individual feature.


Program Attribute

Program Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an Program object.













ByteCode Not viewable by user

CommandLine Indicates that program can be run from the command line



CurrentLine Line that is currently being processed

CurrentObject Not Meaningful to the User



DescriptionOfHalt Not Meaningful to the User





ErrorCode Type of error that occurred



FlowType Not Meaningful to the User



Program Attribute, continued

Program Attributes Table continued






InstanceOf Not Meaningful to the User

LabelList Not viewable by user


LineStartTime Time when current line began processing

LocalVarList Not viewable by user





NextFiringOrder Not Meaningful to the User

OutputType Not Meaningful to the User


PrevFiringOrder Not Meaningful to the User

PreviousLine Line that was processed inmmediately before the currentline

PrintDestination Target device for any print instructions

PrintOutputFileName File name to be used when printing to file

ProgError Run time error

ProgInfo Not Meaningful to the User

ProgOffset Not Meaningful to the User

ProgStartTime Time when program was last started


ReasonForHalt Not Meaningful to the User


Not Meaningful to the User






ShareFlag Not Meaningful to the User



Program Attribute, continued

Program Attributes Table continued


Status Indicates if a program is currently active

StatusChange Not Meaningful to the User


TD Amount of time that program has been processing the currentline in days





TH Amount of time that program has been processing the currentline in hours


TM Amount of time that program has been processing the currentline in minutes

TS Amount of time that program has been processing the currentline in seconds


WinFileHandle Not Meaningful to the User


RootClass Attribute

RootClass Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an RootClass object.
































RootClass Attribute, continued

RootClass Attributes Table continued















Schedule Attribute

Schedule Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an Schedule object.






ActiveValue String used to indicate when schedule is active.







Alias Alias of object

AutoSendFlag Inidcates that schedule is to be downloaded automatically

AutoSendTime Time at which schedule is to be downloaded

BaseLink Not Meaningful to the User







Download Indicates that schedule should be sent to the controller








Schedule Attribute, continued

Schedule Attributes Table continued


InactiveValue String used to indicate when schedule is inactive



LastDownloadTime Time that the schedule was last downloaded to the controller





Note An area that allows a user to type in notes that are associated with schedule events. Not viewable from a list

OccTimePoint Datetime point to be used to store next occupied time

OccupancyFlag Numeric to be turned on/off by schedule

OccupancyTime Time of occupancy


Priority Not Meaningful to the User















UnOccTimePoint Datetime point to be used to store next unoccupied time

UnoccupancyTime Time occupancy ends



SecurityLevel Attribute

SecurityLevel Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an SecurityLevel object.































SecurityLevel Attribute, continued

SecurityLevel Attributes Table continued

















SecurityLink Attribute

SecurityLink Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an SecurityLink object.


Action Related to maintenance of security bitmap - Not meaningful to the User

ID Related to maintenance of security bitmap - Not meaningful to the User

Locks1…Locks4 Related to maintenance of security bitmap - Not meaningful to the User

SecLevelObject Related to maintenance of security bitmap - Not meaningful to the User

SecurityLinkClass Related to maintenance of security bitmap - Not meaningful to the User


ShortCut Attribute

ShortCut Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an ShortCut object.
































ShortCut Attribute, continued

ShortCut Attributes Table continued
















String Attribute

String Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an String object.































String Attribute, continued

String Attributes Table continued














StringSize Number of characters permitted in the string








TemplateInfo Attribute

TemplateInfo Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an TemplateInfo object.




TemplateObj Name of the template


User Attribute

User Attributes Table

The following list provides you with the attributes and meanings for an User object.












CardNumber Not currently implemented

CommandPriority Not currently implemented








EmpNumber Field to be used as storage for this or other information

ExpirationDate Not currently implemented


FullName Field to be used as storage for this or other information


HomePhone Field to be used as storage for this or other information



InactivityTimer Number of minutes of inactivity after which this user will be logged off


User Attribute, continued

User Attributes Table continued




LastChangePasswordDate Time of last password change

LastLoggedOnDate Time of last logon



LoginProgram Program to be run upon user log in

LogOutProgram Program to be run upon user log off



OperatorTextLogEnable

Forces operator to get sign off on all sytem changes - requires CFR setting


PasswordChangeNextLogin

Indicates if the user is required to change password at their next log in

PersonnelRecord Not currently implemented

Preemption Not Meaningful to the USer






RequireAlarmAckOperatorText

Forces operator to get sign off on all alarm acknowledgements - requires CFR setting


SecurityKey Not Meaningful to the USer


SSN Field to be used as storage for this or other information

StartDate Not currently implemented

StartUpFile Not currently implemented







User Attribute, continued

User Attributes Table continued



Title Field to be used as storage for this or other information


UserLevel Not currently implemented

UserReport Not currently implemented

WorkPhone Field to be used as storage for this or other information

Plain English Language Reference D-1

Appendix D

Programming the DCX 250 Display Unit

About The DCX 250 Display Unit

250 Display Unit Description

The DCX 250-Display Unit has a touch-sensitive, 4.9 x 4.2-inch liquid crystal display (LCD) screen. The screen is divided into 64 numbered squares, beginning in the upper left-hand corner and ending in the lower right-hand corner (see below).

Text and graphics are positioned on the 250-display screen with line points (dots). There are 320 line points horizontally across the screen (left-to-right) and 200 vertically (bottom-to-top).

Touch Cell Grid and Line Points on the 250 Display Unit

200

1

320 1

�

�

��

�

�

��

��

��

��

�

�

��

��

��

��

�

�

��

��

��

��

� ��

��

��

��

� ��

� ��

� ��

� ��

� ��

��

��

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

Andover Controls Corporation D-2

Understanding Pre-designed Graphic Controls

Predrawn Control Graphics

You can program the 250-display unit to display predrawn graphic controls (see below) that respond to an operator touching the screen. The control graphic represents a single point or point attribute. There are 13 pre-designed graphic controls that you can select with the CONTROL keyword.

Pre-designed Controls for the 250 Display Unit

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Title1

��

��

Title2 ��

��

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

��

Title

3

��

��

��

��

Title ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

� ��

��

Title 4 5��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Title6

��

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Title7

��

� ��

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Title

��

�� ###.##

8

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

� ��

��

��

####.##��

��

Title9

####.##

��

��

Title ��

��

��

10

��

��

11 ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�� Title

��

��

��

12��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Title

###•##•#### ##:##:##

��

��

13��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Title


Understanding Pre-designed Graphic Controls, Continued

Predrawn Control Graphics continued

Each of the controls is identified by a unique style number, which appears to the left or above each control. Some include a title. Where you see the word Title, the title that you designate appears in the control. If you do not resize the control, it takes up most of the screen. You can, however, resize most controls so that you can have multiple controls display at one time. Each control can have a frame around it that you choose by selecting one of the four frame styles available.

Frame styles for the predrawn controls.

Title��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Title

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Title

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Title��

��

��1 2

3 4


Placing a Pre-designed Graphic Control on the 250 Screen

Preliminary Steps

Before you place the control, always be sure to carry out these steps: • Connect to the 250 through the Connect menu.

• Open a file and set its FlowType attribute to FallThru.

• Begin the program by using the CLEARSCREEN keyword to erase any graphic or text already on the screen.

• Turn on the background light with the BackLight keyword. If you do not turn on the background light, the control never appears.

Once you display any graphic control, graphic, or text, it remains on the screen until you erase it from a program. If you display a second control without erasing the first, both appear.

Basic Considerations

Prior to placing a control graphic on the 250 screen you will need to know the following information about the control: • Style Number

• Location

• Whether or not the operator should be able to change the point value using the control.

• Name and path to the point or attribute

Additional Considerations

In addition to the above required features of the control, the following optional considerations may apply: • A title

• Frame style

• Direction (sliders only)

• Top and bottom of scale

• Tick marks (knobs and gauges)

• Number of settings the control can be set to (called steps)

• Format (for the numbers on the tick marks)

The CONTROL Keyword

You use the CONTROL keyword to place a predrawn graphic control on the 250 display unit screen. It is a function keyword and its arguments provide all the details covered in the above two paragraphs to develop and activate any one of the 13 styles of controls.


Placing a Pre-designed Graphic Control on the 250 Screen, Continued

The CONTROL Keyword continued

The CONTROL keyword format is as follows:

CONTROL (style, left, bottom, right, top, user_change, point_or_attribute_path, title, frame, direction, bot_scale, top_scale, tickmarks, steps, format)

The items shown in bold italics are required arguments and those shown in italics are optional arguments.

The Arguments The arguments applicable to the CONTROL function are listed below.

Argument Replace With

style Integer that indicates which of the 13 control styles to display.

left Number of line points (dots) across the screen (from left to right) that locates the horizontal position of the lower left-hand corner of the control. Can be an integer from 1 to 320, or a name or expression that gives one.

bottom Number of dots up from the bottom of the screen that locates the vertical position of the lower left-hand corner of the control. Can be an integer from 1 to 200, or a name or expression that gives one.

right Number of dots across the screen (from the to right) that locates the horizontal position of the upper right-hand corner of the control. Can be an integer from 1 to 320, or a name or expression that gives one. Should be greater than the integer you give for left.

top Number of dots up from the bottom of the screen that locates the vertical position of the upper right-hand corner of the control. Can be an integer from 1 to 200, or a name or expression that gives one. Should be greater than the integer you give for bottom.

user_change TRUE or FALSE. TRUE if you want operators to be able to change the setting of the control, FALSE if not.

point_or_attribute_path Full path to the point or point attribute the control represents.

title Optional. Title, in quotation marks, you want to appear in the title bar of the control. An empty string ("") indicates no title.

frame Optional. Frame style (1 to 4) to surround the control. Zero (0) for no frame. If you do not give a frame number, the control system software automatically sets it to 0 and no frame appears, except for Control Styles 1 and 2 (buttons) which automatically include their own frames.



The Arguments continued

Argument Replace With direction Optional. Horizontal or Vertical. Applies to rectangular

slider controls (Control Styles 11 & 12) only. Circular controls (Control Style 6, 7, 8) always turn clockwise, so you do not need to indicate a direction for circular controls.

bot_scale Bottom of scale for control (usually same as for point). Required for all controls except digital controls, where the bottom of scale is automatically equal to OFF.

top_scale Top of scale for control (usually same as for point). Required for all controls except digital controls, where the top of scale is automatically equal to ON.

tickmarks Optional. Number of tick marks to display on the control's scale. Does not apply to knobs or switches. Automatically set to 2 tick marks if you do not give a number. Those two tick marks appear at top and bottom of scale.

steps Optional. Not applicable to buttons and switches. Zero (0) means the control is analog. If you do not give a number, automatically sets to 1 step for Control Styles 9 and 10. The one step is the step from the initial setting (bottom of scale) to the alternative position (top of scale). The Control Styles 6, 7, and 8 are circular and semicircular controls. Unless you give a number of steps, they automatically set to one step for each degree in the arc of the circle⎯for example, 180 degrees in the semicircular controls, or 180 steps. The maximum number of degrees is 240, not a full circle, but two-thirds of one. The control system software automatically places the 240 steps around the knob control if you do not give another number of steps. Control Styles 11 and 12 both include a linear scale. If you do not give a number of steps, they automatically set to one step for each screen dot along the length of the scale. For instance, if you place a scale horizontally at 10, 50, 60, 80, it has from the 10th dot across to the 60th dot across, or 50 dots; so it has 50 steps along that scale.

format Optional. Format (as described under the PRINT keyword) for the numbers to be displayed in the control's scale. If you do not give a format, no numbers appear, but the control system software leaves enough space for four digits ("###") and when you size the control, the space for the numbers is included in the area you designate.



CONTROL Keyword Example

As an example, we will use a vertically positioned rotational needle gauge (Control Style 7) to illustrate how to place a graphic control on the 250 screen. That style of control was chosen because it uses most of the optional arguments for its design.

Setting Up the Software

To display a vertically positioned rotational needle gauge (Control Style 7) on the screen, you would enter the following: CLEARSCREEN TURN ON BACKLIGHT CONTROL 7, 50, 50, 280, 180, TRUE, ROOM6 AirFlow, "AirFlow", 4,, 50, 250, 5, 8, "###"

Display of Rotational Needle Gauge (Control Style 7)

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

� ��AirFlow

��

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

50

100

150

200

250



Format The format of the CONTROL function keyword statement showing its

arguments is illustrated below.

Rotational Needle Gauge Control Program Statement

Argument Descriptions

The left, bottom, right, and top values position the frame so its lower left corner is at 50, 50 and its upper right at 280, 180. The control appears sized and centered within the frame (Frame Style 4). TRUE allows the operator to set the value of the control. ROOM6 AirFlow is the path to the point. "AirFlow" is the title of the control. The 4 is the frame style. The extra comma after the 4 indicates you are leaving out an argument—the direction that does not apply to gauges. The gauge always turns clockwise. The 50 is the bottom of the scale and the 250 is the top.

��

��

��Building1 Floor1 Display1 AirFlowGauge

��

CONTROL 7, 50, 50, 280, 180, TRUE, ROOM6 AirFlow, "AirFlow", 4,, 50, 250, 5, 8, "###"

��

�

��

��

��

�

�

��

��

��

Control Style

��

�

��

LocationControllerand Point

Nameon Screen

When TRUE, Operator Can Change Setting

��

��

Frame Style

��

�

��

Comma MeansSkipping Argument

Top andBottom of Scale

��

��

��

��

��Tick

MarksSteps

Format

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��



Argument Descriptions continued

If you did not specify a bottom and top of scale, the control would automatically be a digital gauge. The bottom of scale would become Off and the top of scale On. "###" defines the numbers format and indicates that up to three digits can appear in the numbers around the gauge scale.

Steps and Tick Marks

If you did not specify a number of steps, you would never see the gauge setting change, because it would automatically have 180 settings (one for each degree around the portion of the circle the gauge is composed of). To specify a particular number of steps, set 5 as the number of tick marks and 8 as the number of steps. Normally the control would have 4 steps with 5 tick marks. Because the control has 8 steps, it has an extra step between each pair of tick marks. The unnumbered steps (settings) would be 75, 125, 175, and 225. You can set the needle to one of those values.

Positioning the Control

Notice that the gauge control has two arrows. You press these arrows to raise or lower the setting of the point or attribute. The arrows must be the size of at least two cells (see Figure D-1), rather than one. You should position this control so that the two arrows are each on top of separate cells. This rule applies as long as you want the operator to have the option of setting the control. If you set the user_point argument to False, the arrows do not appear.


Setting the Control Size

Switches and Knobs Cannot be Resized

When you specify the left, bottom, right, and top, the software automatically sizes the control to fit into the area you designate unless it is Control Style 3, 4, or 5 (switches), or Control Style 6 (knob). You cannot resize Control Styles 3, 4, 5, or 6. However, when you give the location for any of the switches (Control Styles 3, 4, and 5), the center of the control must be at least 21 line points from any edge of the screen. The center of a knob (Control Style 6) must be at least 30 line points from any edge of the screen.

Gauge Controls Retain Their Shape

While rectangular shaped controls (such as Control Styles 1 and 2) stretch to fit tall/wide areas and shrink to fit short/narrow areas, gauge controls such as Control Styles 7 and 8 retain their shape. If you designate a tall narrow area for a gauge control, its width fits the area and its height becomes proportional to the width. As shown below, the gauge control is then vertically centered within the space you have defined (crosshatches (+) show the locations of the left-bottom and right-top).

Gauge Control (Control Style 7) Centered on Screen

��

��

��

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

+

+


Setting the Control Size, Continued

Gauge Controls Retain Their Shape continued

On the other hand, if you designate a short wide area for a circular control, its height fits the area and its width becomes proportional to the height. The control is then horizontally centered within the space you have defined. In either case, the gauge retains its semicircular shape.

Minimum Control Size

Any control style that you can resize never displays unless it is at least the size of one cell on the 250 screen—approximately 0.5 inch square. What are cells? The 250 screen has an underlying grid of 64 squares (see Figure D-1), approximately 0.6 x 0.5-inch. The blocks are called “cells” or “touch cells.” The software can sense when you have touched one of these cells. You must position the control so that it can use these cells. If a control is a button or switch, it can be as small as one cell; approximately 40 line points wide and 25 line points high. Any other control style must be at least two cells wide, 80 line points wide if horizontally positioned or 50 line points high if vertically positioned. (To be sure about the minimum size for any particular control, refer to "Graphic Control Style Specifications" beginning on the next page).

If the Control doesn't Appear

If the control cannot display in the space you give, the software disables the file; you can then find the error message in the File Configuration window. Any time the control does not appear, check the size of the area you designated


Graphic Control Style 1 Specifications

Type Raised Button

Details • Resizing—You may resize. Fits any size area, as long as all coordinates

are on the screen. The minimum size in line points is 40 wide by 25 high.

• frame—Do not specify. Automatically placed around control.

• direction—Not applicable.

• bot_scale—Optional. Automatically set to OFF or one of the two values of a digital attribute, such as DISABLED for STATE.

• top_scale—Optional. Automatically set to ON or one of the two values of a digital attribute, such as ENABLED for STATE.

• tickmarks—Not applicable.

• steps—Not applicable.

• format—Not applicable.

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Title



Type Flat Button

Details • Resizing—You may resize. Fits any size area, as long as all coordinates

are on the screen. The minimum size in line points is 40 wide by 25 high.

• frame—Do not specify. Automatically placed around control.







��

��

��

��

Title



Type Light Switch

Details • Resizing—Cannot resize. Positions itself in the center of the coordinates

you give, as long as all coordinates are on the screen. Be careful—if the coordinates you give force the control off the screen, it does not appear. The center of the control must be at least 21 line points from any edge of the screen.

• frame—If you do not specify a frame, the switch appears without the frame around it.







��

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

��

Title



Type Toggle Switch



• frame—If you do not specify a frame, the toggle switch appears without the frame around it.







��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Title



Type Sliding Switch



• frame—If you do not specify a frame, the sliding switch appears without the frame around it.







��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

� ��

��

��

��

�

Title



Type Knob



• user_change—If you do not allow the user to change the setting of the knob (i.e., using the FALSE argument), the arrows do not appear.

• frame—Optional.

• direction—Not applicable. Values always increase in clockwise direction.

• bot_scale—Required if it is not a digital knob. Automatically set to OFF or one of the two values of a digital attribute, such as DISABLED for STATE.

Title


Graphic Control Style 6 Specifications, Continued

Details continued

• top_scale—Required if it is not a digital knob. Automatically set to ON or one of the two values of a digital attribute, such as ENABLED for STATE.

• tickmarks—Optional. You do not have to display tick marks, but you may.

• steps—Automatically sets to the number of degrees in the arc of the circle from the first tick mark shown to the last (approximately 2/3 of a circle), for a total of 240 degrees—240 steps you can set the knob to. You may set the number of steps to a smaller number. If you set it to 0, the knob becomes analog.

• format—Optional. If you do not specify a format for the numbers that label the positions on the knob, the software does not display the number but leaves adequate space to display four digits—####.



Type Rotational Needle Gauge, Vertical Position

Details • Resizing—You may resize. Positions itself in the center of the

coordinates you give, as long as all coordinates are on the screen. Retains its basic shape even if you put it in a tall narrow area or a short wide area. Fits to the smaller of the two dimensions and the other dimension becomes proportional. Size also automatically allows for a four-digit number to appear to the right of each tick mark, even if you do not specify a format. The numbers take up space within the area you specify. The minimum size in line points is 80 wide if arrows are horizontal and 50 wide if vertical.

• user_change—If you do not allow the user to change the setting of the gauge (i.e., using the FALSE argument), the arrows do not appear.



��

��

��

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Title



Details continued

• bot_scale—Required if it is not a digital gauge. Automatically set to OFF or one of the two values of a digital attribute, such as DISABLED for STATE.

• top_scale—Required if it is not a digital gauge. Automatically set to ON or one of the two values of a digital attribute, such as ENABLED for STATE.


• steps—Automatically sets to the number of degrees in the arc of the circle from the first tick mark shown to the last (1/2 of a circle), for a total of 180 degrees—180 steps you can set the gauge to. You may set the number of steps to a smaller number. If you set it to 0, the gauge becomes analog.

• format—Optional. If you do not specify a format for the numbers that label the positions on the gauge, the software does not display the number but leaves adequate space to display four digits—####.



Type Rotational Needle Gauge, Horizontal Position


coordinates you give, as long as all coordinates are on the screen. Retains its basic shape even if you put it in a tall narrow area or a short wide area. Fits to the smaller of the two dimensions and the other dimension becomes proportional. Size also automatically allows for a four-digit number to appear to the right of each tick mark, even if you do not specify a format. The numbers take up space within the area you specify. The minimum size in line points is 80 wide if arrows are horizontal and 50 wide if vertical.

• user_change—If you do not allow the user to change the setting of the gauge (i.e., using the FALSE argument), the arrows do not appear.



��

��

��

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Title

��

�� ###.##



Details continued

• bot_scale—Required if it is not a digital gauge. Automatically set to OFF or one of the two values of a digital attribute, such as DISABLED for STATE.

• top_scale—Required if it is not a digital gauge. Automatically set to ON or one of the two values of a digital attribute, such as ENABLED for STATE.


• steps—Automatically sets to the number of degrees in the arc of the circle from the first tick mark shown to the last (1/2 of a circle), for a total of 180 degrees—180 steps you can set the gauge to. You may set the number of steps to a smaller number. If you set it to 0, the gauge becomes analog.

• format—Optional. If you do not specify a format for the numbers that label the positions on the gauge, the software does not display the number but leaves adequate space to display four digits—####.



Type Value Bar with Arrow Buttons


coordinates you give, as long as all coordinates are on the screen and those coordinates position the arrow buttons each on separate cells. Shapes to a tall narrow area or a short wide area. Must be at least 80 line points wide and 50 line points high.

• user_change—If you do not allow the user to change the setting of the value (i.e., using the FALSE argument), the arrows do not appear, so you see only the value in a box.



• bot_scale—Required if it is not a digital control. If it is for a digital point or attribute, automatically set to OFF or one of the two values of a digital attribute, such as DISABLED for STATE.

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

� ��

��

��

��

####.##��

��

Title



Details continued

• top_scale—Required if it is not a digital control. If it is for a digital point or attribute, automatically set to ON or one of the two values of a digital attribute, such as ENABLED for STATE.


• steps—Required. If you do not give a number of steps, the number defaults to 1, the correct number for a digital point or attribute.


• The value that appears in the box automatically appears in the format for the point that the control represents.



Type Value Bar


coordinates you give, as long as all coordinates are on the screen. Shapes to a tall narrow area or a short wide area. Must be at least 80 line points wide and 50 line points high.

• user_change—If you do not allow the user to change the setting (i.e., using the FALSE argument), the arrows do not appear.






��

��

####.##

��

��

Title

��

��

��

��



Details continued

• steps—Required. If you do not give a number of steps, the number defaults to 1, the correct number for a digital point or attribute.


The value that appears in the box automatically appears in the format for the point that the control represents.



Type Level Fill with Scale


coordinates you give, as long as all coordinates are on the screen. Shapes to a tall narrow area or a short wide area. Must be at least 80 line points wide and 50 line points high.



• direction—Required. Set to horizontal or vertical to determine the direction the bar moves to show a change in value. If you do not set, it is automatically horizontal.



��

��

��

��

Title

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��


Graphic Control Style 11 Specifications Continued

Details continued


• steps—Required. If you do not give a number of steps, the number defaults to the number of dots on the screen along the length of the scale.




Type Slider Pointer and Scale


coordinates you give, as long as all coordinates are on the screen. Shape to a tall narrow area or a short wide area. Must be at least 80 line points wide and 50 line points high.



• direction—Required. Set to horizontal or vertical to determine the direction the pointer moves to show a change in value. If you do not set, it is automatically horizontal.


��

��

��

��

��

Title��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

� ��

��

��



Details continued



• steps—Required. If you do not give a number of steps, the number defaults to the number of dots on the screen along the length of the scale.




Type Date Time Display Bar

Details • Resizing—You may not resize. Positions itself in the center of the

coordinates you give, as long as the center of the control is at least 95 line points from any screen edge. The control automatically positions itself in the single row of cells nearest the coordinates you give. Must be at least 80 line points wide and 50 line points high.




• bot_scale—Not applicable.

• top_scale—Not applicable.




• You must specify a datetime point or the control does not appear.

��

��

###•##•#### ##:##:##

��

��

Title

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Plain English Language Reference E-1

Appendix E

BACnet Properties and Plain English

When you create an Infinity object in a BACnet controller it automatically becomes a certain type of BACnet object. The first table below lists the Infinity object class and indicates its BACnet object equivalent. Following that are multiple tables that are arranged by BACnet Object Type. The tables map each BACnet object’s properties to the equivalent Plain English name. You would use the Plain English name in a Plain English program. Any properties not listed in the following tables are properties that are not supported on the BACnet side. The “READ/WRITE” column indicates whether these properties can be changed (W) or just read (R) by third party devices. The Restrictions column indicates any Andover Controls specific restriction on the property. Our restrictions do not necessarily coincide with those of a third party device.

E-2 Andover Controls Corporation

ACC BACnet PICS: As the Andover Controls BACnet product line expands, some of the information contained in the tables that follow may change. For up-to-date information on properties supported and any restrictions placed on their use, refer to the Andover Controls Product Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) for the particular controller you are using. These may be obtained through your dealer or directly from Andover Controls Marketing.

INFINITY CLASS BACnet OBJECT TYPE Input (ElecType: ACCTemp(DegC)) Analog Input Input (ElecType: ACCTemp(DegF)) Analog Input Input (ElecType: InputCurrent) Analog Input Input (ElecType: Voltage) Analog Input Input (ElecType: Counter) Analog Input Input (ElecType: Digital) Binary Input Input (ElecType: Supervised) Multi-State Input

Output (ElecType: Current) Analog Output Output (ElecType: Voltage) Analog Output Output (ElecType: Digital) Binary Output Output (ElecType: Tristate) Multi-State Output

Numeric Binary Value Numeric Analog Value Numeric Multi-State Value

Program Program

Schedule Schedule

Device Device

EventEnrollment EventEnrollment

EventNotification Notification Class


ANALOG INPUT

BACnet Property

Plain English Name

READ/WRITE R/W

Restrictions

COV Increment R

Description Description W Limited to 32 characters

Event_State EventState R Always Normal

Object_Name Name R Limited to 16 characters

Object_Type Type R Constant based upon the class

Out_Of_Service OutOfService W Cannot be set false if channel not configured

Present_Value Value W

Units Units W

BINARY INPUT

BACnet Property

Plain English Name

READ/WRITE R/W

Restrictions




Object_Type Type R


Polarity Polarity W


MULTISTATE INPUT

BACnet Property

Plain English Name

READ/WRITE R/W

Restrictions



Number_Of_States NumberOfStates R 3


Object_Type Type R

Out_Of_Service State W Cannot be set false if channel not configured



ANALOG OUTPUT BACnet Property

Plain English Name

READ/WRITE R/W

Restrictions

COV Increment




Object_Type Type R



Relinquish_Default RelinquishDefault W

Units Units W

BINARY OUTPUT

BACnet Property

Plain English Name

READ/WRITE R/W

Restrictions




Object_Type Type R


Polarity Polarity W



MULTISTATE OUTPUT

BACnet Property

Plain English Name

READ/WRITE R/W

Restrictions



Number_Of_States NumberOfStates R 3


Object_Type Type R



Relinquish_Default RelinquishDefault W 1..3


The following tables are for objects that do not have an ElecType. When you create the Infinity Numeric object indicated on the left of the table, you must select a BACnet Object Type from a drop down list within the editor. See note regarding numerics on the following page.

ANALOG VALUE

BACnet Property

Plain English Name

READ/WRITE R/W

Restrictions

COV Increment




Object_Type Type R

Out_Of_Service OutOfService W



Units Units W

BINARY VALUE BACnet Property

Plain English Name

READ/WRITE R/W

Restrictions




Object_Type Type R




MULTISTATE VALUE

BACnet Property

Continuum Attribute

READ/WRITE R/W

Restrictions



Number_Of_States NumberOfStates R 255*


Object_Type Type R



Relinquish_Default RelinquishDefault W 0..255

* 255 or a variable based on standard Continuum enumerations.


Note regarding BACnet Numerics

Due to the internal workings of the BACnet controllers, if you create a Numeric (binaryvalue) in a b3 or b4 BACnet controller and you import that value into another controller for use controlling an output, the output will pulse once on change of state and then shut off (equivalent to output=1).

Example:

The program below in the importing controller is a one-line looping program as follows:

output1= B4/B3/BinaryValue

A possible use for this would be a global occupancy point being used to turn the lights on.


PROGRAM

BACnet Property

Continuum Attribute

READ/WRITE R/W

Restrictions



Object_Type Type R


Program_Change StatusChange W

Program_State Status R Inactive = Idle Active & Disabled = Halted Active & Enabled = Running

SCHEDULE

BACnet Property

Continuum Attribute

READ/WRITE R/W

Restrictions



Object_Type Type R

Present_Value Value R

Priority_For_Writing Priority W 10


DEVICE

BACnet Property

Continuum Attribute

READ/WRITE R/W

Restrictions

APDU_Segment_Timeout APDUSegTimeout W

ADPU_Timeout ADPUTimeout W

Application_Software_version ApplSoftwareVersion R

Daylight_Savings_Status DaylightSavingsStatus W

Firmware_Revision FirmwareRevision R

Local_Date LocalDate W

Local_Time LocalTime W

Max_ADPU_Length_Accepted MaxAPDUAccepted R

Model_Name ModelName R

Number_Of_ADPU_Retries NumberAPDURetries W 0-255

Object_Name Name W

Object_Type Type R

Protocol_Conformance_Class ProtocolConfClass R

Protocol_Version ProtocolVersion R

Segmentation_Supported SegmentationSupport R

System_Status System_Status R

UTC_Offset UTCOffset W

Vendor_Identifier VendorIdentifier R

Vendor_Name VendorName R

EVENT ENROLLMENT

BACnet Property

Continuum Attribute

READ/WRITE R/W

Restrictions


Event_State EventState R

Event_Type EventType W * see below

Notify_Type NotifyType W

Object_Name Name W Limited to 16 characters

Object_Type Type R

* Limited to Change_Of_State, Change_Of_Value, Floating_Limit, Out_Of_Range

NOTIFICATION CLASS

BACnet Property Continuum Attribute

READ/WRITE R/W

Restrictions


Object_Name Name W Limited to 16 characters

Object_Type Type R

Continuum Plain English Reference

30-3001-872 Continuum Plain English Reference

continuum plain english reference

Documents